Author: ERIC KIM

  • On Searching for the Maximum

    On Searching for the Maximum

    Tokyo, 2011
    Tokyo, 2011

    Read as a Google Doc.

    “Over the last 10 years, what has interested me in taking photographs is the maximum — the maximum that exists in a situation and the maximum I can produce from it.” – Josef Koudelka

    I just finished the second day of my workshop here in Stockholm, and after an epic Chinese dinner with the students with good laughs and recollections from the day, I dragged my exhausted body back to the home of my buddy Brian Sparks.

    Brian Sparks is an enabler; he has one of the most comprehensive photography book collections out of all my friends, and he always inspires me with his wide breadth of knowledge, photography, and innovation.

    In the evening, we were hanging out, and watching “Chef’s Table” — a series on Netflix about chefs and their “success stories.” Most of them started from humble backgrounds, worked their way to the top, and I saw that a lot of their success came from the fact that at a certain point, they didn’t give a flying fuck about what others thought about their food. They started to only make food that made them happy, rather than trying to make food that pleased a large audience.

    While we were chilling on his couch, Brian brought over a retrospective of Josef Koudelka’s work– which was shown in Turkey in 2008. There were some excellent essays on Koudelka, his life, and his work– and this is one excerpt from a quote that Koudelka said, which hugely inspired me:

    “Over the last 10 years, what has interested me in taking photographs is the maximum — the maximum that exists in a situation and the maximum I can produce from it. Sometimes I may achieve this goal immediately, but usually, for one reason or another, I am just not able to make the most out of a situation and so I have to photograph it time after time until I succeed. This repeated effort also helps to reassure me that I have in fact achieved the maximum.” – Josef Koudelka, 1981

    Koudelka is the photographer whose life philosophy and imagery has inspired me the most. He is truly the photographer who doesn’t care about what others think about him and his work, he is only interested in achieving his own personal maximum. He wants to push his limits. He wants to see the maximum he can achieve from the places that he sees, the scenes he encounters, and the maximum of his photographic opportunity.

    Koudelka admits that he isn’t always able to achieve this maximum, but that he always pushes forward. He therefore has to “photograph it time after time” until he succeeds. He isn’t afraid to fail. In-fact, everytime he fails, he gets up and continue to push for the maximum. He can only rest at peace if he knew that he gave it his entire soul, body, and mind.

    I once read something like, “Never half-ass anything; only full-ass it.”

    Another quote from some ancient Roman philosophy went something along the lines of: “Either do something well, or don’t do it at all.”

    My problem i that I often half-ass things. I am a pretty lazy guy, and I have troubles pushing my boundaries and limits. I think in my photography one of my insecurities is that I am just repeating myself. But after reading this quote from Koudelka, it has given me so much inspiration to continue to push forward– and search for my own personal maximum. The maximum that I can achieve in my lifetime; whether that be photography, writing, or my personal relationships.

    When Koudelka was a kid, he was obsessed with airplanes. He played with toy airplanes, then started to build his own models, and then to the point that he made small functioning planes with motors. His goal in life was then to become an aeronautical engineer. But then at a certain point, he hit a limit– and he knew that he had to change course in his life, to further push and see what his maximum in life truly was:

    “I have always been interested to find what I am able to do the best. After 7 years of being an engineer, I realized I had reached my limit, that I couldn’t go further. To continue would have only meant waiting for death, and I didn’t want to do that. I didn’t want to die at the age of 30. That was one of the reasons I quit that profession.”

    The part where Koudelka says that he wanted to avoid death really struck a chord with me. I think the unfortunate thing is that a lot of people follow their passions in life and then simply find that they hit a dead end, and then emotionally and creatively they die inside. Koudelka said “fuck that” and decided to pursue another interest which was growing for him at the moment, which was photography:

    “In the meantime, my interest in photography was growing. I decided to find out what I could do with photography. I tried, and I liked I haven’t yet gone to the end, there is still something more that I can do.”

    It is incredible that Koudelka is now 77 years old, and he still hasn’t found “the end” yet. He still says that “here is something more that I can do.”

    It is sad, even some of the most famous photographers in history like Henri Cartier-Bresson gave up photography after several decades. But Koudelka kept going.

    Koudelka also had a theory; the reason why Cartier-Bresson quit photography was that Cartier-Bresson put too many limits on himself. Cartier-Bresson only shot with a Leica and 50mm and black and white film his entire life, and never really changed how he shot or his subject matter. Koudelka surmised that Cartier-Bresson hit his “maximum”, and simply decided to retire and give up.

    But Koudelka kept growing, kept evolving.

    Koudelka started off his main work shooting his “Gypsies” project on an SLR and 25mm lens. After a decade of shooting with that lens, he found that he was “repeating himself” — and he wasn’t interested in that. He then decided to pick up a Leica and a (not as wide) lens and traveled and just shot photos of anything he encountered during his travels. Even later on his career, he picked up a panoramic camera and started to shoot landscapes.

    “I want to find my limits, to see how far I can go.” – Josef Koudelka

    So as a concluding thought, think about yourself and your personal limits. Have you ever hit a brick wall in your photography, where you have achieved your personal maximum? Or is it simply an excuse? What is holding you back? Is it time, money, family, kids, your job, or something else?

    Is it your external conditions in life which hold you back, or your own creativity and inner-will?

    How bad do you want it? How bad do you want to make photographs that push your personal boundaries? Is it really your gear which is holding you back, or the fact that you waste too much time watching Netflix, and not enough time to go out and shoot?

    Personally, I make shitloads of excuses when I don’t feel inspired. But at the end of the day, that is an excuse. I say to myself, “Oh, my street portraits would be so much more interesting if I shot with a medium format camera, or if I lived in San Francisco.”

    But that is all bullshit. I need to take this advice from Koudelka; to keep pushing myself until I have found my personal limit. To find the maximum. To subtract all the bullshit from my life, and then make some time and whitespace to focus on what is truly important to me; reading, writing, and photography.

    I have no idea what my maximum is, I haven’t achieved it yet. Have you?

    Don’t settle. Keep hustling until you find your maximum.

    Love,
    Eric

    Sunday, August 30, 9:13am. Stockholm.

     

  • First Draft: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography” Book

    First Draft: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography” Book

    Eric Kim
    Draft v1 (8/28/2015)

    Special thanks to Paul King and Alan Morris who have contributed lots of edits!

    Introduction

    Dear streettogs,

    I am excited to share you the first draft of my upcoming book: “Learn from the Masters of Street Photography.” There is a ton of text, a lot of typos, grammatical error, incomplete parts (some chapters have tips, and others don’t). Oh yeah, and I haven’t added any images yet.

    This is a huge project I have been working on. When I was in Marseille a month ago, I literally locked myself up in a cafe for two weeks straight, and wrote this non-stop, distilling all of the wisdom I’ve absorbed from the “Learn From the Masters Series” on the blog.

    I have a huge favor to ask you: I am trying out something new, to embrace a “crowdsourcing” way of editing this text. I believe your collective wisdom far outweighs mine, and I could use your help.

    I have the entire text available on Google Docs (with commenting enabled). Could you help me edit the text in terms of style, grammar, spelling, and offer suggestions in the comments section?

    Looking forward to your edits, and also your suggestions, comments, feedback, and ideas in the comments on this google doc!

    Also the entire text is available below:

    Lesson #1: Get closer

    “If your photographs aren’t good enough, you’re not close enough.” – Robert Capa

    One of the common mistakes that many beginning street photographers make is this: they don’t get close enough.

    We have many fears and provide a lot of excuses for not getting close enough in our street photography. We are worried about pissing people off, we are worried about making other people feel uncomfortable, and we are worried that strangers might call the cops on us (or even worse, physically assault us).

    However realize that this is all in your head. By getting closer to a stranger, you won’t die. In-fact, I have learned that in photography (and life), with physical proximity comes emotional proximity.

    It isn’t enough to use a telephoto or zoom lens to get “close” to your subject. That is fake intimacy. By using a telephoto lens, you are treating your subjects like zoo animals, and your photography is a safari hunt.

    However, when we read the quote from Robert Capa on closeness, it doesn’t necessarily mean physical proximity. You can be physically close to your subject, and still emotionally distant. The most important thing as a street photographer is to empathize with your subject and try to connect with them, their emotions, feelings, and condition.

    In street photography I generally recommend using a 35mm lens (full-frame equivalent) for most photographers (Alex Webb, Constantine Manos, and Anders Petersen shoot with this focal length). The human eye sees the world in around a 40mm field-of-view, and I find that shooting with a 35mm lens gives you enough wiggle-room around the edges of the frame. A 50mm is fine too (Henri Cartier-Bresson was famous for using it for nearly his entire life), but in today’s crowded world, I find it to be a bit too tight. A 28mm is fantastic too (William Klein, Bruce Gilden, and Garry Winogrand have used this focal length); but realize that you have to be close enough with this lens to fill the frame.

    As a rule-of-thumb, I try to shoot with a 35mm at least two-arm-lengths away (or closer). 2 arm-lengths is 1.2 meters (around 4 feet). Therefore I always have my camera pre-focused to 1.2 meters, set at f/8, ISO 1600, and I simply go out to find moments to shoot.

    The .7 Meter Challenge

    To truly get comfortable getting closer to your subjects, try this assignment from my friend Satoki Nagata: For an entire month, only take photos of your subjects from .7 meters (1-arm-length). For this assignment, switch your camera to manual-focusing mode, and tape the focusing mechanism of your lens to that distance. By setting yourself this “creative constraint,” you will learn how to better engage your subjects and get them comfortable with you shooting at such a close distance.

    Start off by asking for permission, then once you feel more courageous, start shooting candidly.

    Shooting street photography with a telephoto

    You don’t always need to shoot with a wide angle lens. Some of the greatest street photographers have used a longer lens (e.g. Saul Leiter, Tony Ray Jones, and Rene Burri). They used long lenses intentionally to compress their backgrounds and make unique images. However, their images still have emotion and soul to them, as they caught moments of the “human condition.”

    Ultimately use the lens and focal length which suits your personality. But if you’ve never tried shooting wide and getting physically close in street photography, I recommend you to try it out, and push yourself out of your comfort zone.

    Lesson #2: Shoot from the gut

    “My photography is not ‘brain photography’. I put my brain under the pillow when I shoot. I shoot with my heart and with my stomach.” – Anders Petersen

    Anders Petersen is one of the most influential contemporary master photographers. He shoots with a simple point-and-shoot film camera (Contax T3) and shoots soulful black and white images which he refers to as “personal documentary.” He makes himself and the people he meets as his main subjects and he shoots from the heart.

    A photograph without emotion is dead. The problem that a lot of photographers make is that they try to become too analytical with their photography. They are too preoccupied with composition, framing, form, nice light, and they forget the most important thing of making a memorable image: creating an image that has heart, soul, and passion.

    So when you’re out shooting, try not to be too analytical. Shoot from your intuition and your guts. If you find anything even remotely interesting, don’t self-censor yourself. Don’t let your brain tell you: “Don’t take that shot, it is boring, and nobody will find it interesting.”, take the photograph anyway because you can always edit it out (remove it) later.

    But when is it time to become analytical?

    “It is more after when I am shooting, when I am looking at my contact sheets, and then I try to analyze and put things together.” – Anders Petersen

    Shoot from your gut when you’re out on the streets, but use your brain when you’re at home and editing your shots. Analyze your images after-the-fact as a post-mortem, and learn how to “kill your babies” (your photos that you are emotionally attached to, but you know aren’t great photos).

    Separate the shooting and editing sides of your photography. They use different parts of your brains, and if you try to do both of them at the same time, you will fail. As a practical tip, turn off your LCD screen when shooting, and refrain from looking at your images immediately. Let your shots “marinate” by not looking at them until a week after you have made your images.

    Letting a photograph “marinate”

    I shoot both film and digital, but one of the biggest advantages of shooting film is that you cannot look at your photo immediately after you’ve shot it. I generally wait 6-12 months before processing my film . This helps me truly disconnect myself emotionally from my shots, allowing me to look at my photos more objectively.

    For digital, I find it a lot harder to let my shots “marinate,” as I am prone to “chimping” (looking at your LCD screen immediately after you’ve taken photographs).

    Example

    For this photograph above, I saw this woman in London juxtaposed against this billboard behind her. I got close to her, and took two photos: both with a flash. One of them she was looking away, and one she was looking directly at me.

    At first, I didn’t think that it was an interesting shot, but then I let the shot “marinate”— and the longer I sat on the image, the more I ended up liking it. I also ended up showing the photograph to a couple of my close friends, who all agreed that it was a strong image.

    For some shots, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the more you like them. For others, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the less you like them. Imagine oil and water in a bottle. You shake the bottle hard, and they are both mixed. But the longer you wait, the oil will soon rise to the top (your good photos), while the water will sink to the bottom (your weak photos).

    Lesson #3: Don’t shoot from the hip

    “I never shoot without using the viewfinder.” – Garry Winogrand

    Another common mistake that aspiring street photographers make is that they try to overcome their fear of shooting street photography by shooting from the hip (photographing with your camera at waist-level and not looking through the viewfinder).

    Personally when I started shooting street photography, I was dependent on “shooting from the hip.” I was too scared to bring my camera’s viewfinder up to my eye, because I was afraid of getting “caught” of taking candid photos of strangers.

    Garry Winogrand was one of the most prolific street photographers in history. He shot with a Leica M4, 28mm lens, and was known for creating layered, edgy, and head-on shots. If you go on YouTube, you can see how close he is to his subjects when shooting, and he always quickly looks through his viewfinder while shooting. This allowed him to frame properly, and capture the moments he found interesting.

    The downsides of shooting from the hip

    “[Don’t shoot from the hip], you’ll lose control over your framing.” – Garry Winogrand

    In my experience, I found that shooting from the hip was a huge crutch. The more I shot from the hip, the less confident I was as a street photographer. Not only that, but as Garry Winogrand said, I lost control over my framing. My shots would be poorly framed, skewed, and any shot that I got that looked half-decent was because of luck.

    Remember, as a street photographer, you aren’t doing anything wrong. You are trying to make images that people can empathize with. If it weren’t for street photographers, historians would have no idea what people did in public spaces in the past. All of the iconic street photography done by Henri Cartier-Bresson, Helen Levitt, Robert Doisneau, and Vivian Maier wouldn’t exist.

    Be confident. Have faith in yourself. By not shooting from the hip, you’re signaling to the world that you’re not doing anything wrong. Also by using your viewfinder (or LCD screen) you can have better control over your framing and composition.

    The benefit of having your subjects see you while shooting them

    Sometimes it is good to have your subjects notice that you are about to take a photograph of them.

    For example, in this photo I shot in Hollywood, I saw this hip older lady with these great sunglasses and hat. I crouched down, and took a photograph with my Canon 5D and 24mm lens. The second I was about to take a photograph of her, she looked at me and posed with her hands (giving me the “jazz hands”).

    Now if I shot from the hip, she might have not noticed me about to take a photograph. Therefore she would have never posed for me, and this photo would never had been created.

    But does that ruin the photograph, the fact that your subject noticed you? Absolutely not. William Klein famously engaged with his subjects a lot when he shot street photography, and his presence made his photographs more vibrant, dynamic, and edgy.

    So what happens when you’re shooting street photography (with your viewfinder), and you get “caught in the act?” My suggestion: Look at your subject, smile, say ‘thank you’ and move on.

    Lesson #4: Don’t crop

    “If you start cutting or cropping a good photograph, it means death to the geometrically correct interplay of proportions. Besides, it very rarely happens that a photograph which was feebly composed can be saved by reconstruction of its composition under the darkroom’s enlarger; the integrity of vision is no longer there.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    Another common mistake a lot of photographers make is that they over-crop their shots. They are “crop-a-holics,” in which you crop every single photograph you take.

    I am also a recovering “crop-a-holic.” When I shot on the streets, I would be sloppy. I disregarded framing, as I told myself, “Eh, if I don’t get the shot right, I can always crop it later.”

    However when I learned this lesson from Henri Cartier-Bresson (the master street photographer on composition), I decided to give it a try. At first, it was difficult not to crop my shots. But when I gave myself the “creative constraint” of not cropping, it forced me to improve my framing in-camera.

    Over the course of a year, I discovered that my framing and composition got much better. I worked harder to get the shots right in-camera, and this caused my photography to improve drastically.

    Now I am not saying that you should never crop your photographs. There are a lot of master street photographers who heavily cropped their photographs (Robert Frank did some radical cropping for his seminal book: “The Americans,” even turning some landscape shots into portrait shots with cropping).

    Assignment: Go an entire year without cropping

    If you are trying to improve your composition and intuitive sense of framing: give yourself the assignment of going an entire year without cropping. I can guarantee you that a year later, your photography will improve dramatically. And if in the future you do decide to start cropping again, always do it in moderation. Very rarely does a poorly-framed photo look better when cropped.

    A practical tip for framing better without cropping? Look at the edges of the frame while you’re shooting. Avoid suffering from “tunnel-vision” (only looking in the center of the frame)

    Lesson #5: Emotionally detach yourself from your photographs

    “Sometimes photographers mistake emotion for what makes a great street photograph.” – Garry Winogrand

    Imagine this situation: it is a cold and rainy day. You are out shooting on the streets, and you are feeling miserable. You haven’t got any good shots all day, despite the fact that you left your warm (and dry) house to take some street photos. You are about to give up and go home when you see a little girl with a red umbrella about to jump over a puddle.

    You think of the famous photograph of Henri Cartier-Bresson (man jumping over puddle), and get excited. You hold up your camera, and wait patiently. The girl then jumps, and you click. You quickly look at your LCD screen and you realize: “voila!” You just captured the “decisive moment.” You are excited.

    You then rush home, quickly download your photos to your computer, post-process the photo, and then upload the photograph to your social media website of choice. You cross your arms, and think that it is one of the finest photographs you have ever taken. You are excited that perhaps, finally, you will get over 100+ favorites/likes on this image.

    A day or so passes, and you only got 10-15 favorites/likes. You throw up your hands in rage and think to yourself: “These people on the internet wouldn’t know a great image if it hit them in the face!” You then continue about your day. A week or two go by, and you revisit the image. You then look at the image and tell yourself: “Hey, this image isn’t quite as good as I remembered it to be.”

    What just happened? You became emotionally attached to the backstory of how difficult it was to get that image (and the emotion you felt of being excited). This confused you into thinking that this was actually an “objectively” good shot.

    This happens to the best of us. We get too emotionally attached to our shots, because we were there. We experienced it. It feels alive and vivid inside our memories.

    he problem is that our viewers have no idea what the backstory of the image is (unless you write a long caption, which I generally advise against).

    So what is the solution? Try to emotionally detach yourself from your photos. When editing (selecting) which images to “keep” and “ditch,” ask your peers to be “brutally honest” with your work. Another tip: don’t refer to the photos you take as “my photos.” Refer to them as “the photos.” The difference? Calling them “the photos” detaches you emotionally from them, so you can be more critical and objective when editing your shots.

    Stories don’t exist outside of the frame

    In photography, the entire story of the image must exist inside the frame. If you want to tell a better story, include context in your photos (like this environmental portrait I shot of a man in San Diego).

    I have this vivid story in my head of how I got the image: I saw this well-dressed man in a hotel lobby, and asked if I could make a few photos. He said, “No problem,” and I started to take a bunch of images. Afterwards, I asked him what he did and what he was up to. He told me, “I own this hotel!”

    Now I have this vivid backstory, but the viewer has no idea about that story or information in this photograph. However, viewers find this photograph interesting because the outfit of the man looks like he’s from the 1950s — a relic of the past. The viewer then makes up their own story about the man, based on the TV shows (Madmen) or films they have seen.

    Morale of the story? If you have a photograph which is weak without having a compelling story, ditch the shot. When you have to “explain” the back-story of a street photograph, it is like explaining a joke. The funniest jokes don’t need to be “explained” (or else it isn’t a good joke). A good photograph shouldn’t need an intricate backstory or explanation in the caption.

    Lesson #6: Provoke your subjects

    “Rather than catching people unaware, they show the face they want to show. Unposed, caught unaware, they might reveal ambiguous expressions, brows creased in vague internal contemplation, illegible, perhaps meaningless. Why not allow the subject the possibility of revealing his attitude toward life, his neighbor, even the photographer?” – William Klein

    There is a general scorn in street photography against “posed” photos (or photos that aren’t shot candidly). A lot of people follow the Henri Cartier-Bresson school of street photography in which the photographer shouldn’t interact with his/her subjects, to be an unattached observer.

    However, there is more than one approach to street photography. On the other extreme of Henri Cartier-Bresson (who covered his silver Leica with black tape to be more discrete) is William Klein, a street photographer who gave a middle-finger to all of the “rules” in photography, and instead acted like a director. He would provoke his subjects, and interact with them. Even for his most famous “kid with gun” photograph, he told the kid: “Look tough.” At that moment, the kid with the toy gun pointed the gun to Klein’s face with a look of hate, anger, and intensity.

    I often take this approach in street photography (similar to Klein). While I do enjoy shooting a lot of candid street photographs, I also like to engage and provoke my subjects. Sometimes I will tell them to just look into the lens and not smile. Other times I will ask them to explicitly do things for me (look the other direction, cross your arms, take a puff of your cigarette, look down).

    But once you engage your subjects and ask them to do something for you, doesn’t it make the photograph less legitimate? Doesn’t the photograph become less about the subject, and more about you?

    Every photograph we take is a self-portrait of ourselves. We decide how to filter reality. We decide what to put into the frame and what to exclude. So don’t have any personal qualms about showing your own version of reality through your photography. Embrace it.

    “Can you do that again for me?”

    Sometimes you see things happen in the street: certain gestures, facial expressions, or actions by your subjects. A tip: I approach the subject and ask them: “Oh, I just saw you blowing your nose. Can you blow your nose again for me?”, as I did in the photograph above.

    Believe it or not, most people are quite happy to repeat certain gestures for you.

    Another thing you can do if you see an interesting scene, approach the subject and tell them: “Excuse me, I think you look really cool smoking on this corner here. Do you mind if I take a few photographs, and you just pretend like I’m not here?’ The majority of people will laugh, and comply, and literally ignore you.

    If your subjects don’t ignore you, simply linger around. The longer you wait, the more people begin to ignore you, and just continue their business. Once they drop their guard, start shooting.

    Lesson #7: Don’t be a slave to your camera

    “You are not supposed to be a slave of mechanical tools, they are supposed to help you and be as small and unimportant as possible not to disturb the communication.” – Anders Petersen

    There is a disease and a sickness out there. It afflicts thousands (if not millions) of photographers globally, and it costs people hundreds and thousands of dollars. This disease breeds insecurity amongst photographers, and causes photographers to make tons of excuses about their photography.

    The disease? It is called “G.A.S.” (gear acquisition syndrome). The concept is that you become addicted to getting new cameras, new gear, new lenses, and new photographic gadgets, rather than focusing on just becoming a better photographer. You make excuses about your gear, and that your camera and equipment is holding you back. You tell yourself, “Oh if I just had camera ‘X’ I would be more inspired in my photography, and take better photos.

    I personally still suffer from G.A.S. Whenever I am dissatisfied with my photography, I always think that buying a new camera or lens will help inspire me to become a better photographer. It never does.

    The only real way that I have improved my photography is by traveling, attending photography workshops, buying books (not gear), and by just shooting.

    I have discovered that when you are actually out shooting, you become very unaware of your camera. You get caught in the “flow” of shooting— and all the excuses about your camera or lens disappear. You become one with your camera, and it is almost as if the photos take themselves.

    I always lust for gear when I spend too much time online and on gear forums or review sites. Beware: 99.9% of the photography sites online are just dedicated to gear (as advertising and affiliate sales of cameras drive the photography industry).

    How can you cure yourself of “G.A.S”? Unsubscribe (or block) all gear review websites, and whenever you have the urge to buy a new gear just buy a photography book. Realize that your camera is just a tool to create images. As photographer Anders Petersen tells us, just try to get a small camera that is unobtrusive and focus on making images. He shoots with a simple Contax T3 (a point-and-shoot 35mm camera), and focuses on the emotion in his photos. Focus less on the camera, focus more on shooting, telling stories, and use your cash to travel.

    Lesson #8: Embrace “beginner’s mind”

    “My dream is that if you go out in the streets where you were born you see the streets like for the first time in your life even though you have been living there for 60 years.” – Anders Petersen

    Do you remember when you first picked up a camera, and weren’t disturbed by dogma, rules, constraints, or any other “theories” in photography? Do you remember the lightness that you would just roam the streets, and just took photos that interested you without any prejudice or self-criticism? Do you remember how excited it was to just play, like a child?

    In Zen Buddhism they call this approach “beginner’s mind.” When we begin any sort of pursuit, hobby, or art in life, we are unburdened. We see the world as fresh and full of opportunities. We are excited, nimble, fresh, and open-minded. We see possibilities, not obstructions.

    However, the problem is that the more experienced we become in photography (and life), the more we become jaded. Everything just seems to becoming boring. Nothing interests us anymore. You can live in the most interesting city in the world (Paris, Tokyo, New York) and after a while become bored with what you see.

    The secret? Follow Anders Petersen’s advice and hit the streets like it is the first time. Imagine that it is the first time you experienced it. Imagine what you would find interesting and unique. Imagine yourself like a tourist in your own city.

    Sometimes it takes getting out of your comfort zone or out of your routine to appreciate the city or street where you live. Try switching things up. Walk around your city with a different route than you usually take. Perhaps take a short trip out of town, and come back to your city with new and refreshed eyes.

    Or imagine yourself like an alien visiting from another planet. If you were an alien and visited your own city streets for the first time, what would you find interesting or unique?

    For the two photos on the other page I didn’t try to analyze the scene too much when shooting. I just found them interesting and just clicked. I didn’t let theory or definitions deter me from making this image. Some might ask: “But is it street photography?” I don’t care, I just took a photograph like any good beginner would.

    Lesson #9: Limitations are freedom

    “Too many choices will screw up your life. Work on one thing, then expand on your canvas.” – David Alan Harvey

    The problem with modern society is that we have too many choices. Do you remember the last time you went to the grocery store and wanted to get some breakfast cereal? Let’s say you wanted to get some wheat cereal. You go to the cereal aisle, and you see that there are 10 different brands. Even worse, there are different flavors: sugar, chocolate, vanilla, blueberry, and strawberry. On top of that, there are some cereals loaded with probiotics, some with less sugar, and some that is advertised as “heart healthy.”

    Overwhelmed, you just pick up some of the chocolate wheat cereal, and you go home and the next morning you have a bowl of cereal. You are slightly disappointed with your choice, and you kick yourself for not getting the sugar variety.

    This is what psychologist Barry Schwartz calls “The Paradox of Choice.” When we have too many choices or options, we become overwhelmed. This causes more regret, and more stress.

    Having too many choices (having more than 1 camera and more than 1 lens) can be stressful. You are making tons of decisions everyday as a photographer: what camera to use, what lens to use, what film to use, how to post-process your photos, etc.

    Limitations are freedom. Ironically enough, having fewer options leads to less stress, and more inner-peace.

    One of the philosophies I strongly believe in is “one camera, one lens.” Whenever I have owned more than one camera and more than one lens, this has caused me stress and “decision fatigue.” By having only one camera and one lens, you don’t have to think when you’re about to shoot a photograph. You have only one option, and that is that. Therefore you can use more of your decision-making energy on how to make a good photograph.

    The masters in photography have almost universally followed this rule. Henri Cartier-Bresson made the majority of his iconic images with his film Leica, 50mm, and black-and-white film. Alex Webb has stuck to mostly a film Leica, a 35mm lens, and Kodachrome color film. Daido Moriyama has stuck with point-and-shoot Ricoh GR cameras, 28mm, and have stayed consistent with grainy black and white film.

    So try to figure out how you can start to eliminate options and choices from your photography (and life). Having more limitations will force you to be more creative, and set you free.

    The Zen of One Camera, One Lens

    In January 2013, I got the news that my grandfather passed away. I quickly boarded a plane, and only brought one camera and lens with me: the Ricoh GR1v (a point-and-shoot film camera with a 28mm lens). I also only brought 10 rolls of film (Neopan 400) and pushed the film to 1600. I set myself this limitation in terms of my gear and my goal was to document my grandfather’s funeral in a meaningful, present, and mindful way.

    By having this simple point-and-shoot camera, I was able to really focus on the experience of being there for my grandfather’s funeral. Because I used film, I couldn’t “chimp” and check my LCD screen after every photograph I took. I was truly present, and wasn’t distracted by my camera. I think this lack of distraction from my camera helped me create one of the most meaningful projects in my photography career: my “Grandfather” series.

    If you are a photographer that owns more than one camera and one lens, just take one camera and one lens with you when you go out shooting. Or if you’re pursuing a certain photography project, do it all on one camera, one lens, and one film (or style of post-processing if you shoot digital). This will help you photograph more on the shooting process, and less about the equipment involved.

    There is nothing that has given me more zen and peace than having one camera and one lens.

    Lesson #10: Shoot with a “stream-of-consciousness”

    “For me, capturing what I feel with my body is more important than the technicalities of photography. If the image is shaking, it’s OK, if it’s out of focus, it’s OK. Clarity isn’t what photography is about.” – Daido Moriyama

    One of the common mistakes a lot of photographers make is that they are too analytical when they shoot street photography. They forget the most important part of photography: photographing what you feel, with your heart.

    Daido Moriyama is one of Japan’s most famous photographers who popularized the “stream-of-consciousness” style of photography. Not only that, but he popularized the radical “bure boke” (grainy, blurry, out-of-focus) aesthetic, which rebelled against the photography at the time, which focused on making hyper-sharp images with fancy high-end cameras.

    What is “stream-of-consciousness” in photography you ask? Well, the concept is that your thoughts, emotions, and ideas are like a river or stream, flowing through your mind. You trust your intuition, instincts, and gut.

    So when you’re shooting street photography, you just photograph what you find interesting, without any judgement, self-criticism, or frustration. You setup your camera with fully-auto settings, and just point-and-click. It is the purest form of “snapshot” photography, where you aren’t thinking like an “artist.” You are just like a child, exploring the world, and photographing what you find interesting.

    When you shoot with a “stream-of-consciousness,” realize that the majority of your shots won’t be very good. In-fact, you will make a lot of crappy, uninteresting, and boring photographs. However if you channel your emotions into your photos, they will become more personally meaningful to you, and also this feeling will transfer to the viewer.

    This makes the editing process so important. You need to always get a second opinion on your photos, and to see if other people get the same emotions from your photograph as you do.

    If you are a photographer who is “stuck” or facing “photographer’s block,” this approach will suit you very well.

    You can also apply the “stream of consciousness” type of shooting with street photography projects. Simply react to what you see, and then you can compile your projects or series later. Elliott Erwitt explains:

    “I don’t start out with any specific interests, I just react to what I see. I don’t know that I set out to take pictures of dogs; I have a lot of pictures of people and quite a few of cats. But dogs seem to be more sympathetic.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Shooting what it feels like

    “Seeing is not enough; you have to feel what you photograph” – Andre Kertesz

    I shot this above image in Saigon, Vietnam. I was at a bar, and I saw the mysterious mood and feeling of this man through a set of curtains. I was shooting this photo on a Fujifilm x100s, and set the camera to manual-focus, focused on the man, and just started to shoot away in “program” mode (aperture set to auto, shutter-speed set to auto) at ISO 3200.

    I loved the expression of the man’s face, his sense of loneliness, and the mysteriousness of the place. I didn’t think too much about the composition and the framing, I just kept shooting what the scene felt like: dark, estranged, and lost.

    Afterwards when I shared the photo with my friends and other photographers I trusted, they told me that the emotion that I felt in this scene mirrored what they felt.

    The emotions you feel while shooting street photography won’t always translate to your viewers. However the more you shoot with your heart (and not with your brain), the more likely you are to translate what a scene feels like to your viewer.

    Lesson #11: Embrace failure

    “Luck – or perhaps serendipity – plays a big role… But you never know what is going to happen. And what is most exciting is when the utterly unexpected happens, and you manage to be there at the right place at the right time – and push the shutter at the right moment. Most of the time it doesn’t work out that way. [Street] photography is 99.9% about failure.” – Alex Webb

    Street photography is all about failure. Every time you click the shutter, there is only a .1% chance that you will make an interesting shot. The majority of the time, you might shoot an entire day, not get a single good shot, and feel disappointed and frustrated.

    But know that failure is a good thing. The more you fail, the more likely you are to succeed. As Thomas Watson once wrote: “If you want to increase your success rate, double your failure rate.”

    The only thing you can control in your street photography is the amount of effort you put in. Meaning, you can control putting in 8 hours of shooting in one day, and how hard you work. What you can’t control is whether you get a good shot or not.

    In my street photography, I often found that the more I go out and take my camera, the more “lucky” I get. When I have my camera with me, the more opportunities I see.

    Luck isn’t some magical thing that hits us like lightning. Luck favors those who are prepared. Always having your camera with you, always observing your scenes and environment, and know that every once in a while, you will be at the “right place at the right time.” If you’re comfortable with your camera and skilled enough, you will also click the shutter at the right moment.

    When you fail to get the shot, don’t become discouraged. Rather, learn from your failures and mistakes. What caused you to miss the shot? Was it because your camera wasn’t set up properly? Was it because your camera was not in your hand ? Was it because you were too nervous and didn’t have the courage to click the shutter? Learn from your failures, and the closer you will become to mastering street photography.

    Lesson #12: Add “something more” in the frame

    “It’s not just that that and that exists. It’s that that, that, that, and that all exist in the same frame. I’m always looking for something more. You take in too much; perhaps it becomes total chaos. I’m always playing along that line: adding something more, yet keeping it sort of chaos.” – Alex Webb

    The more experienced you get in street photography, the more sophisticated you will become. You might start getting bored with the images you make, and you want something more in your images.

    Alex Webb is famous for creating complex images, with multiple layers and colors while having minimal overlaps in his frame. His photos are bursting with life, energy, and subject-matter. His photos are on the border of chaotic, yet they still work.

    What Alex Webb does is he constantly looks for something more in the frame he can add, especially things in the background. As beginner street photographers, we become obsessed only what is in front of us, and we disregard the background. We don’t know that the background is often as important as the foreground.

    So if you see a single-subject in the foreground, take the shot; but wait and be patient and look for “something more.” Perhaps somewhere to the right of the scene, you see an old lady about the enter the frame. And on the top-left of the scene, you might see a woman pushing a baby stroller into the frame. Try to frame the shot where you can balance the image by dispersing subjects in opposite sides of the frames. Also try to avoid creating overlaps in your images with your subjects by adding a little bit of white-space between them.

    But how do you know when a scene is “too busy”? It is often a matter of taste. What I try to find is “multiple stories” in a single scene, which keeps the viewer engaged and interested. Don’t just put extra subjects in the frame for the sake of it. Only add what you think is essential and will add something of value to the frame.

    Fill the frame

    I was in Downtown LA, walking down Broadway when out of nowhere, a huge crowd of people started streaming down the street. I loved the light and the mystery of these people, and thought of the work of Alex Webb in terms of filling the frame and adding complexity to the scene.

    So I held my camera up, and started to click away, head-on. I tried to fill the frame with interesting elements (the signs on top of the frame), the woman in the bottom-left of the frame, a person with a hat in the bottom-right of the frame, and I clicked the second I saw the man with the “LA” hat make an interesting hand-gesture.

    I really like how the shot turned out in terms of the energy, excitement, and vigor of the scene. I showed this photograph to my friends, and they told me that it felt very “Alex Webb” in terms of how I filled the frame and added energy and chaos to the scene.

    While this isn’t the style of photography I usually shoot (I generally prefer single-subjects in my photos), I was glad that I was able to apply the working style and philosophy of Alex Webb to experiment creating different styles of images.

    When you’re out shooting street photography, try to experiment with filling the frame. Try to see how much you can add to your frame before the image bursts at the seams. Cram in creativity.

    Lesson #13: Master your body language

    “If you photograph for a long time, you get to understand such things as body language. I often do not look at people I photograph, especially afterwards. Also when I want a photo, I become somewhat fearless, and this helps a lot. There will always be someone who objects to being photographed, and when this happens you move on.” – Martin Parr

    As a street photographer, you want to learn how to master your body language. 90% of communication isn’t verbal; it is actually through your facial expressions, body position, hand gestures in which we communicate.

    If you want to shoot more candid street photography and not be noticed, you don’t want your body language to suggest that you just made an image. Rather, you want to use your body language to suggest that you took a photo of something behind a person. Martin Parr gives further advice:

    “I go straight in very close to people and I do that because it’s the only way you can get the picture. You go right up to them. Even now, I don’t find it easy. I don’t announce it. I pretend to be focusing elsewhere. If you take someone’s photograph it is very difficult not to look at them just after. But it’s the one thing that gives the game away. I don’t try and hide what I’m doing – that would be folly.”

    Eye contact often makes a stronger street photograph, but also it makes it very obvious to your subject that you want to photograph them. So if you want to be invisible when shooting street photography, avoid eye contact.

    However there are also moments where you want to engage your subjects and ask for permission to take their photograph. In these circumstances, mastering your body language to show confidence is key. This means standing up straight, speaking in a bold and clear voice, being relaxed, and not hesitating. The less nervous and awkward body language you show, the less nervous and awkward your subjects will feel.

    Assignment: Eye contact

    Variation #1: Don’t make eye contact

    For this assignment, go up to a stranger very close (about 1 arm length away), and take a photograph of them. After you take a photograph, don’t drop your camera. Keep it up to your face, and avoid making eye contact with your subject. Hold up your camera for 15 more seconds, and then drop it and move on. See how your subject responds.

    This assignment will teach you that if you pretend you shot something else (convincingly with your body language), nobody will assume otherwise.

    Variation #2: Make eye contact

    For this assignment, walk around the streets and find someone interesting. Stare at them until they make eye contact with you. Once they make eye contact with you, smile, wave, and say hello. Then with a big smile, give them a compliment and ask them to take their photograph.

    This assignment will help you build confidence via your body language.

    Lesson #13.5: Aim to make 1 good photo a month

    Martin Parr shoots “tens of thousands” of photos, prints “maybe 15,000 a year” and “If there are 10 good ones, it would be a good year.”

    One of the problems of studying the work of the masters of street photography is that you only see their great work. You don’t see their mistakes, their ditched images, or the boring photos they’ve made. They only show their best work.

    Most of the master street photographers I’ve studied admit to only making about 10-12 good photos a year. On average that is one good shot a month.

    A story that I heard (not sure if it is true or not) was between Henri Cartier-Bresson and Josef Koudelka in a taxi cab. Josef Koudelka leans over to Cartier-Bresson and asks him softly, “So, how many good images you make a year?” Cartier-Bresson responds by saying, “Perhaps 10-12 if I’m lucky.” Koudelka than wipes off the sweat on his forehead and says, “Phew, that is wonderful to hear. I thought I was the only one!”

    Whether or not the story is true, remember: you’re only as good as your weakest photograph. Not only that, you’re only as good as your last photograph.

    So don’t settle for mediocrity, but at the same time, be realistic with yourself. It is rare that you make a great street photograph, as street photography is the most challenging form of photographers out there. So if you can manage to get one good street photograph a month, be at ease.

    Assignment: “Kill your babies”

    To start off, think to yourself: if I can only be remembered for 10 photos, which photos would they be? Then choose those 10 images, print them out, put them in a box, and also add them to a “portfolio” set on your website. I can guarantee those will be 10 very strong shots.

    Then moving forward, only aim to make one good street photograph a month. Be patient with yourself, and always think long term.

    Lesson #14: Kill your mentor

    “In those days Henri Cartier-Bresson limited us to lenses from 35 mm to 90 mm. When I showed him the photos he said, ‘brilliant René!’ I went outside and shouted ‘Hah!’ He heard me and said ‘what was that?’ I said, ‘nothing, never mind’. The lens I used was 180 mm – I never told him! At that point I broke loose from my mentor. I killed my mentor!” – Rene Burri

    Ironically enough even though this series on learning from the masters of street photography, there are only so many “lessons” you an learn from the masters before you need to “kill the masters.”

    For example, when Rene Burri started to shoot photography in Magnum, Cartier-Bresson was one of his mentors and “masters.” He hugely admired Cartier-Bresson’s work, and therefore would follow his philosophies in not using telephoto lenses, not cropping, and not posing his subjects.

    Ironically enough one of Burri’s most famous images of silhouetted men in Brazil, he shot it with a 180mm (directly contradicting the rules of Cartier-Bresson). By “breaking the rules,” Burri was able to make one of his most iconic and memorable images.

    So know that after learning from the masters, you need to know when to ignore them or when to go against their teachings. Consider the “masters” of street photography simply as mentors or guides. Don’t listen to them blindly, as one day you need to take off your training wheels and learn to ride on your own.

    Assignment: Contradict a “rule”

    If there is a certain “rule” in photography you normally follow, for a month intentionally try to break it, but do so in a creative way.

    For example if the rule is “don’t crop,” do the exact opposite by experimenting with radical cropping. This is what William Klein and Robert Frank did with their images.

    Lesson #15: Follow your curiosity

    “The camera is like my third eye it is an outlet for my curiosity. I was always curious as a kid and you have to use your senses. I wanted to meet the big giants of the 19th century, a sculptor, an artist, a dictator a musician and then ‘I would find the pictures would just happen’. I respond to situations and I am very fast – fastest gun in the West – even at my age.” – Rene Burri

    One of the best traits a street photographer can have is curiosity. You can’t fake curiosity in life. Curiosity is the fuel of life. Curiosity is what keeps us hungry to learn more, experience more, and live more.

    If you want to become a better photographer, learn how to become more curious in life. Be more like a child and less like an adult. Once we become adults, we become closed off to new ideas and ways of thinking. Rather than exploring things for ourselves and following our curiosity we would rather Google answers.

    Jacob Aue Sobol also mentions the importance of being curious about your subjects:

    “I also photograph because I am curious. I am curious about what the person on the other side of the street is thinking, how he or she lives, and how he or she feels. I am always looking for someone to share a moment with.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Don’t photograph what you think others might find interesting. Rather, photograph what you are personally interested in. If there is a certain neighborhood or part of your town that you are interested in, just go there with a camera and take photos. Don’t think too much. Follow and shoot what you’re curious about.

    Assignment: Curiosity notebook

    This assignment is to help rekindle your sense of curiosity in life and photography. Buy a cheap notebook and carry it with you in your camera bag. Whenever you have an idea for a photography project or find something you are curious in, write it down in your “curiosity notebook.”

    The goal is that everyday try to write down at least one idea or concept or photography project you’re interested or curious about. You can also write down master photographers you are interested in learning more about. For example, if you’ve heard about William Eggleston and don’t know his work but are curious about learning more, write it down in your notebook.

    You don’t need to explore every idea. But the act of writing down ideas will keep your mind sharp and curious.

    Also write down your ideas, no matter how stupid, silly, or childish they may seem. This is a private notebook, nobody else will see it.

    Lesson #16: Leave your photos open to interpretation

    “I leave it to others to say what [my photos] mean. You know my photos, you published them, you exhibited them, and so you can say whether they have meaning or not.” – Josef Koudelka

    One of the common mistakes photographers make is that they don’t leave their photos open to interpretation. They use fancy titles which explain what they want the viewer to take out of the photograph.

    Take the opposite approach: leave your photos open to interpretation to the viewer. The more open to interpretation you make your photos, the more engaging they will be to your viewer.

    A key way to do this is to leave out key information, or to add mystery or ambiguity to your photos. Intentionally cut off heads, limbs, or obscure the background. Kill the sense of context of the scene. Make the viewer work hard to interpret what is going on in the scene.

    A good joke shouldn’t need to be “explained” by the joke teller. Similarly a good street photograph shouldn’t need a detailed backstory in the caption of a photograph.

    Similarly, movies are always the best when they end in an ambiguous way, in which the viewer makes up their own ending. When the director ends a film without a clear ending, the film is unforgettable.

    Photographer Joel Sternfeld shares how when the photographer makes an image, he or she is interpreting the world:

    “Photography has always been capable of manipulation. Even more subtle and more invidious is the fact that any time you put a frame to the world, it’s an interpretation. I could get my camera and point it at two people and not point it at the homeless third person to the right of the frame, or not include the murder that’s going on to the left of the frame… There’s an infinite number of ways you can do this: photographs have always been authored.”

    Richard Kalvar also shares the importance of having mystery behind your shots and not explaining them:

    “First let me address the question “What was going on there?” in general. I try to avoid answering, because when I do, people generally stop looking and turn the page. If you kill the magic and the mystery, what’s left but humdrum reality?”
    Kalvar continues:

    “It’s tempting to satisfy people’s curiosity as to what was “really going on” in a scene, but it always leaves a bad taste in my mouth. If there’s a mystery, the viewer should try to unravel it for him or herself, subjectively, through intelligence, imagination and association. I want people to keep looking, not just move on to the next thing.”

    Assignment: Make an open-ended photo

    Try to make a photograph without a clear explanation. Intentionally try to use blur, out of focus effects, a flash, high contrast black and white, or cut out limbs or body parts. Make an image difficult to interpret, and ask your friends or viewers to come up with their own story.

    Alternatively try to capture people with strong body gestures or emotions, and don’t make it clear what exactly is going on.

    Leaving a photo closed to interpretation

    Sometimes when you’re doing documentary or photojournalism photography, you don’t want your photo open to interpretation. You want it to share a specific viewpoint. In this case, you want a detailed description or caption, for the viewer not to be misled.

    But street photography is more about creating your own interpretation of the world, rather than trying to capture some “objective” reality. The more ambiguous or open ended you make your images, the more engaging for the viewer.

    Lesson #17: Remove your ego from your photos

    “I wouldn’t talk about the photographs. No, I try to separate myself completely from what I do. I try to step back to look at them as somebody who has nothing to do with them.” – Josef Koudelka

    Sometimes we can let our ego get in the way of our photography. We think our photos are like our children, and we become too emotionally attached to them (even if they are bad photos).

    Personally I have a difficult time overcoming my attachments to my photos. When people critique my photos, I feel like they’re critiquing me as a human being.

    But remember: you are not your photos. When people critique or criticize your photos, they aren’t criticizing you. They’re just judging your photos.

    One of the best ways to overcome this is to detach your ego from your photos. By detaching your ego from your photos, you can judge them more honestly and objectively. When you want feedback on your photos, ask people, “Please be straightforward and give the photos a brutally honest critique.” Also when critiquing your own work, imagine that they were shot by someone else.

    Another master photographer, Sebastiao Salgado mirrors this sentiment. He dedicates making images for others to make a positive impact in the world, instead of boosting his own self-ego:

    “The biggest danger for a photographer is if they start thinking they are important.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Edit ruthlessly, and detach your ego from the process.

    Assignment: They’re not your photos

    Ultimately the photo we take don’t belong to us. They are for society and our viewers to interpret, consume, and analyze.

    To overcome having your ego attached to your photos try this assignment: For a year, don’t refer to the photos you take as “my” photos.[a] Rather, refer to them as “the” photos. After you take the photos, take a step back, and let them tell their own story, and exist on their own.

    Lesson #18: Photograph what you love

    “It’s not normal to feel that you have to do something, that you love to do something. If that’s happening you have to pay attention so you don’t lose it.” – Josef Koudelka

    You can’t fake love and passion in what you do in life, and what you photograph. People are good bullshit detectors; they can smell “fakeness” from a mile away.

    On the other hand, enthusiasm is contagious. If you shoot your subject matter with love, compassion, and honesty, this will show in your photos. The viewer will feel the same feelings you did.

    With love also comes fascination. Koudelka shares how he has always been in love of landscapes, but never was able to capture the soul of landscapes, until he picked up a panoramic camera. He shares his experience below:

    “I ran around Paris; I had to photograph everything. I realized that with this camera I could do something I’d never done before. The panoramic camera helped me go to another stage in my career, in my work. It helped me to remain interested in photography, to be fascinated with photography.”

    It is hard to fall in love with your subject matter, project, and to remain fascinated. But having an intense love and fascination of what you’re interested in photographing will help you get to a new stage in your career.

    Once you are no longer interested or fascinated with the world, you lose your artistic vision and insights. In fact, Koudelka mentions how even Henri Cartier-Bresson lost his interest in photography:

    “I’m going to be seventy-seven. When I met Cartier-Bresson, he was sixty-two. I’m 15 years older than Cartier-Bresson was then. And at that time Cartier-Bresson was stopping his work with photography.”

    Koudelka continues in another interview:

    “Many photographers like Robert Frank and Cartier Bresson stopped photographing after 70 years because they felt that they had nothing more to say. In my case I still wake up and want to go and take photographs more than ever before.”

    When your photography no longer fascinates you, or when you are no longer having any fun, it is a good chance for you to reassess yourself as a photographer. Why are you no longer interested? Why do you feel bored? Do you feel like you’re just continuing to do the same thing?

    Avoid boredom at all costs. Remain fascinated. If you consider yourself a “street photographer” yet you no longer find the streets interesting, switch things up. Try shooting landscapes like Koudelka or pursue a different project. Pursue a project that you’re afraid of. Sometimes our best growth opportunities come from what we’re frightened to pursue.

    As a photographer don’t dry up, wither and die. Keep your artistic eye and seed well watered. Do this by reading interviews with photographers and artists you admire, by investing in photography books, classes and workshops, through traveling, and by meeting new people.

    Magnum photographer Jacob Aue Sobol also mentions the importance of being emotionally connected to your work:

    “I do find it difficult to work in places I am not connected to in some way. I simply lose interest in the place, because I don’t have a close relation, which allows me to approach the place in a more personal way. In Greenland, I started photographing Sabine because I was in love with her, but in Tokyo the situation was different because Sara worked long hours and I was left on my own to explore the city. In this way, my love for Sara and the emotions we shared in our relationship mostly appeared in my images from the streets and in my meetings with strangers.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Assignment : What do you love?

    If you have no idea what kind of photography project to pursue, write down a list of things in life you love. Is it music, coffee, dance, theater, films, cafes, night clubs, or books? Brainstorm as many ideas as you possibly can.

    Then ask yourself: “How can I photograph what I love?”

    By starting off with your other interests outside of photography, you can channel your camera to show that love and interest you have in it.

    If you love what you photograph, it will never feel like a chore. It will be fun, exciting, and uplifting.

    Lesson #19: Photograph who you are

    “Photograph who you are!” – Bruce Gilden

    One of the most polarizing street photographers is Bruce Gilden. Love him or hate him, he is true to who he is. He was born and raised in the concrete jungle of New York City, and he professes that his father was a “gangster type.” Bruce has an attitude, shoots up close and personal with a flash and 28mm, and is unapologetic about how he shoots or his work.

    A lot of people criticize him for exploiting his subjects, or being an asshole. Personally I’ve met him and I would say that he stays true to who he is: a rough, tough, no bullshit human being. But at the same time, he has a lot of empathy for the people he photographs:

    “I love the people I photograph. I mean, they’re my friends. I’ve never met most of them or I don’t know them at all, yet through my images I live with them. At the same time, they are symbols. The people in my pictures aren’t Mr. Jones or Mr. Smith or whatever; they’re someone that crossed my path or I’ve crossed their path, and through the medium of photography I’ve been able to make a good picture of that encounter. They have a life of their own, but they are also are symbols. I would say that I respect the viewer, but I don’t want to tell him everything.”

    Also when Bruce Gilden is choosing his subjects, he tries to engage the viewer:

    “Hopefully, there’s an element of mystery involved. I like him to look at a picture and say “Well, that that reminds me of someone,” and make up a little story in his head, make him smile, brighten up his day. I think this is what I’m trying to achieve with my photographs.”

    I’m a very social person, but when I started shooting street photography, I tried to imitate Henri Cartier-Bresson (who was a complete introvert and hated being noticed in the streets). I would look for interesting backgrounds and compositions, and just wait for the right person to enter the scene before clicking the shutter.

    But the problem is that I wasn’t being true to myself. I didn’t photograph who I was. I was imitating a photographer whose personality and worldview was completely different from mine.

    Over the past several years I discovered my style in street photography reflected who I was as a human being: social, chatty, and engaging with others. Ultimately I prefer engaging with my subjects when photographing them (as Bruce Gilden often does), and I prefer to shoot closely and prefer physical intimacy through proximity.

    There is no “right” or “wrong” way to shoot street photography. You need to shoot who you are. What makes your personality unique? If you prefer not to interact with your subjects, shoot from a distance and be candid. If you’re extroverted and like conversation, don’t be afraid to talk with your subjects.

    The ancient Greeks said: “Know thyself.” Similarly, know thyself in street photography, and shoot what suits your personality, mood, and temperament.

    Assignment: Role play

    For this assignment, find a street photographer whose personality, style, and images you admire. Intentionally try to imitate them through “role playing.”

    Imitation is one of the best ways to kick start your photographic journey. The best Renaissance painters all started off as apprentices (copying their masters), before they broke the umbilical cord and started heading off in their own direction.

    Another version of the assignment: “role play” another photographer who is completely different from you. This will help expand your mind, push you outside of your comfort zone, and challenge you. And through this assignment, you will learn more about your own style.

    Discovering what you don’t like to shoot is a better way to discover your voice than knowing what you like to shoot.

    Lesson #20: Don’t repeat yourself

    “When I went out of Czechoslovakia I experienced two changes: The first one is that there wasn’t this situation any longer. I didn’t need wide-angle lenses. And I had understood the technique very well, I was repeating myself, and I’m not interested in repetition, I wanted to change. I took a 50mm/35mm Leica.The second change was that I started to travel the world. I had this possibility and I had a look at this world.” – Josef Koudelka

    There is always a fine line between repetition and variety as a photographer and artist. On one hand you want repetition and consistency in your work to give you a certain style or voice. On the other hand, you want variety in your work to prevent yourself (and viewer) from getting bored.

    When Josef Koudelka worked on his “Gypsies” project, he traveled and lived with the Roma people for around ten years. He shot it all on an slr and a 25mm lens. This helped him shoot in cramped quarters, and create an intimate document of the life of the Roma people.

    However when he was done with the project, he realized that he no longer needed to repeat himself. Therefore he just ended up exploring and traveling the world with a 35mm/50mm Leica. He wanted to also switch up the subject matter that he photographed.

    Koudelka explains more in another interview:

    “I am not interested in repetition. I don’t want to reach the point from where I wouldn’t know how to go further. It’s good to set limits for oneself, but there comes a moment when we must destroy what we have constructed.”

    There is a concept or “creative destruction” in art. The idea is that you need a framework to keep you inspired and creative in your artwork. But at a certain stage, this framework can become more of a cage. Once this happens, you must break out of your cage.

    Assignment : Repetition and Variety

    The fine line we always need to balance is repetition and variety.
    So for this assignment, choose a certain theme, like “old people”, “hands”, or “couples.” Stay focused on this theme, and repeat it.

    But on the other hand, try to find variety in the assignment. So for example if your assignment is “old people”, try to find old people doing a variety of different things. Shopping, having a cup of coffee at a cafe, or walking their grandchildren in the park.

    If your theme is “hands”, you can repeat the same type of framing and distance. But you can create variety by choosing different types of hands (old hands, young hands, dark hands and light hands, hands with fingernails, and hands with cigarettes).

    Lesson #21: Ask for permission

    “I carried this little album of my work. I have three choices. If I see someone in this beautiful mood, I’ll go up to them and ask them, I’d like to take a picture of that mood. If they say yes, I ask if they can get back into that mood. Not everyone can do that. Or, if the said no, then I took out the album and they saw the work. Or I took it, and ran like hell. I had those three choices in the subway.” – Bruce Davidson

    Bruce Davidson is a street photographer who isn’t afraid to ask for permission. He is a street photographer who has deep empathy for his subjects, and tries to make imagery that connects with them.

    His first big body of work was “East 100th street,” when he did a documentary series of people in the impoverished neighborhood in NYC with uncompromising sincerity with his large format camera and black and white. He later moved on working in the gritty subways of NYC in color, using an slr and a flash.

    If you see Davidson’s images in his “Subway” book, most of them look candid and without permission. But in reality, Davidson asked a lot of his subjects for permission. He carried around his portfolio of images, and would often ask his subjects to recreate the mood he first saw them in.

    Davidson did this for several reasons. First of all, shooting in a subway can be very tricky, as you can’t run away after taking someone’s photo. Secondly, when you use a flash, you can shock and surprise people.

    So Davidson would approach people openly, and even offer to give them a print afterwards.

    But the problem with this approach is if the subject said no, “…it was no forever.”

    However at times, Davidson didn’t always ask for permission. But shooting candidly would sometimes draw unnecessary attention. He explains below:

    “Sometimes, I’d take the picture, then apologize, explaining that the mood was so stunning I couldn’t break it, and hoped they didn’t mind. There were times I would take the pictures without saying anything at all. But even with this last approach, my flash made my presence known. When it went off, everyone in the car knew that an event was taking place– the spotlight was on someone.”

    Therefore know that there is no reason you should be afraid of asking for permission. The worst case scenario is that someone will say “no” upon you asking them.

    Diane Arbus is another photographer who was able to overcome her fear of photographing strangers and getting close by asking for permission:

    “I remember one summer I worked a ltot in Washington Square Park. It must have been around 1966. The park was divided. It has these walks, sort of like a sunburst, and there were these territotries stalked out. There were young hippie junkies down one row. There were lesbians down another, really tough amazingly hard-core lesbians and in the middle were winos. They were like the first echelon and the girls who came from the Bronx to become hippies would have to sleep with the winos to get to sit on the other part with the junkie hippies.

    It was really remarkable. And I found it very scary. I mean I could become a nudist, I could become a million things. But I could never become that, whatever all those people were. There were days I just couldn’t work there and then there were days I could.

    “And then, having done it a little, I could do it more. I got to know a few of them I hung around a lot. They were a lot like sculptures in a funny way. I was very keen to get close to them, so I had to ask to photograph them. You cant get that close to somebody and not say a word, although I have done that.” – Diane Arbus

    Zoe Strauss, a contemporary Magnum Photographer also has to deal with a lot of rejection in her work when asking for permission:

    “I’ve stopped hundreds of people and asked to make their photo. If it’s an up-close portrait, I always ask the person if I can take the photo. Often the answer is “no”.”

    Assignment: The 10 yes, 10 no challenge

    If you want to quickly break out of your shell in street photography, start off by asking for permission. The goal is by the end of the day, you want 10 people to say “yes” being photographed, and 10 people saying “no” to being photographed.

    In terms of approach, tell your subject that your assignment is to make portraits of strangers. Also if you tell them you’re a photography student, people are more sympathetic and willing. Even though you might not be enrolled in a photography school, the truth is you are still a photography student.

    Another tip: offer to email your subject the photograph afterwards. Better yet: carry a small Instax wifi printer and give them a small print afterwards.

    You can also show your subject your LCD screen after taking their photo, to show them what you’re trying to achieve. You can also ask your subject which photo of them they prefer. This engages your subject, and makes them more comfortable being photographed.

    Lesson #22: Don’t hesitate

    “Despite my fantasies of being a hunter stalking a wild animal, I was still afraid. It was hard for me to approach even a little old lady. There’s a barrier between people riding the subway – eyes are averted, a wall is set up. To break through this painful tension I had to act quickly on impulse, for if I hesitated, my subject might get off at the next station and be lost forever.” – Bruce Davidson

    There is a phrase which directly applies to street photographers: “paralysis by analysis.” Sometimes thinking too much whether you want to take a shot or not leads to hesitation. And with hesitation, you become nervous and self conscious and end up not taking the photograph.

    The secret is to know that if you hesitate to make a photograph of someone, you will regret it for the rest of your life (or at least when you go to sleep that night). Live life without regrets. It is better to take the shot and deal with the consequences, rather than not to take the photograph at all.

    Don’t get me wrong, I’ve missed thousands of potential good street photographs because I hesitated. This was due to self consciousness, fear of getting yelled at (or hit), or of making people feel uncomfortable.

    But know as a street photographer, you have a higher calling. Your task in life is to make the most beautiful street photographs, to inspire people and contribute to society. So keep that in mind before you hesitate taking a shot.

    Assignment: when in doubt, click

    A phrase I picked up from my friend (and talented street photographer) Charlie Kirk is this: “When in doubt, click.”

    Keep that phrase embedded in your mind. Whenever you have even a tiny doubt whether the shot will be good or not, just take the shot. Don’t hesitate. Don’t worry too much about the framing or composition. Just take the shot. And after taking the first shot you can better “work the scene” and make some other better shots.

    Break through that barrier. Shoot without regrets.

    Lesson #23: Don’t become pigeonholed by definitions

    “Oh people you’re a documentary photographer. I don’t even know what that means. Oh people say you are a photojournalist. I’m rarely published in journals. Oh then yore a fine art photographer. Then I say I’m not. I aspire to be a fine photographer.” – Bruce Davidson

    Even though this book is focused on street photography, know that if you want to truly become a great photographer, you don’t want to become pigeon-holed by definitions. Most of the “street photographers” profiled in this book never call themselves “street photographers.” They just see themselves as photographers, and they simply photograph what they are interested or passionate about.

    Similarly, the way that Bruce Davidson shoots crosses definitions and boundaries in photography. Some of his work is “documentary” in the sense that he spends a lot of time with the same subjects. Some of his work is “street photography” in the sense that he shoots photos of subjects candidly, in public spaces.

    Ultimately, it is better to say that you are a “photographer” rather than trying to define yourself. Let your photos define you, not any sort of classifications or external definitions.

    Once you shed external definitions, this opens up your view to the world. No longer do you not shoot certain subject matter because it isn’t “street photography.” Simply photograph anything that interests you.

    Don’t aim to be a “street photographer”, aim to be a great photographer. And don’t ask people whether they think some of your photos are “street photography” or not. Simply ask them whether they are great photos or not.

    People like to define others, because it makes life more comfortable and easy for them. People are uncomfortable with unambiguity, and they always want to see where they are in comparison to you.

    I often get ridiculed that I am not a “street photographer.” Rather than arguing with them, I just resort to self-deprecating humor by saying, “You’re right, I’m not a street photographer. I’m just an Asian tourist with a camera.”

    At the end of the day, you don’t even need to define yourself as a “photographer.” Just see yourself as a human being interested in others and in life, and you happen to make photos of what you’re passionate about.

    So what is Davidson ultimately interested in? He explains below:

    “I’m just a humanist. I just photograph the human condition as I find it. It can be serious. It can also be ironic or humorous. I’m political, but not in an overt way.”

    Even Garry Winogrand hated the term “street photographer.” In one interview he joked that when people asked him what kind of photographer he was, he would just that that he was a “zoo photographer.”

    Assignment: Try shooting another genre

    If there is a genre of photography that you don’t understand, appreciate, or “get,” try it out and try to understand why others may be interested in it.

    For example, let’s say you hate HDR photography. Ask yourself: “Why do others like this type of photography?” Then genuinely try to understand and connect with that genre of photography. Or perhaps you can try out macro, landscape, or studio photography.

    Even within the genre of “street photography”, there are many different approaches. Some people prefer shooting candidly, others prefer asking for permission, and some like to keep a distance, others like to get up close and personal.

    So try an opposite approach of what you are comfortable with. This will help open up your mind, not care as much about definitions, and help you realize that at the end of the day, no matter what kind of photographs we make, we are all unified with this love of making images.

    Lesson #24: Don’t stop your projects too soon

    “I find that young people tend to stop too soon. They mimic something they’ve seen, but they don’t stay long enough. If you’re going to photograph anything, you have to spend a long time with it so your subconscious has a chance to bubble to the surface.” – Bruce Davidson

    One of the problems that many photographers starting off is that they stop their photography projects too soon. They quickly get bored before really delving deep into their subject matter, theme, or concepts.

    A truly great photography project require time, depth, consideration, hard work, sweat, passion, and endurance.

    For example for Davidson’s “Subway” project, he rode the subway nearly every single day (at random hours in the day) for two years straight. By spending so much time in the subway, he became part of the subway. He learned the nuances of the subway, was able to capture different types of subject matter, and a variety of images.

    But the problem with modern day society is that we often suffer from photographic “ADD”; we can’t concentrate on one project, vision, or subject matter. We quickly flit from one fashionable type of photography to another.

    An analogy I like is that you should imagine your photography projects and style like a seed. It takes a long time for a seed to sprout into a great tree. But if you remove the seed from the ground prematurely it will never grow.

    Similarly, when you’re cooking a fish, you don’t want to poke it too much. You want to let it cook a bit on its own before moving it around.

    But how do you find a photographic project that is interesting? Davidson gives great advice below:

    “If I were a student right now and I had a teacher like me I’d say, ‘You have to carry your camera everyday and take a picture everyday. And by the end of the week you should have 36 pictures exposed. And then suddenly you’ll latch onto someone, maybe a street vendor- oh he or she is very interesting I might have to be with him or her. So things open up visually.”

    Dorothea Lange, the famous photographer of “migrant mother” also shares the philosophy of working your theme until exhaustion, and not giving up too soon:

    “Pick a theme and work it to exhaustion… the subject must be something you truly love or truly hate.” – Dorothea Lange

    Lange expands in another interview:

    “Photographers stop photographing a subject too soon before they have exhausted the possibilities.”

    Assignment : One square block

    An assignment I was given in Downtown LA by the Think tank gallery was this: for an entire month you could only shoot once square block in the Fashion district in Downtown LA (both sides for street), and I had to edit down to my best 3 shots for an exhibition.

    It was a daunting task at first because I know myself: I am prone to boredom, and I have a hard time sticking around to one location.

    In the beginning the assignment was frustrating. I felt annoyed that I couldn’t wander off to different parts of the city. I craved more variety in terms of the scene.

    But as time went on, I became to enjoy the meditative pace of slowly walking in the same neighborhood. Soon the vendors began to recognize me and say hello. Every time I circled the block, I noticed one thing that I didn’t notice before. I started to pick up small differences and nuances. The square block soon became my own home. And at the end of the month I ended up making 3 of my strongest shots, 2 of which entered my portfolio (fingernails and a guy blowing his nose).

    So regardless of how boring your neighborhood or street is, there is always something interesting to photograph, as long as you try hard enough.

    So give yourself a creative restriction in terms of location. Find a place you want to photograph, and you’re only allowed to shoot that one square block (both sides) for a month. Then edit down to your 3 best shots. I can guarantee you they will be damn good.

    If you are even more ambitious, try to slowly expand that location by a block or two. Then try to shoot that one neighborhood for a year, and then do an exhibition of your best 12-15 photos. Invite people from the neighborhood to attend, and have a great party.

    Lesson #25: It’s okay to shoot bad photos

    “You shoot a lot of shit and you’re bound to come up with a few good ones.” – Trent Parke

    I know a lot of street photographers that suffer from “photographer’s block” in the sense that they are perfectionists. They have a lot of good ideas for projects and images, but they get too caught up in the details and they forget the most importantly thing: just going out and shooting.

    A lot of perfectionists shoot themselves in the foot because everytime they go out and shoot street photography, they expect all their shots to be great. But realize, the more “shit” you shoot, the more likely you are to get a great shot.

    For me, I get easily disappointed when I shoot street photography on digital cameras. Why? Because at the end of the day I can quickly look through all of my images and see all of my mistakes. Not only that but the likelihood of getting a good street photograph after only one day of shooting is highly unlikely.

    The upside of shooting film is that it has given me more permission to shoot a lot of “shit”, without the disappointment of seeing my shitty photos afterwards.

    I also usually get my film processed 6 months to a year after I shoot, which means once I finally get my images scanned and look at them on the computer, there is a higher likelihood that I will get a great image that I’m proud of.

    Wayne Gretzky, one of the best hockey players of all time once said: “You miss 100% of the shots you don’t take.” Applied in street photography, whenever you see a scene that you think has some promise, just shoot it. Every time you click the shutter and make a bad photo, the closer you are to make a great photo.

    So don’t be afraid to shoot shitty photos. Just be a brutal editor, and refuse to show the shitty shots you take.

    Even Trent Parke had to shoot a lot of “shitty” photos before he got one that he was satisfied with.

    For one of his most famous images of dark silhouetted subjects against a bus in Sydney, he went there 3-4 times a week for a month to get the shot he imaged. He explains:

    “I shot a hundred rolls of film, but once I’d got that image I just couldn’t get anywhere near it again. That’s always a good sign: you know you’ve got something special.”

    Fortunately most of us shoot digitally now, which means we can shoot a lot of bad photos to get one good one.

    So we don’t really have any excuses to get the images we want. The question you want to ask yourself is: “How bad do I want this shot?”

    Diane Arbus also agrees the importance of shooting bad shots:

    “Some pictures are tentative forays without your even knowing it. They become methods. It’s important to take bad pictures. It’s the bad ones that have to do with what you’ve never done before. They can make you recognize something you had seen in a way that will make you recognize it when you see it again.”

    Assignment : take 10,000 shitty photos

    Henri Cartier-Bresson once said, “Your first 10,000 photos are your worst.’ That was in the days of film. Nowadays I think your first 1 million photos are your worst.

    Anyways, I don’t think it is possible to take 10,000 shitty photos in a row. If you go out to the streets, assert yourself, and try to make good images, you are bound to get a few good ones.

    So as an assignment, try to take 10,000 street photos as quickly as you can. If you’re trigger happy and shoot 1,000 in a day, it will take you about 10 days of dedicated shooting (assuming you shoot every weekend, that is around 2-3 months). For some others it might take you 6 months-1 year.

    After you shoot those 10,000 shots, you are only allowed to keep one image. Yeah it will be really hard, but I can guarantee it will be a damn good shot.

    Then once you’re done, onto your next 10,000 shots!

    Lesson #26: Chase the light

    “I am forever chasing light. Light turns the ordinary into the magical.” – Trent Parke

    The root of the word “photography” in Greek means “drawing with light.” Without light, photography couldn’t exist.

    When I started shooting photography, I could never get the epic photos I wanted. I saw all of these incredible images on the internet with glowing faces, dark shadows, and images that took my breath away.

    I soon realized that I had no concept of light in my photography. I didn’t think about the importance of “golden hour”, and shooting when the light was beautiful (sunrise and sunset). I didn’t pay attention to what direction the sun was in. I didn’t try using a flash to add artificial light. I didn’t know the difference between direct and harsh light versus diffused light.

    But as time went on, I started to study and seek the light. And it has made all of the difference in my photography. When I go out during the day and the light is too harsh (around noon), I use a flash and photograph people in shady places or indoors. Ultimately natural light is preferable but using a flash helps give you more freedom to shoot other times in the day. If you have no experience shooting with a flash, I recommend using your camera’s integrated pop-up flash in “P” (program mode) at ISO 400. If your camera doesn’t have an integrated flash, just buy the cheapest and smallest “TTL” (through the lens) automated flash for your camera.

    Another practical tip is when you’re shooting when the light is harsh, expose for the highlights and try to get really dramatic and dark shadows. On a digital camera you can set your exposure to -2 compensation.

    But ultimately you want to chase the light. Go to where the light is, and be patient. As street photographer Blake Andrews says, “Don’t try to fight the light you will always lose.”

    So if you’re shooting during sunset, follow where the light is. Start seeing where rays of light hit, and be patient. When you start losing the light, follow the streets where the light is still good.

    If you prefer to shoot natural light, don’t shoot when the light is harsh (mid day). Shoot early in the morning during sunrise and when the light becomes harsh, have lunch and take a nap. Then in the afternoon go location scouting and find some interesting areas you want to shoot. Then once the sun starts to set and the light becomes good, shoot in that area like there is no tomorrow. This is a more efficient way to shoot: containing your shooting time to 1-2 hours during both sunrise and sunset, rather than shooting for 8 hours straight through the whole day.

    Assignment : Study the light

    Find an interesting area to shoot, and try to shoot at 3 different times of the day: sunrise, noon, and sunset. When you go home review the images, and see how the color, quality, and intensity of the light is different. Which do you prefer?

    Also try experimenting shooting with a flash in your street photography. Go an entire day only shooting with flash, and see what effect it has on your images.

    Remember: no amount of post processing can make a photograph good without great light.

    Another way you can use this assignment: during sunrise or sunset just stay at one busy intersection with good light. When you have a good scene, a good background, and good light, stand there, and just wait for your subjects to come to you. Expose for the highlights and get dramatic shadows, and capture the drama of your subjects.

    Once you start losing the light, continue to chase the light, until it fades away.

    Lesson #27: Channel your emotions into your photos

    “When I came to Sydney at the age of 21 I left everything behind – all my childhood friends and my best mate – at first I just felt this sense of complete loneliness in the big city. So, I did what I always do: I went out and used my Leica to channel those personal emotions into images.” – Trent Parke

    There is no photography which is truly “objective”. Reality is always filtered through your lens. You decide what to include in the frame and what to exclude from the frame. You are also a “subject selector”; you only make images which you find personally interesting and relevant.

    One of the best ways to make great images is to channel your emotions in your work. This is why often the greatest artistic work is done when an artist suffers a death, a break up, or when there is immense joy in his or her life. Trent Parke describes the importance of channeling personal emotions into your work:

    “I’m always trying to channel those personal emotions into my work. That is very different from a lot of documentary photographers who want to depict the city more objectively. For me it is very personal – it’s about what is inside me. I don’t think about what other people will make of it. I shoot for myself.”

    I personally find street photography as a sort of self therapy. When I’m feeling stressed about family, relationships, money, haters, etc, there is nothing that clears my head more than pursuing “walking meditation” when shooting street photography.

    Also the more I shoot street photography, the more I learn about myself. Street photography is self discovery. Through street photography, I learned that I love interacting with people, which shoes through the intimate” street portraits” I shoot. Trent Parke has a similar philosophy: that photography is discovering yourself and your place in the world:

    “My mum died when I was 10 and it changed everything about me. It made me question everything around me. Photography is a discovery of life which makes you look at things you’ve never looked at before. It’s about discovering yourself and your place in the world.”

    Jacob Aue Sobol is another Magnum Photographer who puts his heart and soul into his images:

    “The year after I started at the European Film College, I started writing short stories and, later, taking pictures. Once I realized that I was able to isolate my emotions and communicate them through my pictures, I felt like I had found an ability which was unique and which I wanted to explore further. Now, a lot of experiences in life and the people I have shared my time with have added to my memories, my fear and my love, and through this they have inspired me to continue photographing.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Joel Meyerowitz also shares how he is trying to communicate less of his thoughts, but more of his feelings in his photos:

    “What are we all trying to get to in the making of anything? We’re trying to get to ourselves. What I want is more of my feelings and less of my thoughts. I want to be clear. I see the photograph as a chip of experience itself. It exists in the world. It is not a comment on the world. In a photograph you don’t look for, you look at! It’s close to the thing itself. It’s like an excitation. I want the experience that I am sensitive to to pass back into the world, fixed by chemistry and light to be reexamined. That’s what all photographs are about—looking at things hard. I want to find an instrument with the fidelity of its own technology to carry my feelings in a true, clear, and simple way. That’s how I want to think about less is more.”

    Assignment : Shoot how you feel

    Our emotions are highly variable. On some days we are super optimistic and think everything in life is perfect and super dandy. The future is limitless, and we feel extreme joy and contentment with our lives.

    However on other days we can feel pretty shitty. We feel stressed from our job and personal issues. We feel lost. We don’t know what direction our life is heading in. We don’t have enough money in our bank accounts. We have hit a wall in our photography. We don’t feel inspired.

    The only cure is action via shooting. So for this assignment, shoot how you feel. If you’re feeling moody and depressed, channel your emotions when you’re shooting. Perhaps having this mood will help you identify and empathize with other random people on the streets that might feel the same way. Generally when I’m feeling moody I find that gritty black and white suits my mood.

    However when you are in a good mood, look for the good and joyful moments out there. Photograph kids playing freely. Photograph old couples in love. Photograph your loved ones.

    Work on shooting an emotion and mood based on how you feel. Try to do this for a year, and make a series of 10-12 images that fit a mood like “despair, hope, joy, or isolation.” The more emotional you make your photos the more your viewers can feel what you feel.

    > “A portrait is not a likeness. The moment an emotion or fact is transformed into a photograph it is no longer a fact but an opinion. There is no such thing as inaccuracy in a photograph. All photographs are accurate. None of them is truth.” – Richard Avedon

    Richard Avedon isn’t known as a “street photographer.” He is famous for his large format 8×10 portraits of celebrities, musicians, and fashion photography.

    Often overlooked is Avedon’s “street portraits” in his book: “In the American West”, he traveled across America and shot portraits of people he found interesting from 1979-84. He asked his subjects for permission, placed them in front of a huge white backdrop, and caught moments of hope, despair, longing, strength, confusion, and love.

    Avedon describes how when he made photos of these people it was more of a “fiction than documentary:

    “I think the larger issue is that photography is not reportage, it is not journalism— it is fiction. When I go to the west and do the working class (it is more about the working class than the west)—it is my view. Like John Wayne is Hollywood’s view. So it means my idea of the working class is a fiction.”

    Avedon is one of the greatest portrait photographers in history, and he boldly stated that every photo we make is an opinion. We decide when to click the shutter, because we personally find a certain moment or expression interesting.

    However he also states that all photos are “accurate” in the sense that the moment your camera captures an image, the moment you caught is precise. However there is no objective “truth” in your photos.

    In that sense all the photos we tell are “lies”.

    So what is the secret of making great photos? It isn’t to tell the truth but to show your subjective view of reality.

    Mary Ellen Mark also shares how a photographer can never be 100% objective:

    “I don’t think you’re ever an objective observer. By making a frame you’re being selective, then you edit the pictures you want published and you’re being selective again. You develop a point of view that you want to express. You try to go into a situation with an open mind, but then you form an opinion and you express it in your photographs. It is very important for a photographer to have a point of view- that contributes to a great photograph.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    The humanist photographer Sebastiao Salgado also says:

    “Photography is not objective. It is deeply subjective – my photography is consistent ideologically and ethically with the person I am.” – Sebastião Salgado

    Assignment : Lie through a photograph

    For this assignment you are required to try to make a convincing lie. Find a stranger in the streets who looks very happy. Then approach that person, ask to make a portrait of them. If they say yes, start off by asking them to smile really big doe the camera. Then try to ask them to look sad or melancholy. Tell them to tell you a sad story, or something unfortunate that happened to them recently.

    Now when you made several images, go home and try to find the most convincing image of that subject looking sad. Try to show it to some friends or colleagues and ask them how the photo makes them feel. Notice whether or not the viewer is “fooled” by thinking that this person is genuinely sad (whereas in “reality” they were quite happy).

    Example

    For example this one photograph I shot of an old man in Amsterdam on a train looks quite lonely and miserable. The viewer might come up with a story about him: how he worked his entire life and never had a loving family or partner. In the frame he looks isolated and alone.

    But in reality, his wife was sitting next to him. However I made the decision not to include her in the frame. I told a lie; the version of reality I was trying to create.

    In another photograph of a man taking a bite out of a sandwich for my “Suits” series, I also recreated the scene. I saw him about to take a bite out of his sandwich, and I brought up my camera to make an image. He saw me, and stopped. I then asked him through the window to take a bite. He listened and took a bite, and I took a photograph. The image looks candid, but it was staged and recreated.

    So don’t feel guilty about telling lies in your photos. Remember: all photos are accurate, none of them is truth.

    Lesson #29: Disturb your viewer

    “It’s so strange to me that anyone would ever think that a work of art shouldn’t be disturbing or shouldn’t be invasive. That’s the property of work— that’s the arena of a work of art. It is to disturb, it to make you think, to make you feel. If my work didn’t disturb from time to time, it would be a failure in my own eyes. It’s meant to disturb— in a positive way.” – Richard Avedon

    Sometimes as photographers and artists, we are afraid of being criticized. We are afraid of having out work criticized, but also criticized for not being a loving, empathetic, or mindful human being.

    There is not one great photographer in history without his or her critics. No matter how good you are as a photographer, you’re always going to court some sort of controversy or hate. In fact, I believe that the more hated or criticized a photographer is, the most successful he or she is.

    When Robert Frank made his book: “The Americans”, it was largely seen as a horrible and anti American book. It got trashed by editors and photography magazines. But several decades later it was seen to be one of the finest photography books in history.

    When Daido Moriyama first started to shoot street photography with a cheap point and shoot Ricoh GR camera, he was ridiculed by other photographer for his grainy, out of focus, and technically imperfect images. But now it is a generally accepted aesthetic, with lots of photographers who admire this type of shooting.

    As Richard Avedon states: the best art is disturbing and invasive to the viewer. Great art disturbs the viewer by pushing themself out of their comfort zone, to challenge their thinking, thoughts, world view, and beliefs. It challenges the viewer to feel a different way.

    The worst thing you can be as an artist and photographer is to be boring. The secret to failure as a photographer is to make work that doesn’t offend anybody.

    Assignment: Haters are gonna hate

    For this assignment, do research on a photographer or artist you admire. Search in Google for their name and add keywords like “overrated” or “critique”. No matter how successful or talented a photographer is, he or she is always going to have “haters.”

    So realize, you cannot go through life and your photographic journey without having someone dislike your work. My suggestion: embrace it, and intentionally try to disturb your viewer.

    Example

    This one photograph I took was quite controversial. It pissed off a lot of people, as people found it rude and controversial. It is a photograph of a woman inside a money-exchange booth in Hong Kong. I saw the woman who looked lonely and trapped inside, and I wanted to catch that emotion. So I brought up my camera and prepared to take a photograph. At that moment, she started to bang against the window (signaling me not to take the photograph). But I reacted to that gesture, and took an image with a flash.

    Many viewers were upset because I took the photograph against this woman’s wishes. But still, I feel that by conveying her anxiety and energy in the photo make it engaging, full of energy and passion, which shows her emotions.

    Was it “right” or “wrong” for me to have taken the shot? Ultimately it is the ethical judgement of the viewer which decides, not that of the photographer.

    “Modern technology has taken the angst out of achieving the perfect shot. For me, the only thing that counts is the idea behind the image: what you want to see and what you’re trying to say. The idea is crucial. You have to think of something you want to say and expand upon it.” – Martin Parr

    Nowadays with smartphones and modern digital photography, a photographer doesn’t need to rely on manual or technical settings anymore. If you just set your camera to “P” (program mode), your camera automatically chooses the exposure, aperture, shutter speed, and often does a better job than the photographer. This liberates the photographer to focus on composing and framing the scene well.

    Ultimately the technical settings matter insofar much as you need to make a strong image with a strong idea. Many Magnum photographers shoot in “P” mode (even nowadays Steve McCurry). The real master photographers don’t care so much about technical settings, but what they are trying to say through their images.

    Magnum photographer Constantine Manos also mirror the importance of ideas in photography:

    “Ideas are very important and underrated in photography. A photograph, like a written text or a short story, is an idea. A photograph is an idea. A visual idea. It doesn’t need any words. But it is an idea– a visual idea. If you see something, a good photograph is the expression of an idea. This doesn’t require captions and explanations. A photo should make a statement.” – Constantine Manos

    Even going back further in time to the work of Andre Kertesz in the early 20th century, he stresses the importance of mood and emotion, not technique:

    “Technique isn’t important. Technique is in the blood. Events and mood are more important than good light and the happening is what is important.” – Andre Kertesz

    Kertesz expands on saying that even though you might have a technically perfect image, it doesn’t mean anything without expression or soul:

    “If you want to write, you should learn the alphabet. You write and write and in the end you have a beautiful, perfect alphabet. But it isn’t the alphabet that is important. The important thing is what you are writing, what you are expressing. The same thing goes for photography. Photographs can be technically perfect and even beautiful, but they have no expression.” – Andre Kertesz

    Assignment: Try out “P” mode

    When you’re out making images, you only have a limited amount of brainpower. So don’t waste your effort in thinking about your camera settings. Focus on capturing the moment, the mood, and the soul behind an image.

    If you’ve never tried “P” mode, give it a go. Set your camera to “P” (or program), center-point autofocus, and ISO 1600. This will automatically prevent you from worrying about the technical settings, and more on the image-making aspect of things. Try it out for a month, and see if this liberates and helps your photography.

    Example

    In this photograph I took in Downtown LA, it was sunset and I saw this fascinating girl with a shadow that looked like a Pinnochio nose. I shot it on a Ricoh GR, and had the camera set to “P” mode and center autofocus. This allowed me to focus on “working the scene,” and not worrying about technical settings. Ultimately, I got the shot that I wanted, because I didn’t have to waste energy on worrying about what my aperture or shutter speed was.

    If you ever exhibit your photos or print them in a book, nobody is going to ask you if you shot it fully-manually or not. Ultimately only the image and idea matters.

    Lesson #31: Enjoy the process

    “I was taking pictures for myself. I felt free. Photography was a lot of fun for me. First of all I’d get really excited waiting to see if the pictures would come out the next day. I didn’t really know anything about photography, but I loved the camera.” – William Klein

    If you’re not having fun in photography, you’re doing something wrong. Not only that, but why would you make photos if you didn’t enjoy it? We already have enough stress and anxiety from our jobs, relationships, and other aspects of our lives.

    The more fun you have while making images, the more your enthusiasm will communicate to the viewer.

    William Klein expresses his love and enthusiasm for photography vividly. Through his words, you can see how much love and passion he has for his craft:

    “… a photographer can love his camera and what it can do in the same way that a painter can love his brush and paints, love the feel of it and the excitement.”

    When William Klein shot on the streets, he would experiment and try out different techniques. He wasn’t 100% sure what he would get, but he harnessed luck and chance, all the while enjoying the process:

    “I would look at my contact sheets and my heart would be beating, you know. To see if I’d caught what I wanted. Sometimes, I’d take shots without aiming, just to see what happened. I’d rush into crowds – bang! Bang! I liked the idea of luck and taking a chance, other times I’d frame a composition I saw and plant myself somewhere, longing for some accident to happen.”

    While it is important to work hard in your photography, don’t push yourself so hard that you no longer enjoy the process of photography. Constantine Manos explains:

    “…Don’t drive yourself [too hard]. If you’re tired, sit down. If you’re not enjoying it [photographing], you’re doing something wrong. Photography should always be a pleasurable search for something wonderful.” – Constantine Manos

    Another tip: don’t take yourself too seriously, just like Elliott Erwitt:

    “I’m not a serious photographer like most of my colleagues. That is to say, I’m serious about not being serious.” Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment: Make yourself miserable

    Sometimes it is hard to know whether you are having “fun” or not. But it is easy to tell whether you are feeling miserable, are bored, or don’t enjoy something.

    So for this assignment, we are going to learn how to have more “fun” in photography by intentionally learning what makes us miserable in photography.

    Take out a notebook and write down a list of things which you don’t enjoy or things that makes you miserable or bored in photography. Everyone differs in their perspectives. So here are some ideas, just pick and choose what resonates with you:

    • I dislike shooting everyday.
    • I dislike not shooting everyday.
    • I dislike shooting alone.
    • I dislike shooting with others.
    • I dislike shooting with a project in mind.
    • I dislike going out and shooting without having a propose.
    • I dislike talking and engaging with strangers in public, I prefer to be candid.
    • I dislike shooting without permission, I would prefer to ask.

    So after you write down a list of things you don’t enjoy in photography, to have fun just do the exact opposite.

    Lesson #32: Single photos can’t tell stories

    “For me this just reveals, once again, the biggest problem with photography. Photographs aren’t good at telling stories. Stories require a beginning, middle and end. They require the progression of time. Photographs stop time. They are frozen. Mute. As viewers of the picture, we have no idea what those people on the waterfront are talking about.” – Alec soth

    Alec Soth is one of the most successful and hard working contemporary master photographers. He is a master storyteller, and also constantly experiments with his photography. Although he is a photographer, he is less interested in making single images and more interested in telling good stories.

    Soth makes the bold statement that a single image cannot tell a story. While a single image can suggest a story to the viewer, a real story needs a beginning middle and end. And you can only achieve that through a series of images. Soth expands on the idea:

    “So what are photographs good at? While they can’t tell stories, they are brilliant at suggesting stories.”

    Furthermore, the problem with single images is that they often don’t provide enough context. Soth states:

    “You can’t tell provide context in 1/500th of a second.”

    Photography has only been around for less than 150 years. But story telling has been around for millenia. Soth views the storytelling as the ultimate goal in his photography:

    “This is the never ending struggle, I think storytelling is the most powerful art, for me. I just think there’s nothing more satisfying than the narrative thrust: beginning, middle, and end, what’s gonna happen. The thing I’m always bumping up against is that photography doesn’t function that way. Because it’s not a time-based medium, it’s frozen in time, they suggest stories, they don’t tell stories. So it is not narrative. So it functions much more like poetry than it does like the novel. It’s just these impressions and you leave it to the viewer to put together. ”

    Garry Winogrand also shares his perspective that photographs by themselves are just images; light reflected off surfaces. The meanings created through images are through the viewer, not the images themselves:

    “Photos have no narrative content. They only describe light on surface.” – Garry Winogrand

    Joel Sternfeld also shares the problem of photography, that single images can’t explain anything:

    “You take 35 degrees out of 360 degrees and call it a photo. No individual photo explains anything. That’s what makes photography such a wonderful and problematic medium.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Sebastiao Salgado ties it all together by also hammering in the point that he only works for a group of images to tell a story:

    “I always work for a group of pictures, to tell a story. If you ask which picture in a story I like most, it is impossible for me to tell you this. I don’t work for an individual picture. If I must select one individual picture for a client, it is very difficult for me.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    One last piece of advice from Alec Soth: think of yourself less as a photographer, and more of a film maker. This will help you, because making great photography projects isn’t just shooting; the editing, sequencing, and publishing are just as important:

    “I don’t come close to shooting every day. For better or worse, I don’t carry a camera with me everywhere I go. I liken my process to that of filmmaking. First I conceive of the idea. Then I do pre-production and fundraising. Then shooting. Then editing. Then distribution (books and galleries). As with most filmmakers, the shooting takes just a fraction of my time.” – Alec Soth

    Assignment : Tell a story

    One of the best ways to learn how to tell better stories in photography with a series is to study film, novels, and stories. See how the stories have a beginning, middle, and end.

    In terms of sequencing, think about the flow of images you want, and how you want the feel to be. Do you want your story to start off with a drama or problem, and slowly introduce protagonists to your story, and have them resolve it at the end? Or perhaps do you want your story to be like a fairytale like photographer Jason Eskenazi did in his “Wonderland” book?

    When putting together a book or series, I recommend printing out your photos as small 4×6 prints, and spreading them out on a table. Try to find some sort of flow to the images, and even ask your friends to help sequence your images to tell different stories. If you prefer a digital approach, you can also try sequencing your images on an iPad.

    If you’ve never created a series before, constrain your story to 10 images. Think about what your opening shot will be, the sequencing of the next images, and the final shot.

    As a final suggestion, if you want to learn how to focus on storytelling, take a break from social media which focuses on single images (Instagram and Flickr).

    Work on your story for 3 months. Spend 1 month shooting, 1 month editing and sequencing, and 1 month printing and publishing your work.

    Lesson #33: Think like a film maker (got combined with lesson #32)

    “I don’t come close to shooting every day. For better or worse, I don’t carry a camera with me everywhere I go. I liken my process to that of filmmaking. First I conceive of the idea. Then I do pre-production and fundraising. Then shooting. Then editing. Then distribution (books and galleries). As with most filmmakers, the shooting takes just a fraction of my time.” – Alec Soth

    Another practical lesson I learned from Alec Soth was to think of yourself less as a photographer, and more of a film maker. This will help you, because making great photography projects isn’t just shooting; the editing, sequencing, and publishing are just as important.

    Lesson #34: Focus on the work (before the promotion)

    “Now I’m in the position where I see a lot of young photographers pushing their work, and I think that’s fine, but so often it’s wasted effort before the work is ready. Everyone’s running around trying to promote themselves, and you kinda have to put in those years of hard work to make something decent before you do that. Particularly that first project is the hardest thing. I always say the 20s are the hardest decade because you don’t have money and you don’t have a reputation. In relation to this kind of issue, I’m always wary that the advice is like “you need to put together this promo package that you send out to these 100 people.” No, you need to do the work, and worry about that later.” – Alec Soth

    In today’s society we all want to become famous. Social media has only intensified this. We start to focus on how to become more famous; how to get more followers, more views, more comments, more likes, more awards, more commissions, more exhibitions, more money, and more popularity.

    However know that before you worry about promotion, fame, and wealth, you should focus on the most important thing in photography and art: the work itself.

    It is true that you need some promotion if you want to have your work recognized. For example, Vivian Maier died penniless because she never showed her work to anybody else while she was alive (even though she was a master photographer).

    But at the same time, the problem that a lot of photographers make is they focus on the promotion of their images before getting better.

    In today’s world with social media, if you make good work, sooner or later you will become “discovered” and have your work appreciated.

    I find the photographers who best become “discovered” are the ones who work on meaningful projects, that have a cohesive concept and theme, and publish it as a “body of work.” This often works much better than publishing random photos to Facebook, Instagram, or Flickr.

    Assignment : don’t publish any photos for 6 months

    If you want to learn how to focus on your work it is important to not get distracted. So as an assignment: try to abstain from publishing any of your photos online for 6 months.

    Personally I did this assignment (suggested from my friend and photographer Charlie Kirk) and it was the best thing I ever did. It taught me to focus less about how many “likes” and “favorites” I would get on my images, and more about how to make powerful and meaningful images and projects.

    6 months might seem like a long time, and learning not to upload your photos all the time on social media will teach you patience. Not only that, but the longer you wait before publishing your work the better you can judge your images objectively; whether they are worth publishing or not.

    “I have this thing, the camera’s on a tripod, it’s like an easel “Ok, I can only take a couple, I gotta makes this great.” Then I tried to get everything in the frame, which, in fact, is not a good strategy for photography. Its pulling stuff out of the frame is usually what you want to do, to simplify it. But I didn’t know that. So that was one of the lessons learned.” – Alec Soth

    Photography is much more about subtraction than addition. As a photographer, you want to show your viewer the significance of a scene. You want to be specific.

    By having too many subjects or objects in a frame, you only confuse your viewer. A cluttered photograph is difficult to look at, and often uninteresting.

    Subtraction is addition. By removing unnecessary elements from the frame, you give more focus and importance to what actually exists in the frame.

    Photographer Joel Meyerowitz also shares how determining what to include and exclude is what determines the meaning of a photograph:

    “And early on I sensed the power of that in this regard: when you put your frame up to your eye, the world continues outside the frame. So what you put in and what you leave out are what determines the meaning or potential of your photograph. But you must continue to keep in mind that there are plenty of stuff off-stage. And what bearing might the rest of the off-stage have on this?” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Furthermore, remove from the frame which might distract the viewer. Photographer Richard Kalvar explains:

    “The framing is very important – you have to keep out things that distract from the little drama that’s in the picture. I’d like my pictures to exist almost in a dream state and have people react to them almost as if they’re coming in and out of daydreams, you know?” – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment : Subtract until there isn’t anything left to subtract

    This assignment is a zen assignment: try to subtract from your frame until there is nothing left to subtract.

    So for example, take a photograph of a scene you find interesting. Then subtract from it, perhaps by taking a step closer or by framing the scene differently. Then try to subtract some more by asking yourself, “What information in this scene is not really necessary?” You might subtract unnecessary trees, cars, lamp poles, people, or even body limbs. Keep subtracting and cutting from your frame until there isn’t anything left to subtract.

    Then go back and choose which of your photos works the best. Try to find that balance of simplicity and minimalism in your frame which highlights the “little drama” happening in your frame.

    Lesson #36: Make yourself vulnerable

    “One thing I’m really interested in is vulnerability. When you talk about Arbus and Hujar . . . I like being exposed to vulnerabilities. I think there’s something really beautiful about it. That’s kind of what I’ve been doing with these little stories, amping up the vulnerability, but also my own vulnerabilities, exposing more of myself. Because I knew with that “journalist” line I’m exposing my own shit there. I’m trying to get down to something raw.” – Alec Soth

    The more vulnerable you make yourself as a photographer, the more vulnerable your subjects will make themselves to you. And the more vulnerable your subjects, the deeper you can connect with then emotionally.

    If you look at many of Alec Soth’s portraits of people, you might wonder how he was able to make them open up so much to him. His subjects are totally open, transparent, and sometimes even nude (metaphorically and literally).

    You can’t expect your subjects to open up to you if you don’t open up to them. People respond to you reciprocally.

    Another photographer who gets very deep with his subjects is Jacob Aue Sobol. He sees photography as an exchange between photographer and subject. You must make yourself equal to your subjects as well:

    “You have to be completely open and demonstrate that you are also vulnerable. You can’t be just a photographer – you have to discover who you are yourself. If you don’t, people won’t open up to you. That means that you mustn’t avoid being vulnerable. For me, it’s a kind of exchange. Even though I’m the one taking the pictures, my ambition is to achieve an equal exchange between myself and the person I’m photographing.” – Jacob Aue Sobol

    Assignment: What does it feel like to be on the other side?

    If you want to make your photos more personal, it is important to make an equal exchange with your subject.

    Ironically, I know a lot of photographers who don’t like being photographed. This is a huge hurdle to overcome, because if you’re not comfortable being photographed, how can you expect your subjects to also feel comfortable being photographed? Not only that, but you will also assume that everyone else doesn’t like being photographed.

    So experiment by being on the other side of the camera. If you have a friend who is a portrait photographer, ask them to take portraits of you. Then make notes in terms of what makes you feel comfortable or uncomfortable when you’re being photographed.

    Another idea: if you approach a stranger on the streets and you’re interested in them, start off by asking them to shoot a portrait of you. Then once they’re done, kindly ask if you can take a portrait of them as well.

    Then afterwards, show them the photos you took of them on the LCD screen of your camera, and ask them which of the photos they prefer of themselves. Then offer to email them the shots, or even send them a print.

    Make your photography an exchange, and make yourself vulnerable to your subjects. Only this way can you get deeper emotionally to your subjects.

    Lesson #37: Stay an amateur

    “I am an amateur and intend to remain one my whole life long. I attribute to photography the task of recording the real nature of things, their interior, their life. The photographer’s art is a continuous discovery, which requires patience and time. A photograph draws its beauty from the truth with which it’s marked.” – Andre Kertesz

    Often being called an “amateur” is an insult. Being called an “amateur” connotates that you are unskilled, a beginner, and someone without vision.

    However in reality the root of the word “amateur” is to do something for the love of it (as opposed to a “professional” who does something for money).

    Just because you’re a “professional” photographer doesn’t mean that you’re good. You can be a baby photographer in a mall and be a “professional.” Or you can have a full time job doing something else and only make photos of what you love being an “amateur.”

    My suggestion: embrace being an amateur. Revel in it. Love is the energy and passion which keeps your photography moving forward. Sometimes when you think too much about monetizing your photography professionally, you lose your passion for what you photograph.

    Assignment: Give away your photography

    Thinking too much about making money off your photography (especially if you already have a full time job) can hurt you creatively.

    As an experiment, I would suggest giving away your photography, and seeing how it makes you feel.

    Start off by printing out your favorite photos, and give them away for free to friends, family, and colleagues. See how much joy this brings them.

    Personally, all of my photos are “open-source”, meaning that they are free to download, print, share, etc. All of them are available full resolution on my Flickr page (flickr.com/ekizz).

    While I make my living teaching photography workshops, I give away all my photos, books, videos, and articles away for free. This helps me to keep this “amateur” side of photography, where I do it purely for the love of it, and not always worrying how I can “monetize” my photography.

    I have gained much more energy and inspiration in my photography from the appreciation I get from others rather than money.

    Forever be an amateur.

    Lesson #38: Stay hungry

    Even when Andre Kertesz was 90 years old, he created a new portfolio and shared it with the photographer Susan May Tell. When Tell asked him what kept him going, Kertesz responded: “I am still hungry.”

    Many of us have excuses in our photography: that we are too old, and that we wish that we started sooner.

    However our age, nationality, background, heritage, or skill in photography doesn’t matter. The only thing that matters is how passionate and hungry we are in our photography.

    Many photographers become jaded after years of shooting. They lose a sense of their hunger and passion.

    Andre Kertesz (after a lifetime of shooting) still created new work in his 80s and even presented a new portfolio when he was 90. He wasn’t easily satisfied with his work, he was still hungry to explore the world and shoot more, and to see the limits of the photographic medium.

    One of my favorite quotes that is similar is from Steve Jobs, who said: “Stay hungry, stay foolish.”

    We all need a bit of hunger in our life to propel us to action, and to keep going. If you’re constantly full and bloated with food, you have no motivation to move or do anything.

    Personally I find my best writing, photography, and exercise happens when I am physically hungry. That hunger compels me to act.

    Similarly in photography, stir up your appetite and hunger. Whenever I don’t feel motivated or inspired, I look at the photography and work of the masters. Whenever I see their images or read their thoughts, it makes me hungry to also make images in photography.

    Assignment: Shoot without film or a memory card

    If you feel you have “photographer’s block” in your work and don’t feel inspired, try out this assignment: for an entire day, shoot without having film or a memory card in your camera.

    Walk around for an entire day with your camera, and take photos of anything that interests you. But without having any film or memory cards in your camera, you will frustrated and upset that you didn’t record anything that entire day. Then you can rush home, put in some real film or memory cards, and then go out and shoot with a reignited sense of vigor and hunger to make images.

    “Shooting people is more beautiful, because it is more difficult.” – Constantine Manos

    One of the best things about street photography is that it is so challenging. Anything in life which is too easy is no fun. As human beings we crave adventure, difficulty, and challenge.

    Street photography is one of the most difficult genres of photography out there, because it is difficult to shoot human beings. We have so little control over the background, the subject, and the light. We have a fear of pissing people off. We have the fear of missing the “decisive moment.”

    If you find yourself being bored with photography, it probably has become too easy for you. So push yourself out of your comfort zone, and aim to make more difficult images.

    For example, let’s say your photography is mostly of single subjects, which has become too easy for you. Try to add complexity, layers, and depth to your shots (like the work of Constantine Manos or Alex Webb).

    Assignment: Shoot what you’re afraid of

    Have you ever had a situation when you were out shooting all day and you didn’t find anything interesting? Happens to me all the time.

    However have you ever seen a scene that you wanted to capture but were too nervous or afraid to do so?

    Channel that fear. Photograph what you are afraid of. The only reason that you’re afraid of shooting a scene is because you want to photograph it, but you’re afraid of the consequences.

    By doing what we’re afraid of we continue to grow. We escape complacency.

    So try to photograph a neighborhood or type of subject matter which frightens you. Of course do this within common sense and with safety in mind.

    But whenever you see a shot you’re afraid of, shoot it.

    Lesson #40: Print your photos

    “A photograph doesn’t exist until it is printed.” – Constantine Manos

    In today’s digital age, we are so used to seeing our images on a screen. We see them on our laptops, tablets, and smartphones. But the print is a dying medium. When is the last time you printed 4×6 prints of a holiday trip, instead of just sharing and tagging them on Facebook?

    Constantine Manos says a photograph doesn’t exist until it is printed. I would have to agree. If a photograph isn’t printed, it only exists metaphorically in pixels, and in 1’s and 0’s digitally in the ether. Printing a photograph makes it physical and brings it into the “real world.” A printed photograph has texture, weight, and takes up physical space.

    In a manifesto called “The Print”, Constantine Manos professes his life and shares the importance of printing our images:

    The Print

    “There are still photographers who believe that a photograph does not exist until it is a print. There remains in their memory the experience of working in a darkroom and recalling the magic of seeing an image gradually appear on a piece of paper in a tray of liquid; all this lit by a warm golden light.

    If processed and stored properly this print can last for generations. It becomes archival; it becomes vintage. It becomes a treasure to be put in a fine box between soft acid-free tissues. It can be framed and hung in a favorite spot, to become an object of daily pleasure and comfort. It is a real object we can hold in our hands, not a negative or an image floating around in space and stored in cold machines.

    Whether captured on film or captured digitally, this print, this object, reflects the craft and skill and pride of its maker. Its quality is a reflection of the skill and art of its making.

    Let us sign it with our name as an expression of pride and accomplishment– whether we have made it ourselves or have entrusted it’s making to a skilled artisan. Let us be collectors and guardians of these beautiful artifacts. Let us celebrate the print.” – Constantine Manos, September 2014

    Assignment : Print your photos

    Have you ever had a hard drive crash on you which caused you to lose priceless images? If so, remind yourself how painful that experience was. If this has never happened to you, trust me; it will happen sooner or later. The average hard drive is rated to only survive 3 years. Even though we have data stored online in “the cloud,” can you expect people to retrieve that data 200 (or even 2000 years from now?)

    Make it a habit to print your photos. While photos can burn in a fire, they are still more stable than digital files. Print out your favorite photos and put them into boxes, folders, or scrapbooks. Enjoy physically holding, touching, and arranging your photos.

    Experiment printing your photos in different sizes, and see how that changes how you feel about your images.

    Always remind yourself, a photograph never truly exists until you turn it into physical atoms through the print.

    Lesson #41: Don’t get suckered by ‘the exotic’

    “It is not enough to just photograph what something looks like. We need to make it into something that is unique, a surprise. Photography has been used forever to show what things look like, like when photographers photographed objects and landscapes.” – Constantine Manos

    Have you ever been to India for the first time, where you strove to make all your photos look “National Geographic” and exotic? But we have all already seen those types of images before, they are quite boring.

    The job of a photographer isn’t to just make beautiful postcards of exotic places. The job of the photographer is to make a unique image that hasn’t been done before. Rather than simply duplicating what has been done in the past, we should strive to add to the conversation of photography by adding something a little extra.

    Constantine Manos advised me not to get “suckered by the exotic.” I have to admit, this happens to me all the time, especially when I travel to exotic locations which are novel to me, like India, Tokyo, or Paris. I have a mental repository of all the exotic photos I have seen in the past, and I try to simply replicate it.

    Also as a photographer, we need to imbue meaning into the images we make. We aren’t there to simply capture what is before our very eyes. We have already seen a million photos of the Eiffel tower, the Taj Mahal, and of a sunset. We shouldn’t photograph what things look like. We should photograph what things feel like.

    Assignment: Shoot your own backyard

    Many of us photographers daydream and fantasize about going to exotic places in the world to make fantastical images.

    However realize the best photographs are to be taken in your own backyard; your own city, neighborhood, or town.

    So try this as an experiment: be a tourist in your own hometown. Imagine that you visited your own city for the first time. What would you find interesting and unique? At the same time, you know what is a “cliché” photo, so try to avoid that. Find the beauty in the mundane in your town, and know you don’t have to rely on exotic happenings, places, or events to make powerful images.

    Lesson #42: Why are you pushing the button?

    “The best way to take a bad picture is to take it. Ask yourself: ’Why am I pushing the button?’ You want to get rid of the clutter before putting it into the machine.” – Constantine Manos

    As photographers we sometimes ask the wrong questions to ourselves. We ask how to take photos, where to take photos, when to take photos. But rarely do we ask ourselves why we take photos.

    You need a reason why you click the shutter. What about a scene interests you? Why did you make that image? What kind of mood does it have? What kind of juxtaposition does it have? What kind of oddness is there?

    Assignment: why do I take photos?

    For this assignment, take out your notebook and write why you make images.

    For me, I studied sociology as an undergraduate in university and I strive to make images that are sociological; that challenges the viewer to look at society differently.

    Everyone will have a different answer. But it is a question that is difficult and takes a long time to contemplate and ask oneself.

    As the ancients once said, “Know thyself.” and Socrates said, “The unexamined life is not worth living.”

    Lesson #43: Create specific photographs

    “A photograph has to be specific. I remember a long time ago when I first began to photograph I thought, There are an awful lot of people in the world and it’s going to be terribly hard to photograph all of them, so if I photograph some kind of generalized human being, everybody’ll recognize it. It’ll be like what they used to call the common man or something. It was my teacher Lisette Model, who finally made it clear to me that the more specific you are, the more general it’ll be. You really have to face that thing. And there are certain evasions, certain nicenesses that I think you have to get out of.” – Diane Arbus

    A common mistake I see a lot of beginning photographers make is that their photos are too general. If you make your photos too general, there isn’t enough interest for the viewer.

    Viewers want their eyes to latch on certain details they find interesting in a photograph. They want a visual anchor they find interesting to keep their eyes from wandering outside of the frame.

    For Diane Arbus, she learned the lesson from her teacher (Lisette Model) that the more specific you make your photos, the more people they will reach and touch.

    For example, Diane Arbus would find specific details in her subjects that she found interesting. She would be drawn to their face, body gestures, or their expressions. Not only that, but she was specific in the types of subjects she photographed; people generally ignored or ostracized in society. These included dwarves, transgendered people, and others commonly known in her era as “freaks.”

    So to make more interesting photographs, strive to make more specific photographs.

    This goes back to the concept of “creative constraints,” in which setting boundaries in your art help you creatively. Don’t seek to photograph everything but constrain yourself from photographing the general.

    So if you plan to do a photography project, don’t aim to shoot the entire city. Constrain yourself to one neighborhood. Don’t try to photograph all the types of people you come across, photograph just one type of person.

    Assignment: See one color

    For this assignment it will show you the power of being specific. To start off just choose one color you find interesting. Then for the entire day, only shoot that one color.

    For example let’s say you decide to shoot the color red. I can guarantee you that once you narrow your focus and be specific to that one type of color, you will start seeing it everywhere.

    Once you’re done with this assignment you can try to be specific with other types of subject matter: shadows, cars, dogs, children, the elderly, hands, sunglass, etc.

    The more specific you make your photos, the more interesting they will be to the general public.

    Lesson #44: Compose intuitively

    “Composition must be one of our constant preoccupations, but at the moment of shooting it can stem only from our intuition, for we are out to capture the fugitive moment, and all the interrelationships involved are on the move.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    There are two main things that make a great photograph: content (what’s in the frame) and form (how it is composed). You need a perfect marriage of these two elements to make a memorable photograph.

    As photographers we must constantly be preoccupied with how we compose our photos, as Henri Cartier-Bresson mentioned. However, especially when it comes to street photography, how can we compose quickly when the moment we see can be so fleeting?

    Henri Cartier-Bresson states that composition can only be derived from intuition. It is hard to see diagonals, triangles, circles, leading lines, etc when you’re shooting. But the more you study the composition of your photos after you shoot it, the more you can learn how to better compose your images. Cartier-Bresson continues below:

    “Any geometrical analysis, any reducing of the picture to a schema, can be done only (because of its very nature) after the photograph has been taken, developed, and printed– and then it can be used only for a post-mortem examination of the picture.”

    Having a “post mortem” examination is one of the key points to improving your composition. We learn more from our mistakes than our successes. If you make a photo with poor composition, don’t beat yourself up. Rather, ask yourself, “How can I learn from this compositional mistake, and improve upon it for next time?”

    Another practical tip from Henri Cartier-Bresson: trace the geometric shapes you see in your photos after you’ve shot them to analyze and learn from them:

    “You can take a print of this picture, trace it on the geometric figures which come up under analysis, and you’ll observe that, if the shutter was released at the decisive moment, you have instinctively fixed a geometric pattern without which the photograph would have been both formless and lifeless.”

    The greatest street photographers also agree on this point, that composition is mostly intuitive and comes with practice. Diane Arbus shares her ideas below:

    “I hate the idea of composition. I don’t know what good composition is. I mean I guess I must know something about it from doing it a lot and feeling my way into and into what I like. Sometimes for me composition has to do with a certain brightness or a certain coming to restness and other times it has to do with funny mistakes. Theres a kind of rightness and wrongness and sometimes I like rightness and sometimes I like wrongness. Composition is like that.” – Diane Arbus

    Helen Levitt also draws on the importance on focusing on practice and intuition, less on theory in composition:

    “It would be mistaken to suppose that any of the best photography is come at by intellection; it is like all art, essentially the result of an intuitive process, drawing on all that the artist is rather than on anything he thinks, far less theorizes about.” – Helen Levitt

    Walker Evans also shares how he doesn’t think much viciously when composing his images:

    “I don’t think very much about it consciously, but I’m very aware of it unconsciously, instinctively. Deliberately discard it every once in a while not to be artistic. Composition is a schoolteacher’s word. Any artist composes. I prefer to compose originally, naturally rather than self-consciously. Form and composition both are terribly important. I can’t stand a bad design or a bad object in a room. So much for form. That way it’s placed is composition… when you stop to think about what an artist is doing one question is, what is the driving force, the motive.” – Walker Evans

    Assignment : Trace over your photos

    For this assignment, print out your most successful photos (and some unsuccessful) photos as cheap xerox prints. Then you’re going to take a red marker and start to draw all the lines, diagonals, triangles, circles, leading lines, and other compositional elements you see.

    Then ask yourself: if you could have framed this photograph again but differently, what would you change?

    Try not to force yourself to think too much about composition when you’re out shooting on the streets. Rather, study it after you’ve taken images. Then this will help you make your compositions more intuitive over time.

    Lesson #45: Arrange yourself, not others

    “I work from awkwardness. By that I mean I don’t like to arrange things if I stand in front of something, instead of arranging it, I arrange myself”. – Diane Arbus

    In photography, position is everything. The perspective and point of view you get as a photographer greatly affects and influences how an image turns out.

    When you’re shooting on the streets, you can’t always arrange your subjects to be the way you want them to be. However you always have the control of arranging yourself in a certain way.

    So if you want certain compositions or framing when you’re out on the streets, learn how to dance on the streets, almost like a ballerina. Stay light on your toes, just like a boxer. Move left, move right, take a step back, and forward. Learn to crouch, and when to tippy toe. Henri Cartier-Bresson explains how we can change our perspectives just by changing our position by a millimeter:

    “A photographer’s eye is perpetually evaluating. A photographer can bring coincidence of line simply by moving his head a fraction of a millimetre. He can modify perspectives by a slight bending of the knees. By placing the camera closer to or farther from the subject, he draws a detail. But he composes a picture in very nearly the same amount of time it takes to click the shutter, at the speed of a reflex action.”

    Assignment: 360 degrees

    For this assignment, you are going to practice getting a 360 degree perspective of a subject.

    Start off by asking a friend or loved one to photograph. Try to take a portrait of them from every single angle from a 360 degree perspective. Analyze how the light on their face changes. Analyze how at certain angles you can see both eyes, and at certain angles you can only see one eye. Consider how interesting you find the back of their head versus the front of their face.

    Then when you’re on the streets, don’t keep your feet glued to the same perspective when shooting. Learn to “work the scene” by embracing different perspectives. Also remind yourself that one millimeter in terms of perspective can change everything.

    Also when you’re playing with perspectives, as a simple assignment try this: go to a public place where you see a long horizontal pole. Then try to see someone in the background and place them that it looks like they’re sitting on the pole.

    Or another example: try to make surreal photos by placing common objects on top of people’s heads. For example if you see a vendor selling balloons, try to time it perfectly that it looks like one of the balloons have replaced somebody’s head.

    Lesson #46: Don’t just take photos of people

    “The manifestation of people, whether it’s actual people or what people do, it’s the same thing.” – Elliott Erwitt

    As street photographers, our primary concern is to document humanity and society. But that doesn’t always have to be done by photographing human beings. Rather, we can focus on capturing the “manifestation of people” as well.

    For example, many street photographers are drawn to “urban landscapes” in the sense that they are interested in the environments that humans live in and interact in. Sometimes an urban landscape can tell us more about human society than just photographing a portrait of a human being.

    Similarly, you can also photograph certain objects or juxtapositions which you think make sociological statements. For example, one of Elliott Erwitt’s most famous photos show Jesus on the cross juxtaposed next to a Pepsi advertisement. What does this say about human society, and the separation of advertising, money, and religion?

    Assignment : Show soul from an intimate object

    For this assignment try to make a photograph that evokes a human emotion from an intimate object. Perhaps you can see a human face in the holes of a cardboard box. Perhaps you can see a lonely traffic cone that looks ignored. Maybe you can see the facade of a once great building that is falling into ruins.

    Know that at the end of the day, you don’t always have to photograph human beings. Try to make images that evoke strong emotions about human beings.

    Lesson #47: Focus on content over form

    “My wish for the future of photography is that it might continue to have some relevance to the human condition and might represent work that evokes knowledge and emotions. That photography has content rather than just form. And I hope that there will be enough produce to balance out the visual garbage that one sees in our current life.”- Elliott Erwitt

    Sometimes in photography we can focus too much about the composition, framing, color, light, and technical settings of a photograph instead of the emotion and soul behind an image.

    Our primary concern as street photographers is to document and to convey the vastness of the human experience and condition.

    Of course there needs to be a balance between form and content. We can have the most emotional photograph in the world, but without the right composition, we cannot convey that emotion.

    Assignment: The human condition

    Write down a list of all the human emotions that you know of. This can include joy, despair, hope, loneliness, and companionship.

    Then as an assignment for yourself, try to take a photograph which explains each of these human emotions and conditions.

    This will be a great assignment to help you become a more emotional and empathetic photographer.

    Lesson #48: Learn how to see

    “Seeing is more than a physiological phenomenon… We see not only with our eyes but with all that we are and all that our culture is. The artist is a professional see-er.” – Dorothea Lange

    The most important tool of a photographer is his or her eyes. What differentiates an ordinary from a great photographer is how perceptive his or her eyes are.

    Some people simply look at the world, without truly “seeing” the world. Others “see” the walls by analyzing, studying, and psychologically penetrating what is before their very eyes.

    If you take Dorothea Lange’s advice: your job as a photographer is to see the world from a unique perspective. You are a professional “see-er.”

    So how can you better learn to see? Well, one tip Lange gives us is to pause, take our time, and truly analyze what is before our very eyes. This will also allow the viewer to be a more keen observer in terms of what they see:

    “This benefit of seeing… can come only if you pause a while, extricate yourself from the maddening mob of quick impressions ceaselessly battering our lives, and look thoughtfully at a quiet image… the viewer must be willing to pause, to look again, to meditate.” – Dorothea Lange

    Sometimes photographers make the mistake of thinking that buying a new camera will help inspire their vision and way of seeing the world. But that is pure folly. Dorothea Lange explains what the camera is useful for; to see the world with it a camera:

    “A camera is a tool for learning how to see without a camera.”

    Another practical tip from Lange: have a sense of urgency to your image making. You can do this by pretending as if you’re going to lose your vision tomorrow:

    “One should really use the camera as though tomorrow you’d be stricken blind.” – Dorothea Lange

    Elliott Erwitt also mirrors the thinking of Lange that he is constantly aware of his surroundings, and trying to always notice what might make a good photo, even when he doesn’t have a camera with him:

    “Noticing possible pictures — with or without carrying a camera — is fundamental to any working photographer. I would never get tired of noticing, although I would probably not be moved to take pictures that repeat and repeat.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment: imagine if you were to become blind tomorrow

    The world is truly a marvel; a visual feast. Sometimes we complain that our camera isn’t good enough, that we don’t live in an interesting place to photograph, or that we don’t have enough time to photograph.

    A way to break out of that way of thinking: imagine if the doctor told you that you had a rare disease and that you would lose your vision tomorrow. If you were to hear that news, how would you spend your day as a photographer? What would you find valuable that you wanted to document and record? Is there a certain documentary project you would pursue for a day? Or take photos of friends and loved ones? Or shoot a certain neighborhood you’re interested in?

    In reality, there are a lot of blind people who will never have the pleasure (or once had the pleasure) of seeing. So no matter how shitty our life situation may be, how little money we may have, etc, always be thankful for your gift of sight; the most valuable gift of being a photographer.

    Lesson #49: Every photo you take is a self portrait

    “Every image he sees, every photograph he takes, becomes in a sense a self-portrait. The portrait is made more meaningful by intimacy – an intimacy shared not only by the photographer with his subject but by the audience.” – Dorothea Lange

    The photos you make are less about your subject and more about yourself. Whenever you hold your camera to your subject, you are really holding up a mirror and facing yourself.

    When you’re shooting portraits, there needs to be collaboration between the photographer and subject. But ultimately, the photographs you decide to take of a subject is more a judgement of what you find interesting about that person (rather than what your subject finds interesting about him or herself).

    This is a fine line we must tread as photographers, but know that once again, there is no true “objectivity” in photography. It is subjective, and there is no ultimate truth. Richard Avedon explains below after decades of making portraits:

    “There is no truth in photography. There is no truth about anyone’s person. My portraits are much more about me than they are about the people I photograph. I used to think that it was a collaboration, that it was something that happened as a result of what the subject wanted to project and what the photographer wanted to photograph. I no longer think it is that at all.” – Richard Avedon

    Assignment: Self portrait

    If you believe that every portrait you take of someone else is a self portrait, try off by taking self portraits of yourself (literally).

    You can do self portraits in many different ways. You can set your camera on a tripod and timer, and shoot yourself. You can shoot yourself through a mirror or reflection in a puddle. You can photograph your own shadow.

    Sometimes you are your best own subject, when you have nothing else to photograph.

    The more you shoot self portraits, the more you will discover about yourself. Then try to apply the same philosophy when you shoot others.

    Lesson #50: Don’t shoot your preconceived notions

    “To know ahead of time what you’re looking for means you’re then only photographing your own preconceptions, which is very limiting, and often false.” – Dorothea Lange

    To be a great photographer is to have a flexible and open ended mind.

    Think of this zen example: if there is a great storm, the trees that are rigid and rooted into the ground will be blown away. But the bamboo trees which are nimble and flexible will simply sway in the wind and not break.

    Similarly, try your best to have a fluid mind as a photographer. When you’re pursuing a photography project in a certain foreign place, don’t enter that place with any preconceived notions. Have an open mind, without any of your personal prejudices. Start off with a blank slate.

    By approaching a place, subject matter or project with an open mind, you open up more possibilities. You also get a deeper glimpse into another reality of a place that you might not have known existed.

    In fact, being ignorant is a gift. Lange explains:

    “The best way to go into an unknown territory is to go in ignorant, ignorant as possible, with your mind wide open, as wide open as possible and not having to meet anyone else’s requirement but my own.” – Dorothea Lange

    Garry Winogrand also tried to enter the streets without any preconceived notions. He simply documented what he saw and perceived before his very eyes:

    “I don’t have anything to say in any picture. My only interest in photography is to see what something looks like as a photograph. I have no preconceptions.” – Garry Winogrand

    Assignment : Reset your mind

    For this assignment enter a certain neighborhood in your city that you know a lot about. Perhaps it is known as the “posh” or the “ghetto” part of town.

    But enter that place and manually reset your mind. Wipe it clear of any preconceived notions you may have. Then simply document what you see before your eyes without any preconceived notions. See what kinds of images or scenes will come to you, without your filter of preconceptions blinding you.

    This also means the next time you travel to a foreign city, try not to look at too many photos of that place by other photographers. This will allow you to document your version of reality rather than simply copying what you’ve seen before.

    For example, every photographer who goes to India is highly influences by the vivid portraits or Steve McCurry. Therefore many photos shot in India are simply weak attempts to repeat what Steve McCurry has already done. But our job as a photographer is to try to pave new ground, and go somewhere nobody else has gone before.

    Lesson #51: Time is your ultimate resource

    “The important thing is management of time, because there’s so much going around. There’s so many things happening that take your concentration away from things that you want to be doing. What I want to be doing is taking pictures. Management of time becomes more complicated as your photographic life gets complicated.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Time is the ultimate non-renewable resource that we have in our lives. In theory if we lose $100, we can easily earn another $100 down the line. But if we lose a year of our life, no matter how rich we are, we cannot buy another year of life.

    Life is a ticking death clock, with each day subtracting time from us. Once we’ve lost time we can never gain it back.

    Know that as a photographer your ultimate resource is time. It is ironic that a lot of people trade their time for money, where in actuality we should trade our money to have more time.

    As a thought experiment what would you prefer: to spend 3 months working and saving up money to buy a new camera? Or would you rather spend 3 months working and saving up money for a vacation so you don’t have to work for perhaps 6 months in southeast Asia?

    Many photographers complain that they don’t have enough time to shoot. It isn’t that we don’t have enough time but we just spend it wastefully. Instead of spending time going out to shoot during our lunch breaks, we sit in front of a computer to answer a few more (unimportant) emails. Instead of shooting after work, we rush home to watch Netflix. Instead of having a part time job that would give us more time to shoot, we put in extra hours in the office to earn a raise, to earn more money, and to buy more material things we don’t need.

    Assignment : What if you were to did tomorrow?

    To vividly imagine time as a ticking death clock, imagine if you were to die tomorrow. How would you live your life as a photographer differently today? What kind of extraneous things would you cut out of your schedule? Would you really watch that episode of Game of Thrones, read that gossip magazine, go to a networking event full of people you don’t really care about or waste time lusting after a camera you don’t really need?

    I can guarantee if you were to die tomorrow, you would spend your time more wisely to shoot what is important to you.

    Lesson #52: Stage your photos for a greater purpose

    “I don’t object to staging if and only if I feel that it is an intensification of something that is absolutely authentic to the place.” – W. Eugene Smith

    In photography (especially street photography) there is a general scorn against posing photos. Photos which are posed don’t feel as authentic or real. We romanticize candid and unposed moments.

    However ultimately photos are just reflections of light against a piece of paper. Photos don’t show any “truth” or ultimate “reality” of the world. Photos are just tools to communicate some sort of message or emotion to the viewer.

    W Eugene Smith was one of the most prolific and passionate photographers who have ever lived. He had no objections to posing images, as long as he felt that they intensified some sort of “authenticity” he perceived in a scene.

    Furthermore, Smith felt that arranging scenes wasn’t dishonest, as long as he personally felt that it was legitimate. He trusted his intuition and feelings, and his own ability to understand as he explains:

    “I ask and arrange if I feel it is legitimate. The honesty lies in my — the photographer’s — ability to understand.” – W. Eugene Smith

    Assignment : Direct your subject

    The next time you see a stranger on the streets with a certain emotion or mood you want to convey, ask them to pose for you in a certain way.

    For example, if you want them to look contemplative, ask them to put their finger on their chin and look down. If you want them to look hopeful, ask them to look up.

    Try to pose or stage the scene, and disregard the concept of “candidness.” A posed photograph, as long as it evokes some sort of genuine emotion is authentic.

    Lesson #53: Discover projects after you shoot

    “My obsession is with making photographs. I generally do not have a theme when in the act of photographing. Themes emerge after the photographs begin to accumulate. This happened in a clear way with my new book and exhibition Twirl / Run. For me picture taking is pure instinct. Gut. That is why I love doing it. I’m not thinking when I am working.” – Jeff Mermelstein

    Jeff Mermelstein is probably one of the most focused and intense contemporary street photographers. He has made several photography books, one of them titled “Twirl / Run”, which is a compilation of street photos he shot of women twirling their hair and of people running.

    Working on street photography projects can be very challenging if you have too rigid of a concept before you go out and shoot. This can make your mind rigid to new opportunities.

    So as an approach you can intentionally go out without a theme in mind. Then as time goes on you become to discover a theme as you go.

    Simply react to what you see, and then you can compile your projects or series later. Elliott Erwitt follows the same way of working and explains:

    “I don’t start out with any specific interests, I just react to what I see. I don’t know that I set out to take pictures of dogs; I have a lot of pictures of people and quite a few of cats. But dogs seem to be more sympathetic.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Elliott Erwitt has shot for many decades, and after compiling thousands of images, he discovers common threads and themes in his work. Now towards the later part of his life, he is compiling his images into books of certain subject matter and places.

    Helen Levitt, one of the pioneers of color street photography also rebelled against the notion of having a “project,” she simply photographed what she noticed:

    “I never had a ‘project.’ I would go out and shoot, follow my eyes—what they noticed, I tried to capture with my camera, for others to see.” – Helen Levitt

    Another way to discover what kinds of projects to pursue in your photography is to print out your photos and start sorting them into different boxes. Once the boxes start to fill up, you’ve got a project as Lee Friedlander explains:

    “I just work and I throw the pictures in a box that says “X” or whatever, and eventually if the box gets full it merits looking at. I often work on two or three or four of those things at once. People tell me that they all look like they’ve been well thought out, and that’s because I’ve worked on them for so long.” – Lee Friedlander

    Assignment : find a common theme or pattern in your work

    If you feel that you don’t have a direction or focus in your work, go to your entire catalogue of images and start to look for patterns or themes in your work.

    What you can do is look at all your photos, and start to categorize and apply tags to your images. Then after going through your body of work, you can start to count which tags or categories you have a lot of photos.

    This process might cause you to discover that there is a certain part of town you are really drawn to. Perhaps you will discover that the majority of the work you prefer is in color. Perhaps this can help you discover that you love taking “street portraits.”

    Also by analyzing your metadata in your catalogue of images, you can see which cameras, lenses, or focal lengths you use the most. If you find there is a certain camera and lens you use 90% of the time perhaps you should stick with it and be consistent with it.

    Lesson #54: Improve a little everyday

    “Without instruction, at a very early age, I could play the piano. Anything, particularly—after hearing it once. Not reading music. I would pass a quite fine piano in my house everytime we came from the back from the front—and everytime I would pass it I would play a few things, and without any success at all. And I got a little better and better, and time went on. And maybe never playing the same one twice. It aint much different the way I work today, still [in photography].” – William Eggleston

    It is easy to look at a body of work by an accomplished master photographer and feel that no matter how hard we work, we can never achieve as much as that photographer.

    But realize that the journey of a thousand steps begins with the first step. If you want to create a body of work in photography, you need to start off with a single photograph.

    If you want to improve your photography, just aim to become slightly a better photographer everyday. Simply aim to improve your photography by 1% everyday. You can improve your photography by taking more photos, studying master photographers, or analyzing photography books.

    By improving 1% everyday, you will see huge compounded interest in the course of a year.

    Great bodies of work take time. We need to be patient. Zen Master Hakuin explains below:

    “It’s like chopping down a huge tree of immense girth. You won’t accomplish it with one swing of your axe. If you keep chopping away at it, though, and do not let up, eventually, whether it wants to or not, it will suddenly topple down…But if the woodcutter stopped after one or two strokes of his axe to ask, ‘Why doesn’t this tree fall?’ and after three or four more strokes stopped again, ‘Why doesn’t this tree fall?’ he would never succeed in felling the tree. It is no different from someone who is practicing the Way.”

    Assignment: take at least 1 photograph everyday

    One thing I read about physical fitness is that it is hard to overcome the mental block of going to the gym everyday. What is a lot more realistic? Just doing 1 pushup everyday. When you go on the ground to do 1 pushup, you will find it is easy to do 5, 10, perhaps even 20 pushups. And if you aim to do at least 1 pushup everyday, in the course of just a month you can become quite fit.

    Similarly in your photography, aim to take just 1 photograph a day. Not every photograph you take everyday is going to be a good shot. But it is a good practice that keeps your eye sharp, and your trigger finger well greased and lubricated. And if you aim to just make 1 photo a day, that might lead you to making 5, 10, 20 or even more photos.

    Then compound that over the course of a week, a month, a year, and a decade, and before you know it, you will have an incredible body of work in photography.

    Lesson #55: Make something extraordinary from the ordinary

    “I think it’s exciting to make something extraordinary out of the banal. I’m not the kind of photographer that needs to travel to take pictures. I am not saying that there aren’t extraordinary images being made in Gaza and sometimes I wonder I should go to Gaza. But I’d probably get sick and be scared. I don’t want it. I’m comfortable, I’m not drawn to bullets. I’m not drawn to danger.” – Jeff Mermelstein

    One of the great things about street photography is that we don’t need to live in a super exotic or interesting place to make good photos. The beauty of street photography is to make powerful images from the ordinary and mundane.

    But what if you live in a really boring place, and you can’t see any beauty? Start off by taking photos of “ugly stuff”, as Rosa Eggleston (the wife of William Eggleston) shares:

    “Bill at one time said to his great, highly respected friend: ‘Well, what am I going to photograph? Everything here is so ugly.’ And our friend said, ‘Photograph the ugly stuff.’ Well we were surrounded everywhere by this plethora of shopping centers and ugly stuff. And that is really initially what he started photographing.”

    Then over the course of several decades, William Eggleston made an incredible body of work of pretty mundane and boring scenes. His city Memphis isn’t New York City, but he has really made his banal city beautiful.

    Photographer Joel Meyerowitz also agreed that the most beautiful art often comes from the ordinary of everyday life:

    “Why is it that the best poetry comes out of the most ordinary circumstances? You don’t have to have extreme beauty to write beautifully. You don’t have to have grand subject matter. I don’t need the Parthenon. This little dinky bungalow is my Parthenon. It has scale; it has color; it has presence; it is real: I’m not trying to work with grandeur. I’m trying to work with ordinariness. I’m trying to find what spirits me away. Ordinary things. – What did I say when I drove by those bungalows—something about the lives lived in them?” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Embrace the plain, boring, mundane. Don’t strive to create high-brow “art”. Just document ordinary things as a photographer:

    “Forty years ago when I was going around with a camera I was doing some things that I myself thought were too plain to be works of art. I began to wonder – I knew I was an artist or wanted to be one – but I was wondering whether I really was an artist. I was doing such ordinary things that I could feel the difference. But I didn’t have any support. Most people would look at those things and say, “Well, that’s nothing. What did you do that for? That’s just a wreck of a car or a wreck of a man. That’s nothing. That isn’t art.” They don’t say that anymore.” – Walker Evans

    Assignment : Make something ugly into something beautiful

    For this assignment, go out and intentionally look for ugly things to photograph. The uglier and more ordinary, the better.

    Now your job is to make that ugly thing interesting or beautiful. How could you do that? Perhaps wait until the light turns good (sunset). Maybe try to use a flash. Maybe try a diagonal composition. Perhaps try to get a good angle or try shooting it in black and white.

    When you realize you can turn the ugly, boring, and banal into beautiful and interesting photos, this will liberate you.

    Lesson #56: Don’t see your photos as art

    “I don’t think of my photos as works of art—I see them as a fraction of a second in which my understanding and the worlds offering are unified in some way. That allows us to have some sort of open experience to share with whoever happens to look at the photo. So it isn’t formal, it is more experiential.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Pretentiousness is what often blocks or obstructs many photographers. If you want to create more inspired images, don’t force yourself to create “art.” If you start thinking that your work has to be “Art” with a capital A, you will put unnecessary pressure on yourself, which can actually prevent you from creating beautiful photographs which can be considered as “art.”

    Also by not thinking of your work as art, you can be more open to experimentation and failing and tying out different things for fun.

    Assignment : Self depreciating humor

    If you feel too much pressure to create good images, give yourself some compassion through self depreciating humor (making fun of your own photos).

    Start referring to your images just as snapshots, and don’t take them too seriously. Don’t take yourself seriously either. Don’t call yourself a “photographer” or “artist.” Just consider yourself as somebody who is curious and fascinated with the world, and happens to like to make images.

    This mode of thinking will ultimately liberate you, and help you create more inspired “art” in the long run.

    Lesson #57: Constantly question yourself

    “It’s me asking myself: ‘How interesting is this medium? And how interesting can I make it for me? And, by the way, who the fuck am I?‘” – Joel Meyerowitz

    It can be painful to feel lost and confused in our photography. But don’t fret, this is absolutely normal. Even the master photographers constantly grapple with these questions.

    Photography is often a form of self discovery. And the more questions you ask yourself and the more you analyze your intentions in photography, the more you will grow, and the more you will become focused in your work.

    Joel Meyerowitz, who was one of the most influential pioneers in color photographs even admits that he hasn’t found the definitive answer for himself yet: “No, not yet [smiling], and time is running out. But I’m getting there.”

    Assignment: Everyday question yourself

    If you feel lost in your photography, and feel you don’t have direction or purpose, keep a journal in which you answer the prompt: “Why do I photograph?” on a daily basis. The more you self reflect, the more clarity you will give yourself and the more focus and meaning you will give your work.

    Lesson #58: Feel emotions in color

    “Color plays itself out along a richer band of feelings—more wavelengths, more radiance, more sensation. I wanted to se more and experience more feelings from a photograph, and I wanted bigger images that would describe things more fully, more cohesively. Slow-speed color film provided that.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Shooting color isn’t just purely for decorative purposes. Shooting color reveals a deeper psychological depth and emotions in a scene.

    Joel Meyerowitz explains the importance of how colors can evoke feelings, memories, and certain life experiences:

    “A color photograph gives you a chance to study and remember how things look and feel in color. It enables you to have feelings along the full wavelength of the spectrum, to retrieve emotions that were perhaps bred in you from infancy—from the warmth and pinkness of your mother’s breast, the loving brown of you puppy’s face, and the friendly yellow of your pudding. Color is always part of experience. Grass is green, not gray; flesh is color, not gray. Black and white is a very cultivated response.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Whether you decide to shoot color or black and white realize that you have control over your palette:

    “A photographer must choose a palette as painters choose theirs.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Joel Sternfeld, another pioneer in color photography also shares the challenge of color, which is how to abstract reality:

    “Black and white is abstract; color is not. Looking at a black and white photograph, you are already looking at a strange world. Color is the real world. The job of the color photographer is to provide some level of abstraction that can take the image out of the daily.” – Joel Sternfeld

    Assignment : Photograph a color and mood

    Colors are primarily split into two categories: warm and cool colors. Warm colors include red, yellow, orange, brown, and other colors that evokes warmth, sunsets, heat, passion, and love. Cool colors include blue, green, violet, which evokes the color of water, tranquility, peace, and nature.

    One of the strongest colors is red, as it mimics the color of blood. The color red psychologically draws us. We think about death, passion, life, fire and energy.

    So for this assignment choose a specific color you’re drawn to, but also think about the psychology of that color. What kind of emotions do that certain color provoke? Keep this in mind and shoot while trying to match the mood and colors of a scene.

    Lesson #59: Always have a camera with you

    “I carry [the 8×10 camera] with me as I would carry a 35mm camera. In the very beginning, if I went for a drive or to the A&P, the camera was in the back seat of the car; if I went for a walk down the street to visit a neighbor, or if I went to the beach, the camera was on my shoulder. No matter where I went, that camera was ever-present: parties, walks, shopping. It came from the discipline of carrying a 35mm at all times—in the early years you never saw me without a camera. I didn’t want to be in that position of saying, “Oh I saw a great shot, if only I had my camera.” At that time no photographer was without a camera. We got that from Henri Cartier-Bresson’s being ready for “the decisive moment,” and from Robert Frank’s traveling everywhere in America and making pictures of the Americans that seemed to occur in the most unexpected moments. Since my discipline was always to carry a camera, it didn’t matter that when the size changed it became big and awkward; I still wanted to have it at all times. So I provided myself with the opportunity of making large-scale, highly detailed photographs of unusual moments.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Have you ever seen a great potential photograph, but you didn’t have your camera with you? It has happened to all of us at least once.

    I think one of the best disciplines that a photographer can have is always have a camera with him or her. I don’t necessarily feel that a photographer must take a photograph everyday (unless you want to), but the peace of mind of always having a camera on you (just in case) is wonderful.

    Most people in the western world have smartphones, with more than capable cameras. So if you find yourself without your main camera, know you can always use your smartphone camera. It is better to shoot a scene with a smartphone camera than not take a photograph at all.

    Assignment : Always have your camera with you

    So as an assignment (or better yet, as a way of life), always have a camera with you. Bring your camera to the most mundane situations like going to the grocery store, going to the tax office, dropping off mail, visiting a friend for dinner.

    Bonus points if you always have your camera around your neck or hand. I find when I am physically holding a camera I see more photography opportunities.

    Lesson #60: Make books

    “Before I lay out a book, I read the pictures many many times, until I’ve absorbed the so-called meaning of each picture. My feeling about it – not intellectually, but my gut feeling about these pictures and how I relate to them, and then I just collect them all as miniatures, at three inches across, and I carry them with me like a deck of cards, and I lay them out, everytime I have a few minutes, I lay them out – I’m doing it now, for this next book – I lay them out and look and look, and then I’ll see something that looks like a starting point. So I’ll put that picture first, and then I’ll see what happens. What does it call, like magnetism, to itself? And what do these two call themselves, and what do these three call? Because it’s not just about the next picture, it’s the weight of the three of them in a row. Five of them in a row. Ten! I can set-up certain rhythms or cadences, so that when you get to the third or fourth picture, you begin to realize the first picture again, like, ‘oh yeah, the first and fourth are linked!’ And there are these links so that if you were to make a drawing of this book, if there were forty pictures – I could probably make a diagram that comes after the fact, not before the fact, that the first connects to the fourth and the tenth and on and on – and that there are these interconnections. It’d be a fun thing to do, actually!” – Joel Meyerowitz

    I feel that every photographer should aim to make at least 1 personally meaningful book in his or her lifetime. Why? A book can last decades, centuries, or perhaps even millenia (if well stored). A digital photograph on Instagram on your hard drive? Who knows how long that will be accessible (do you remember floppy or hard disks?)

    Also seeing your photos printed out in a book is a unique experience. It is a unique way of looking at your images which more tangible, real, and personal. Furthermore, a book allows you to pair, sequence, and arrange images in novel and flexible ways.

    You don’t need to get your books printed by some fancy publisher. Nowadays there are many great print on demand services like Blurb which give you high quality photo books without having to print 1,000s of them.

    So if you have no experience putting together a photography book, where do you start? You can start off by dissecting your favorite photography books from other photographers. Joel Meyerowitz gives some advice below:

    “You should take your favorite book and take it apart that way and see why it works that way. What is it about the rhythm of these pictures that make you see it as a book, rather than a collection of pictures. I think, too many photographers make books that are just collections of pictures. You could throw them together any way and they’d be alright. And there are other photographers that make books that are works of art, as a book.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    Lee Friedlander also shares the joy of the process of putting together books:

    “I like making books… I realise that the nature of photography is such that I can’t see everything on first look, because photography has this ability to deal so well with information. There’s so much information in a picture that often I don’t see until the fifth reading or 30 years later.I can pick up Walker’s book American Photographs today and see something I never saw before – and I’ve owned that book for over 30 years. So I think that books are a great medium for photography. They seem to be the best. I can go back and re-read things – ‘Oh shit, I didn’t see that before’.” – Lee Friedlander

    Assignment : make a “zine”

    Photography magazines or “zines” are rising in popularity. The concept that it is a printed collection of your images, that isn’t as expensive as a hardcover photography book. This makes it easier for you to print, distribute, at a fraction of the price of a traditional photography book.

    Start off by making a “zine” of around 15 images. Think of some sort of concept or theme and compile your images together.

    Experiment, have fun, and in the long run aspire to also make a “proper” photography book.

    Lesson #61: Create relationships in your frame

    “I believe that recognition and the power of the frame to put disparate, unrelated things together—suddenly this guy who was going on his business doing all this stuff and this woman with her poodle—they have no knowledge of each other. But in your frame, it is context.” – Joel Meyerowitz

    One way to make stronger images is to put together unrelated things into a frame, which create a sense of juxtaposition, contrast, and context.

    For example if you’re out shooting street photography and you identify one interesting thing going on, see if you can add another element of interest to make the frame more complex.

    Joel Meyerowitz continues on the point of making relationships in his photos:

    “I’m going to go on record here—when I think about my photographs, I understand that my interest all along has not been in identifying a singular thing. But in photographing the relationship between things. The unspoken relationships, the tacit relationship—all of these variables are there if you choose to see in this way. But if you choose to only make objects out of singular things you will end up shooting the arrow into the bull’s-eye all the time, and you will get copies of objects in space.”

    It us only through comparison, analogy, similarities, and differences can we create meaning. Without sadness we couldn’t have joy. Without dark we couldn’t have light. Without man we couldn’t have woman.

    Much of street photography is to also show the hidden drama of everyday life. So if you’re able to make photos that show this tension between happiness and sorrow, hope and despair, old age versus youth in a single frame, you’re connecting with the viewer. Also by capturing these relationships in your photos, you’re also acknowledging your own humanity, as Meyerowitz continues:

    “I didn’t want copies of objects—I wanted the ephemeral connections between unrelated things to vibrate. And if my pictures work at all, at their best—they are suggesting these tenuous relationships. And that fragility is what is so human about them. And I think its what is in the ‘romantic tradition’—it is a form of humanism that says we’re all part of this together. I’m not just a selector of objects.

    Assignment: Juxtapose two unrelated things in a single frame

    If you’re not familiar with the term “juxtaposition”, it is essentially a fancy word which means contrast. It is when you put two different things or concepts together (side by side) that directly contrast or contradict one another, yet there is some sort of relationship.

    For example a great juxtaposition in a photograph would include a young kid next to an old man, a tall person next to a short person, a person with a dark complexion next to a person with light complexion.

    So for this assignment put together two people in a single frame whom directly juxtapose one another. Sometimes this takes patience; you start off by identifying a single subject you find interesting, and you wait until someone else walks into the frame.

    Seek to find these juxtapositions and relationships in your frame to create and capture more of the human drama.

    Lesson #62: Pave your own path

    “I was enthralled by Eggleston, as everybody was. But I knew if I was ever to make a mark, I’d have to go to places he hadn’t headed. He owned the poetic snapshot, but I’d always had this leaning towards narrative, and so I began to lean a little harder.” – Joel Sternfeld

    When learning photography, it is always great to study the work of the masters. The masters have put in decades of work, and have dedicated their lives to photography and their craft.

    We can gain a lot of inspiration from them but we should consider us more of our guides, rather than trying to follow them blindly and duplicate them.

    For example when Joel Sternfeld started shooting, he was greatly inspired by the color photography of William Eggleston (as were many other photographers). But Sternfeld knew that if he wanted to make his mark in the world of photography, he needed to go down his own path and road.

    Assignment: Creatively Isolate yourself

    I think it is useful to study the theory and philosophy of photography from the masters, but only up to a certain point. If you want to truly find your voice, you need to isolate yourself for a while to really focus on your own work (without getting distracted by the work of others).

    So for this assignment, you’re going to intentionally creatively isolate yourself. For an entire month, don’t look at any other photos from other photographers, nor read their philosophies. Try abstain from consuming images on social media. Uninstall Instagram and Facebook from your phone for a month.

    For that month, try to create images without the outside influence of others. Of course all the accumulated inspirations of the past will seep into your work. But slowly try to isolate yourself during this month, and see what kind of work emerges from your work, organically and fluidly.

    Let your own voice emerge. It might start off as quiet but the more you shut up outside voices, the more you can hear it.

    Lesson #63: Learn where to stand (cut?)

    “The question of where to stand is interesting. What we’re really talking about is a vantage point. If you look at amateurs or people taking pictures, they do funny things. Most people obviously don’t know where to stand. They’re standing too close, they’re contorted.” – Lee Friedlander

    One of the lessons I learned from Magnum photographer David Hurn is that the two main things you control in photography is where to stand (your position) and when to click the shutter (your timing). Lee Friedlander shares the importance of your position, and knowing where to stand when hitting the shutter:

    “You don’t have to be a fancy photographer to learn where to stand. Basically you’re stuck with the frame and just like the person taking a picture of his family, who needs to go half a foot back – well, he doesn’t step half a foot back—but on the other hand, he knows where to be if he hits it right.” – Lee Friedlander

    You don’t need an expensive camera or equipment to know where to stand. Sometimes all you need to do to make a better photo is to take a step forward or backwards.

    Lesson #64: Stick with one camera for a long time

    “They’re humorous to watch, people who photograph, especially people who aren’t in tune with their equipment, because they don’t know when they pick it up what it will do. If you work with the same equipment for a very long time, you will get more in tune to what is possible. But within that there are still surprises. But using a camera day after day after day, within a framework, I’ll do the same thing. I’ll back up and I’ll go forward with my body.” – Lee Friedlander

    In today’s society we are plagued by the disease of “G.A.S” (Gear Acquisition Syndrome). The concept is that when we are dissatisfied with our photography (or don’t feel inspired), we wrongly believe that buying new cameras, lenses, or equipment will make us more creative or inspired.

    However in reality what ends up happening is that we waste our valuable money, flit from one camera system to the next, trying to find the “perfect” camera for our needs.

    The reality? No perfect camera exists. With every upside there is a downside. Not only that but because there are so many cameras out there, we never get really comfortable with one system.

    Personally it has taken me a long time before I settled down shooting with my film Leica and 35mm lens. Furthermore, I found the more cameras and lenses I owned the more stressed out I was. Before going out to shoot, I wouldn’t know which camera to use. I fell victim to “paralysis by analysis” and having too many choices hurt me.

    The solution? One camera and one lens. With only one camera and one lens, the benefit is there is no stress. You know exactly which camera and lens to take to shoot because you have no other options. This is another “creative constraint” that will help your vision as a photographer.

    Not only that, but when you stick with one camera and lens for a long time, you get to know the camera inside and out. You can change the controls of the camera without even thinking about it. You know all the buttons, dials, and how much to twist the focusing tab of your lens for a certain distance. You begin to worry less about technical settings and more about making the images you want.

    Assignment : One camera, one lens

    For this assignment you are to stick with one camera, one lens, and one film (or style of post processing if you shoot digital) for a year. If you own other cameras, either sell them, give them away, or lock them in a cupboard (give the key to someone you trust).

    You will find that you will have more consistent looking images, you will make fewer excuses in your photography, you will have less stress in your photography, and will ultimately make more photos.

    Lesson #65: Expect to be disappointed

    “It’s generally rather depressing to look at my contacts– one always has great expectations, and they’re not always fulfilled.” – Elliott Erwitt

    No matter how good you are in photography, expect to be disappointed. Even the masters of photography are often disappointed when they’re looking through their photos.

    “I hate looking at my work. I delay it for as long as possible… I just know that it won’t live up to my own expectations.” – David Alan Harvey

    But don’t be disappointed at being disappointed. Rather know that your disappointment comes from the fact that you have high expectations for yourself. If you had low expectations for yourself, you would never be disappointed.

    I think in photography it is important to have high expectations. If you set your mark high, even if you miss, you still achieve a higher caliber of work.

    However learning from your mistakes can be the best instructor, as David Hurn explains:

    “The contact sheet is a valuable instructor. Presumably, when a photographer releases the shutter, it is become he believes the image worthwhile. It rarely is. If the photographer is self-crucial, he can attempt to analyze the reasons for the gap between expectation and actuality. How does one think? Could the image be improved by moving backwards or forwards, by moving to the right or left? What would have been the result if the shutter were released a moment earlier or later? Ruthless examination of the contact sheet, whether one’s own or another’s , is one of the best teaching methods.” – David Hurn

    Assignment: Learn from your mistakes

    We learn more from our mistakes than our successes in photography. So don’t look at your failed photos with disappointment. Rather, look at your failed photographs as your most valuable teachers.

    When looking at your failed photos, ask yourself what didn’t work out. Were you too far away from your subject? Did you fail to fill the frame? Was the light poor? Did you not crouch enough? Should you have taken a step closer? Should you have taken a step to the left or right? Did you click the shutter a second too soon or late?

    As long as you keep learning from your mistakes, you are on your way to mastering your photography.

    Lesson #66: On digital vs film

    “The workload with digital has certainly doubled with fieldwork. You have now to photograph, edit and send your images on the same day. You go back to your car or hotel room to download, caption and transmit your work. It’s much more immediate and it becomes much more difficult to revisit the work.” – Paolo Pellegrin

    Digital photography is one of the greatest blessings in photography. It has helped democratize photography to the masses. With digital photography, we can learn a lot quicker from our mistakes.

    However there of course is downsides to digital photography. With digital photography, sometimes we feel too rushed to share our images. Other times, it is difficult to revisit our work after letting our images “marinate.” Digital photography can also cut out some of the collaborative process:

    “Digital photography can permit greater sharing in the field, but cuts out collectively at the other end. Fewer people share the whole process. It used to be that you sent raw film in and often the Magnum editorial or another photographer would take a look at the contacts.” – Susan Meiselas

    Not only that but the LCD screen is a blessing and a curse. One of the downsides of being able to see your images immediately is that you are given a false sense of certainty. Not seeing your photos on film made you work harder to get the image because the process was more uncertain:

    “I still think not knowing what you ‘have’ at the end of the day with film gives strength of the intensity when you work. It is a mystery and surprise. Now everyone spends more time looking at their screens, first on the camera and then the computer.” – Susan Meiselas

    Gilles Peress also shares how with digital it is harder to reflect at the end of the day after a full day of shooting:

    “With film you kept track in your head of what you were shooting, and evenings could be spent on a mental recap of the work you had made: the technical demands of digital editing in the field, at their worst, mean ‘less reflection, less intelligence, less thinking time‘. – Gilles Peress

    Assignment : Shoot film

    I think ultimately it doesn’t matter whether you shoot film or digital. There is not one “superior” format; they’re just different.

    But if you have never shot film before, try it out. Just buy the cheapest film camera you can buy, some cheap film, and go out and shoot 20 rolls, and get them developed and scanned some local lab (many pharmacies and drugstores still process color film).

    Reflect on how the process of shooting film is different from digital. Then ultimately take those lessons and apply it to your digital photography. Or perhaps you can just end up sticking with film (or shooting both film and digital).

    What you will find with film is that it will teach you patience, appreciation of images, the enjoyment of the slower process, and the excitement and joy of finally seeing your images after a long time.

    Lesson #67: Kill your babies

    “I am a tough editor of my work, and usually when I look at my contacts I find that I can go as many as fifty rolls without getting a good photo.” – Bruce Gilden

    Editing (choosing your best images) is one of the most important things in photography. The problem is nowadays “editing” is used interchangeably with “post processing.” So when many photographers say that they’re going to go home and “edit” their shots, what they really mean is that they’re going to go home and post-process their photos.

    What is the problem with this? The issue is that there is much more emphasis on post processing images (rather than having the discipline of choosing only your best photos). What ends up happening is that you think that post processing a so-so photo will suddenly make it better. But no amount of post processing can make a mediocre photo into a great photo.

    Know that photography is hard, especially street photography. Bruce Gilden admits that sometimes he has to shoot 50 rolls of film (1,800 images) before he gets a photo he likes.

    But choosing your best shots is one of the most difficult decisions, especially when we shoot many photos of the same scene. The difficulty is that ultimately, you can only choose one image to represent your vision:

    “It can be difficult to make a decision because you can like this frame for this reason, and that frame for that reason. Each photograph has its particular strength. But you only pick one. One has to represent all. So I am always trying to put everything into one image: the statement, the foundation, the composition, the story, the individual personality – all of that together into one image…” Leonard Freed

    So how do we best edit our photos? Part of it is following your gut:

    “Over three or four days I shot something like forty rolls of film. When I edit, I go for a gut, instinctual feeling. I started editing when I got the film back a day or two after I returned to the states. You are so aware of what you saw; the experiences that reflect in your mind. You don’ really forget the people and what they are going through. So I wanted to work on it immediately. Like anything else, when you’re trying to put down what you witnessed, you go for the pictures that speak to you.” – Eli Reed

    Another way is to edit your images is by listening to your heart and feelings:

    “When I look at a contact sheet, I try to remember the feeling I had when I took the frame. The memory of feeling helps me edit. Art for me is really simple. It’s when a feeling overcomes you and you convey your feeling with symbols. In photography the symbols are the thing itself.” – Larry Towell

    Sometimes when you’re looking through your images, there are some that simply “jump off the page”:

    “When I look at a contact sheet, I go in order from no 1 to no 36. I mark the ones I like, and unless something really jumps off the page at me, I go over them again to see which is the best one. With my personal work, I only print what I think is good. When something jumps off the page, it’s easy”. – Bruce Gilden

    Another practical piece of advice: ask yourself what you are trying to communicate through your photos, and what they are really about:

    “During the four years I spent making The Shipping Forecast I exposed nearly 1,200 rolls of film, which amounts to 14,000 individual pictures. Editing this down to a manageable number was a major exercise. I had advice from several people whose opinion I respected, but this only served to confuse me more. So instead I asked myself what the work was really about, and the answer was far clearer: it was about my childhood. In the end, The Shipping Forecast doesn’t depend on outstanding individual pictures, but instead on its collective strength.” – Mark Power

    It is often hard to edit your images just by yourself. Having outside opinions and advice can greatly help the process. Mary Ellen Mark trusts the opinions of those close to her:

    “Then I ask my husband or Teri who works for me in New York, to also look through the contact sheets and to pick the ones they like. It always helps to have an outside opinion. You are so close and so personally involved with your work, it’s hard to separate yourself from it and see it objectively.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Assignment: Kill your babies

    The problem with editing our own images is that we are often too emotionally attached to them. Sometimes the memory of taking certain shots is so vivid that we think a shot is good. We treat our images like our children, and if you know anyone with ugly children you know, we think all of our children are beautiful.

    But realize your photos aren’t your babies or children. They’re just photographs. So you need to learn how to “kill your babies.”

    There are many ways to kill your babies. You can first off ask people you trust to be brutally honest with you. You can show people certain shots you’re unsure of and simply ask them: “Keep or ditch?”, then ask them to explain why.

    You can also let your photos marinate and sit for a long time before looking at them. This makes you forget having taken the shot, so it’s almost like you’re killing someone else’s babies (which is always easier). Garry Winogrand famously wouldn’t process his photos for a year after he shot it to totally emotionally disconnect himself with his images, and to forget the photos he shot.

    You don’t have to wait an entire year, but I do advise for you to at least sit on your photos for a week before looking at them. This gives you enough distance with your photos which can help you make more objective decisions when editing your shots.

    Lesson #68: Milk the cow, a lot

    “Sometimes you need to milk the cow a lot to get a little bit of cheese.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    It is rare that you make a good photo. It is also rare that you find scenes that you find very interesting.

    If you happen to be lucky enough to stumble upon an interesting scene, learn to “work the scene” and take as many photos of the scene as humanly possible. Know that especially in street photography, once you see a scene, you will never see it again.

    There is a common misconception that Henri Cartier-Bresson (who coined “the decisive moment”) would only take one shot of a scene. In reality, he took many photos of a scene, and would select” the decisive moment” after the fact.

    Even if you shoot film, don’t feel bad shooting an entire roll for just one image, as Elliott Erwitt did for one of his most famous images of a bulldog sitting on a man’s lap:

    “I was out walking with my friend Hiroji Kubota around the corner from my studio on the upper west side of Manhattan, and i didn’t have my camera. I saw the situation and i said, “Could I borrow your camera?” And I borrowed his Leica. He was very generous and let me use it and I shot the whole roll of film on it.” [..] “Its a lot of pictures getting to the good one.” – Elliott Erwitt

    Assignment : The 1,000 photo challenge

    If you find yourself having a hard time to “work the scene” and you only typically shoot one or two photos of a scene, this assignment will help loosen your trigger finger.

    The idea is that in a day, you have to take at least 1,000 photos. Don’t just set your camera to burst mode and “spray and pray.” Rather, keep it in single shot mode and shoot intentionally, but a lot.

    I’m not saying you always have to shoot 1,000 photos a day, but rather this assignment will teach you to shoot more, and not be afraid to click the shutter more.

    Especially if you shoot digital, there is no downside to taking extra photos. The more you click the shutter the more likely you are to capture “the decisive moment.” Every time you click the shutter, it is like you are swinging the bat another time. As the more time you can swing the bat, the more likely you are to hit a home run.

    Lesson #69: Take photos for yourself

    “What was happening in Czechoslovakia concerned my life directly: it was my country, my problem. That’s what made the difference between me and the other photographers who came there from abroad. I was not a reporter. I didn’t know anything about photojournalism. I never photograph ‘news’. I photographed gypsies and theatre. Suddenly, for the first time in my life, I was confronted with that kind of situation, and I responded to it. I knew it was important to photograph, so I photographed. I took these pictures for myself, with no intention of publishing them”. – Josef Koudelka

    There are many photographers who make images hoping that they will get a lot of attention, acclaim, and “likes” on social media. But that is the wrong approach; you need to first start off by shooting for yourself.

    Shoot as if you will never show your photos to anybody. This will make your images much more authentic and personal:

    “Photograph because you love doing it, because you absolutely have to do it, because the chief reward is going to be the process of doing it. Other rewards — recognition, financial remuneration — come to so few and are so fleeting. And even if you are somewhat successful, there will almost inevitably be stretches of time when you will be ignored, have little income, or — often — both. Certainly there are many other easier ways to make a living in this society. Take photography on as a passion, not a career.” – Alex Webb

    Sometimes a lot of photographers pick up a camera as a hobby and because they love it. But then the idea of becoming a “professional” can taint their vision. Start off by taking photos for yourself; photos you care about. Then let everything follow as Christopher Anderson explains:

    “Forget about the profession of being a photographer. First be a photographer and maybe the profession will come after. Don’t be in a rush to make pay your rent with your camera. Jimi Hendrix didn’t decide on the career of professional musician before he learned to play guitar. No, he loved music and and created something beautiful and that THEN became a profession. Make the pictures you feel compelled to make and perhaps that will lead to a career. But if you try to make the career first, you will just make shitty pictures that you don’t care about.” – Christopher Anderson

    Only shoot photos what you feel like shooting, rather than what you think others will find interesting:

    “I think that I do what I feel like doing, which may not follow contemporary fashions but which comes spontaneously from the heart, the guts and the brain. To me, that’s what counts.“ – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment : Document your own life

    There is nobody who knows your life as intimately as you do.

    Sometimes it is hard to find a subject matter to document and photograph. So if you have no idea, just document your own life.

    Anders Petersen calls this “personal documentary”, that you photograph your own life instead of documenting the lives of others. This will open up a lot of doors for you, as you can photograph yourself (self portraits), your loved ones, and things you like to do.

    This way, photography becomes less of a forced project, and more of a lifestyle. You just take photos of your own life without stress and pressure.

    Take photos that you feel compelled to shoot for yourself. You are the ultimate filter in terms of knowing what you like and what you dislike.

    Disregard fame, attention and the concept of making “good photos.” Only by starting to please yourself that maybe one day you can also please others.

    Lesson #70: Photograph your own backyard

    “I just made my photos in Wilkes-Barre and a few other places because I wasn’t the kind of photographer who liked to, or needed to, travel around the world. That reminds me, I saw something you had said about how artistic range effects an artist’s development over time. And I work on an extremely narrow range, in terms of my method and technical issues, too. It’s what is in my head that has developed over time. So I’ve just kept taking pictures in the same two counties [Wilkes-Barre and Scranton].” – Mark Cohen

    It is always hard to shoot your own backyard. We become accustomed to our own neighborhood, and it is easy to become jaded.

    Mark Cohen is a great source of inspiration: he documented his own small town for several decades, and made interesting photographs. He didn’t need to be in NYC, Tokyo, or Paris. He made his own backyard his Paris.

    You can often find beauty in the most ordinary places, as Saul Leiter shares:

    “I never thought of the urban environment as isolating. I leave these speculations to others. It’s quite possible that my work represents a search for beauty in the most prosaic and ordinary places. One doesn’t have to be in some faraway dreamland in order to find beauty. I realize that the search for beauty is not highly popular these days. Agony, misery and wretchedness, now these are worth perusing.” – Saul Leiter

    Assignment: Shoot a boring place

    Find the most boring neighborhood in your city and try to make interesting photos there for a week. This will force you to think outside the box, and force you to work and see what can make a good photo.

    You will then discover your can make an interesting photograph regardless of where you are or live.

    Lesson #71: Make strong images that stand in their own

    “To be honest with you, I always try to think of the specific pictures. What’s important to me is to make strong, individual pictures. When I look at a documentary photographer or photojournalist whose work I really love- somebody like Eugene Smith-it’s because the images are single images. I think of his great picture stories as stories where the images really stood by themselves. In Life’s “Country Doctor,” for example, you remember each image. They weren’t only linking images -each one was strong, and each can stand alone. I think in great magazine or newspaper photography every picture can stand on its own; it doesn’t need the other pictures to support it to tell a story.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    One analogy I heard about writing is that instead of thinking of writing a “book”, try to write perfect paragraphs. Every time you write a perfect paragraph, you are making a pearl. And with enough pearls, you can connect them and make a beautiful pearl necklace.

    You can also apply the same thinking to your photos. Try to make each photograph into a perfect pearl. Make each photograph a strong one that can stand on its own, without any sort of caption or outside context.

    Also a strong single image is often universal, and can be appreciated by anybody, regardless of their culture, worldview, or age:

    “What I’m trying to do is make photographs that are universally understood, whether in China or Russia or America‑photographs that cross cultural lines. So if the project is about street performers, it touches those little things and whimsies we’re all interested in -animals and people and anthropomorphic qualities. If it’s about famine in Ethiopia, it’s about the human condition all over the world: It’s about people dying in the streets of New York as much as it’s about Ethiopia. I want my photographs to be about the basic emotions and feelings that we all experience.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Assignment : Can a child appreciate your photo?

    A test to see if you can make a strong single image: show it to a child. Print it and show it to a child (10 years old). See if the photo catches their attention, and if they’re interesting. Children don’t bullshit or try to spare your feelings. Not only that but they are averse to boredom.

    Another thing you can do: share your photos with a friend (who doesn’t know much about photography) and ask them which photos they find interesting. Even somebody who isn’t educated in photos or art can generally distinguish between an interesting and boring photo.

    Lesson #72: Make universal images (cut)

    “What I’m trying to do is make photographs that are universally understood, whether in China or Russia or America‑photographs that cross cultural lines. So if the project is about street performers, it touches those little things and whimsies we’re all interested in -animals and people and anthropomorphic qualities. If it’s about famine in Ethiopia, it’s about the human condition all over the world: It’s about people dying in the streets of New York as much as it’s about Ethiopia. I want my photographs to be about the basic emotions and feelings that we all experience.” – Mary Ellen Mark

    Lesson #73: Your photo either works or doesn’t work

    “What counts is the result. It works or it doesn’t work. You may think after you’ve taken a picture that you may have something. And then you find out that you don’t have anything, that you almost had something but that in fact, you pressed the button at the wrong time. That you took a lot of pictures, but you were on auto-pilot – that instead of waiting, you shot buckshot at it, so you missed the one that might really work.” – Richard Kalvar

    It is common we make photos that “almost” work. But ultimately, a photo either works or it doesn’t work. There is no need to beat around the bush.

    If you didn’t get the shot right in camera, don’t think that excessive cropping, vignette adding, making it black and white, hdr, selective color, or post processing can salvage the image.

    The process of making photos is important, but know at the end of the day, the result of the photograph is the most important. You can have the most interesting backstory in terms of how you shot a scene, but if the result of the photograph isn’t interesting, nobody will care.

    So learn to be honest with yourself and your images. Be sincere to yourself; ask yourself, “Does this shot work, or not?”

    I have generally found with my photographs, if I have to hesitate whether I think works or not, it doesn’t work. Also when editing my photos, if a photograph is a “maybe”, it doesn’t work. The good photos you take generally tend to be quite obvious.

    Assignment: Yes or no

    When you are editing your photos, ask yourself: does this photo work, yes or no? If you need to hesitate, ditch the shot immediately.

    Lesson #74: Abstract reality

    “In order for the mystery to work, you need abstraction from reality. Black and white is an additional abstraction, in addition to selective framing, to the freezing of the moment that in reality is a part of an infinite number of other moments (you have one moment and it never moves again; you can keep looking at the picture forever). The black and white is one more step away from reality. Color, for me, is realer, but less interesting.” – Richard Kalvar

    Regular reality is boring. What the viewer is interested in seeing is the abstraction of reality, not reality itself. So think to yourself, when you are making photos, what is the extra layer that makes the image interesting?

    So how can we make reality more surreal and abstract? You can start off by trying to “lie with reality”, as Richard Kalvar explains:

    “That’s part of the magic of photography. Look at a picture and you have no idea what was going on. The only thing you can know is what’s visually depicted, and we all know photographers lie. That’s where the fun comes in. To be able to tell a lie with “reality” is a very tough trick.” – Richard Kalvar

    You don’t want to make your photos too obvious. You want the viewer to work hard to come up with his or her own interpretation of reality. You do this by adding mystery and removing context from your images:

    “As a photographer if your photos are too obvious then you’re missing the point. Photos are about mystery, about not knowing, about dreams, and the more you know about that—then you can recognize them on the street.” – Jason Eskenazi

    Another approach you can have in street photography is to try to create “little dramas” in your frame. You want to create little mini-stories in your images, and you want them to stay open ended. You want the viewer to come up with their own interpretation of the scene:

    “I’m trying to create little dramas that lead people to think, to feel, to dream, to fantasize, to smile… It’s more than just catching beautiful moments; I want to fascinate, to hypnotize, to move my viewers. Making greater statements about the world is not my thing. I think there’s a coherence in the work that comes not from an overriding philosophy but from a consistent way of looking and feeling.”- Richard Kalvar

    Assignment: What is going on?

    For this assignment, you want to make your viewer confused. Make a photograph as abstract and confusing as you can. Show it to your subject, and you will know if you are successful if they tilt their head, curl their eyebrows, as if they had a big question mark above their head.

    Then to take it a step further, try to take photos of street scenes where you have the viewer say, “What the fuck is going on?”

    Lesson #75: Make little dramas (cut)

    “I’m trying to create little dramas that lead people to think, to feel, to dream, to fantasize, to smile… It’s more than just catching beautiful moments; I want to fascinate, to hypnotize, to move my viewers. Making greater statements about the world is not my thing. I think there’s a coherence in the work that comes not from an overriding philosophy but from a consistent way of looking and feeling.”- Richard Kalvar

    Lesson #76: Capture your own “decisive moments”

    “Sometimes it happens that you stall, delay, wait for something to happen. Sometimes you have the feeling that here are all the makings of a picture – except for just one thing that seems to be missing. But what one thing? Perhaps someone suddenly walks into your range of view. You follow his progress through the viewfinder. You wait and wait, and then finally you press the button – and you depart with the feeling (though you don’t know why) that you’ve really got something. Later, to substantiate this, you can take a print of this picture, trace it on the geometric figures which come up under analysis, and you’ll observe that, if the shutter was released at the decisive moment, you have instinctively fixed a geometric pattern without which the photograph would have been both formless and lifeless.” – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    When we are shooting images, we never fully know which moment will be “decisive.” But when we are shooting, we sometimes have a gut feeling or an intuition that a certain moment might be significant. At that moment, we must click the shutter.

    It is hard to know which moments are significant while we’re shooting, so we need to take a risk. Whenever you’re in doubt or think a moment might be interesting, don’t think too much. Just click the shutter.

    Henri Cartier-Bresson expands the concept of “the decisive moment” below:

    “To me, photography is the simultaneous recognition, in a fraction of a second, of the significance of an event as well as of a precise organization of forms which give that event its proper expression.”

    But which moment is “decisive” and which moment isn’t “decisive?” Ultimately, it is a judgement call. Every single moment which we think might be significant is personal:

    “Your decisive moment is not the same as mine, but most of us are looking for a moment that is necessary for what we’re trying to do. Unnecessary moments quickly become easy, common, and boring.” – Richard Kalvar

    Assignment: Shoot hand gestures

    Sometimes it is hard to identify a “decisive moment.” Generally for me, I think the most significant decisive moments are emotions, which are manifested through body language and gestures.

    So for this assignment, you aren’t allowed to shoot a person without a gesture. Go out for an entire day, and look for people with interesting hand gestures. Look for people covering their eyes, people with their hands on their hips, or scratching their head.

    Then think a step further: how do these gestures show certain emotions? Ponder this to yourself, as ultimately you are trying to capture emotions, not mere hand gestures.

    Lesson #77: Rules will set you free

    “I didn’t write the rules, but following them set me free.” – Richard Kalvar

    As artists we have a knee-jerk reaction against “rules.” We want to be open, free, and unlimited in our creativity.

    But know that often having rules can help us be more creative. Certain “rules” in photography include not cropping, not mixing color and black and white in a series, not posing your photos, n to use zoom lenses, and not applying gimmicky post-processing to your photos.

    However know that once again, these “rules” are simply “creative constraints.” Richard Kalvar followed a lot of the “rules” from Henri Cartier-Bresson, and first disdained them. But over time, he found out how these rules ended up helping his photography:

    “Sometimes it turns out that the things that you do for the wrong reasons turn out to be the right things to do anyway. In retrospect, I’m really glad that I decided not to crop, because that developed my compositional discipline and my ability to organize a picture instinctively, in the viewfinder. It also obliged me to work very close up to my subjects in order to fill my 35mm lens frame. I had to be a toreador, not a sniper. Also, I had the feeling of doing something difficult, getting the picture right in the first place; anyone could crop a picture and find something interesting, but doing it in the camera was special. These things were essential to my photographic development.” – Richard Kalvar

    So when you’re starting off any creative endeavor, you don’t want to have too many options. It is good to set these artificial boundaries and rules for yourself.

    Assignment: Create a rule for yourself

    It is harder to listen to rules of others; so try to make your own rules. Perhaps your rule can be that you’re not allowed to upload a photograph until you have let it “marinate” for a month. Perhaps it can that you’re not allowed to own more than one camera or lens. Or your rule can be that you’re not allowed to crop, shoot in black and white, or pose your subjects.

    Create some sort of rule for yourself, and listen to it for a year. As time goes on, start adding more rules to further constrain you.

    You will discover that in the end, it is rules and constraints which will set you free.

    Lesson #78: Experiment

    “I liked different lenses for different times. I am fond of the telephoto lens, as I am of the normal 50 mm lens. I had at one point a 150 mm lens and I was very fond it. I liked what it did. I experimented a lot. Sometimes I worked with a lens that I had when I might have preferred another lens. I think Picasso once said that he wanted to use green in a painting but since he didn’t have it he used red. Perfection is not something I admire. [Laughs]. A touch of confusion is a desirable ingredient.” – Saul Leiter

    Experimentation is what makes life exciting and fun. If you were to simply do the same thing everyday, life would quickly become boring and dull. Imagine eating the same one dish for the rest of your life. Imagine how quickly you would become bored with it.

    As artists and photographers, it is hard to balance the fine line between experimentation and consistency. However without experimentation, you will never be able to find your voice in photography, or what you enjoy.

    So have fun and experiment. Think of yourself like a scientist, and you can experiment with different approaches, subject-matter, cameras, lenses, films, styles of post processing, etc.

    But once you’ve found a certain experiment that works well, try to stick with it and see how deep you can go with it.

    Assignment: Try out different focal lengths

    Not every shoe fits the same foot. My suggestion is to experiment with different focal lengths and to find a focal length that suits your eye. For some people that is a 28mm, other a 35mm, others a 50mm, and others even a 200mm lens.

    Find out what works for you, and once you have discovered your ideal focal length, try to stick with it for a long time to continue to sharpen your vision and voice.

    Lesson #79: Disregard fame

    I’ve never been overwhelmed with a desire to become famous. It’s not that I didn’t want to have my work appreciated, but for some reason — maybe it’s because my father disapproved of almost everything I did — in some secret place in my being was a desire to avoid success.” – Saul Leiter

    Being famous in photography or life is overrated. Fame can often add unnecessary pressure, anxiety, and stress.

    Saul Leiter is one of the best examples of a great photographer who lived a happy, peaceful, and fulfilled life. Instead of trying to network all the time and try to get his photos seen in prestigious galleries, he preferred to simply sit and enjoy a nice cup of coffee:

    “My friend Henry [Wolf] once said that I had a talent for being indifferent to opportunities. He felt that I could have built more of a career, but instead I went home and drank coffee and looked out the window.” – Saul Leiter

    Also know that whether you become famous or not is out of your control. There are many famous artists in history who died penniless and without any fame, and were discovered after they died. Saul Leiter explains:

    “The cream does not always rise to the surface. The history of art is a history of great things neglected and ignored and bad and mediocre things being admired. As someone once said “life is unfair.” In the 19th Century someone was very lucky. He or she acquired a Vermeer for $ 12. There are always changes and revisions of the appreciation of art, artists, and photography and writers and on and on. The late art of Picasso is no good but then a revision takes place and then it becomes very good as the art records indicate. Things come and go.”

    With social media and today’s modern society, we crave attention. But there is often a great advantage of being ignored, that you can live more peacefully and live life according to your own principles:

    “I spent a great deal of my life being ignored. I was always very happy that way. Being ignored is a great privilege. That is how I think I learnt to see what others do not see and to react to situations differently. I simply looked at the world, not really prepared for anything.” – Saul Leiter

    Even if you become the world’s most famous photographer, there will still be people who don’t know or appreciate your work. Just focus on creating work for yourself, without the added pressure to please others:

    “I have a deep-seated distrust and even contempt for people who are driven by ambition to conquer the world … those who cannot control themselves and produce vast amounts of crap that no one cares about. I find it unattractive. I like the Zen artists: they’d do some work, and then they’d stop for a while.” – Saul Leiter

    Saul Leiter expands on not taking yourself or life too seriously:

    “In order to build a career and to be successful, one has to be determined. One has to be ambitious. I much prefer to drink coffee, listen to music and to paint when I feel like it… Maybe I was irresponsible. But part of the pleasure of being alive is that I didn’t take everything as seriously as one should.”

    Assignment: Create a secret social media profile

    For this assignment, create a social media account and intentionally make it hidden. Don’t try to get any followers, and only upload images to it that you like. Consider it a private diary and scrapbook. This will help you avoid the need for “likes” “followers” and other meaningless demarcations of fame or popularity. This will bring you more “zen” and peace to your photography and life.

    Lesson #80: Think long-term

    “I very much like to work on long-term projects. There is time for the photographer and the people in front of the camera to understand each other. There is time to go to a place and understand what is happening there. When you spend more time on a project, you learn to understand your subjects. There comes a time when it is not you who is taking the pictures. Something special happens between the photographer and the people he is photographing. He realizes that they are giving the pictures to him.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Everything great takes a long time. You can’t expect to become a master photographer overnight. A redwood tree needs decades, centuries, and sometimes even thousands of years to achieve their grandeur.

    Similarly, don’t feel so rushed in your photography to create great work overnight. Some of the best photographers in history need years, sometimes even decades to make a body of work they’re proud of.

    For example, Sebastiao Salgado shares the importance of spending a long time on a project, which really allows you to understand your subject matter deeper. Even though you might be tired and exhausted, you must keep peddling forward:

    “When I started Genesis I was 59 and I thought I was an old man,” he says. “But now I am going to be 70 and I feel fine so I am ready to start again. Life is a bicycle: you must keep going forward and you pedal until you drop.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Zoe Strauss also worked on her “I-95” project for nearly a decade. The effort of her work really shows, the images are powerful, cohesive, and tell a narrative:

    “I-95 was an epic narrative about the beauty and struggle of everyday life, comprising 231 photographs adhered to the concrete support pillars under an elevated highway that runs through South Philadelphia, Interstate 95. The installation of photos went up once a year, from 1pm to 4pm, on the first Sunday of the month. I worked on 95 for a decade, from 2000 to 2010.” – Zoe Strauss

    Why a full decade? Strauss explains:

    “A decade would allow me enough time to make a strong body of work. I needed to learn to make photographs and couldn’t gauge my capability until I actually started working. Setting a time constraint assured that the installation wouldn’t be overworked. Plus, I could go at it as hard as possible without fear of burning out.”

    The more time you can work on a project, the more photos you take, the more you have to push yourself creatively to make interesting images.

    Strauss also did something interesting: she set a time limit on how long she was allowed to work on her project. She figured a decade was enough time to work on her project, but didn’t dare work on it for longer than that.

    Another example: Richard Avedon worked on his epic project: “In the American West” for 6 full years. During that period of time, he photographed 752 people, exposed 17,000 sheets of 8×10 film, traveled to 17 states, 189 towns, and ultimately only showed 123 photos for his exhibition.

    Assignment: Think of a decade-long project

    With social media we think about our photography on a day-to-day basis. But think long-term, think years, or better yet; decades.

    What kind of photography project would you be passionate enough to work on for a decade? Write down some ideas, and commit to working on it for a decade. Stay consistent with one camera, one lens, film (or post processing), and aim that at the end of the decade, you will publish it into a book and as an exhibition.

    I feel it is better to create one epic body of work than dozens of mediocre projects. Give this project your entire life, focus, and soul. Then after you die, people will still be able to appreciate your body of work.

    Lesson #81: Create a relationship with your subjects

    “If you take a picture of a human that does not make him noble, there is no reason to take this picture. That is my way of seeing things.” – Sebastião Salgado

    One of the main problems in street photography is how shallow it can be. Through street photography, we are trying to build a connection with our fellow human beings. But often when we shoot candidly, we aren’t able to make that deeper connection.

    In these circumstances, I feel that it is important to try to build a human connection with your subjects.

    Many proponents of street photography day that street photography must be candid. It is true that sometimes the best street photos are candid. But also some of the best street photos involve the photographer getting intimate with his or her subject. By getting to know your subject, you connect with them on a deeper and emotional level, which might help you uncover some hidden truths about them, which might manifest in the photos that you take.

    Sebastiao Salgado is less of a “street photographer” and more of a documentary photographer, who photographs important socioeconomic and political issues all around the world. But one thing that we can learn about him as street photographers is his deep love of humanity.

    He doesn’t believe that making an image is just a one way process; rather, making a photograph is a collaboration between the subject and photographer. He explains below:

    “The picture is not made by the photographer, the picture is more good or less good in function of the relationship that you have with the people you photograph.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    To get your subjects to open up to you, you also need to open yourself up to your subject:

    “I tell a little bit of my life to them, and they tell a little of theirs to me. The picture itself is just the tip of the iceberg.” – Sebastiao Salgado

    Walker Evans also shares the importance of a photographer being able to be with other people, and to have your subjects feel comfortable:

    “Incidentally, part of a photographer’s gift should be with people. You can do some wonderful work if you know how to make people understand what you’re doing and feel all right about it, and you can do terrible work if you put them on the defense, which they all are at the beginning. You’ve got to take them off their defensive attitude and make them participate.” – Walker Evans

    Sometimes there will be moments where you won’t have time to make a deep connection with your subject. However one of the most important things are to create an emotional bond with your subject, by empathizing with them as Weegee shares:

    “When you find yourself beginning to feel a bond between yourself and the people you photograph, when you laugh and cry with their laughter and tears, you will know you are on the right track. ” – Weegee

    Assignment: Talk with a stranger for 10 minutes

    For this assignment, you are to approach a stranger you find interesting and you need to have a conversation with them for 10 minutes. You can approach a stranger at a cafe, bar, restaurant, park, or any other public place.

    Ask them where they’re from, how their day is going, and try to find some common ground for you to connect with them.

    Then at the end of the 10 minutes, tell them that you really valued your conversation with them and want to make a memory for yourself by making a few portraits of them. One lesson is that people are often much more relaxed and opened to being photographed if you first treat them as a human being (not just the subject of a photograph).

    Then if they say yes, make some portraits of them. If they say no, just remember that sometimes the conversation and human connection is more important than the photograph you make.

    Lesson #82: Don’t bore your viewer

    “Don’t take boring photos.” – Tony Ray-Jones

    One of the worst things you can do as a photographer is to bore your viewer. In today’s society we have very limited attention spans and if your work doesn’t instantly invite, captivate, or interest your viewer, you will fail to ever have an audience for your work.

    But how can you make your photos less boring? One piece of advice from Jason Eskenazi is to reveal something personal about yourself:

    “Ultimately any photo project that you do isn’t really about the subject matter, it is about you – and revealing yourself. If you don’t reveal anything about yourself, you are boring everyone. It is a confession in some ways.” – Jason Eskenazi

    So as a general rule, try not to bore your viewer. When you’re working on a photography project, share them with people who aren’t photographers and ask them which of your shots are boring, and which you should cut out.

    Ultimately what you find “interesting” is subjective to how you see the world. So start off by making shots that interest you. If you’re bored with your own work, good luck trying to find anybody else who isn’t bored with your work as well.

    Assignment : Shock and awe

    For this assignment try to create an image that will shock, provoke, and interest your viewer.

    In street photography, you can do this by shooting your subject really closely, using a flash, by photographing an interesting subject, or by intentionally cutting off limbs in a photograph.

    To see whether you have succeeded shocking your viewer, create a collection of 10 images and prepare them as prints or put them on a tablet or your smartphone. Put your “shocking” image somewhere in the middle. And once you land on that shocking image, judge the reaction of your viewer; whether their eyes popped up, if they leaned closer to the image to inspect it, or if they pause on the image and ask you about it.

    Don’t be boring.

    Lesson #83: Embrace your day job

    I know a lot of photographers who wish their full time profession was being a photographer. Or if they were rich, and didn’t have to work, and could simply travel the world and photograph all the time.

    However the reality is that sometimes having too much free time can be bad for your creativity. There is a benefit on having a “day job” as a photographer. Having a steady income allows you to buy photography books, film, attend workshops, travel, and not have to stress to make a living from your photograph.

    In fact, I know a lot of professional photographers who are so burnt out from commercial and wedding photography that they barely have energy or passion left to shoot what they really love, which is street photography.

    Some of the most famous street photographers in history have had normal “day jobs”, like Vivian Maier who worked as a nanny. The benefit of being a nanny was whenever she took her kids to the city, she brought her camera along and made photos. Not only that, but when she was off work, she could fully devote her time to making images, without having to worry about selling her photos or anything to survive.

    Walker Evans also had a job that gave him during the day, which didn’t pay much, but paid for his freedom:

    “I had a night job on Wall Street in order to be free in the daytime. It paid for room and food. You didn’t have to sleep or eat much. In those days I was rather ascetic.”

    Even Albert Einstein worked as a clerk at the Swiss patent office, doing menial labor while he came up with the theory of relativity. So why can you create a great body of work in photography, even with a normal job?

    Assignment : Write down the benefits of having a day job

    If you have a day job, count yourself blessed. Rather than bitching and moaning about how your day job holds back your creativity as a photographer, think about the benefits of having a day job as a photographer. Then write down all the benefits on a piece of paper and tape it to your cubicle wall.

    Another idea: try to find where you can make free time around your day job to do more shooting. Perhaps you can shoot for 30 minutes before work on the train, subway, or in your neighborhood before you go to work. If you drive, perhaps you can shoot photos while stuck in traffic (do this with caution).

    If you have a lunch break, devote that time to shoot your office neighborhood. If you don’t have people in your office area walking around, shoot urban landscapes, or just portraits of your Co workers.

    Don’t stay late after work sending more emails or sucking up to your boss, get out immediately at 6pm and go shooting where you want to go.

    Maximize your weekends for shooting. Devote holidays to shoot. Ask your boss if you can work part time to allow yourself more time to shoot.

    Find the little holes of time in your schedule and maximize it. There are no excuses, only photos to be made.

    Lesson #84: Don’t become married to your beliefs

    “A year ago I would have said that color is vulgar and should never be tried under any circumstances. It’s a paradox that I’m now associated with it and in fact I intend to come out with it seriously.” – Walker Evans

    In today’s society it is frowned upon to be a “flip-flopper” and to go back on previously stated beliefs you might have had. Not only that, but it is true that it is hard for old dogs to learn new tricks. Once we have a certain belief or way of thinking established in our minds, we don’t like to change our beliefs.

    But the secret of continuing to grow, evolve, and learn as a photographer is to not get married to your beliefs. It is important to stay open-minded to new ideas, approaches, and ways of working.

    For example, Walker Evans worked most of his career in black and white. He looked at color photography with disgust, horror, and suspicion. He went on the public record by calling color photography “vulgar.”

    Ironically enough, he started to be more interested in color when he started to shoot with an instant Polaroid camera. He then started to have fun and understand the benefits of shooting color. What I admire about Evans that he was able to admit that he was wrong, and changed his beliefs. Not many photographers or human beings can do that.

    Assignment: Find a counter-example to your beliefs

    Similarly, what are some other beliefs are you married to in photography, and can you find any counter arguments which contradict your belief?

    For example, there were many ideas I was married to in street photography. I used to believe that street photography had to be candid. What I discovered over time was that street photography often was great when you asked for permission. I used to think that a photographer should never crop his or her photos (the Henri Cartier-Bresson school of thinking). I soon learned that many master street photographers actually did crop their photos a lot? While I do believe in the philosophy of “one camera and one lens” in street photography, there are many other great photographers who have been able to make great images using lots of different cameras in their lifetime, Araki being a notable one.

    So write down some of what you believe to be “truths” in photography on a piece of paper, and try to find a counter example to any point you might believe in. You can start by going to Google and searching the opposite of what you believe in.

    This will help you open your mind to new possibilities and to know that there isn’t just one “right” way of doing anything. There are different approaches. Everyone has a different way of working. It is just a matter of finding out what works well for you.

    Lesson #85: You’re only as good as your last photo

    “Keep your eyes open. If you see anything, take it. Remember – you’re as good as your last picture. One day you’re hero, the next day you’re a bum.” – Weegee

    There’s a saying also for film directors that you’re only as good as your last movie. Once you reach a certain quality or bar in your photography, you don’t want to make future work which is worse than your old work. You want to continue to improve, and be judged based on your past work.

    Have a strong work ethic in your photography. Don’t be easily satisfied, try to make the best possible photos you can, judging yourself to your past work.

    The secret isn’t to judge yourself and your work compared to other photography. Rather, only judge yourself to the last photo you took. If you have a certain shot that you’re really proud of, make that photograph your new standard. Aim to make photos as good as that shot, if not better. This will help you continue to pave new ground in your photography, and take your work to the next level.

    Assignment : Only show your best 5 photos

    The common mistake that I see photographers make is that they don’t show their best work. They show too many of their so-so images.

    I believe if every photographer showed only their best 5 photos, they would look like amazing photographers.

    Imagine if you were to die, and you were only allowed to leave behind 5 photos to be remembered by. Which would those 5 photos be?

    Choose those 5 images, and make those your golden standard. Now try to build upon those 5 images with another 5 great images. Don’t stop until you die.

    Lesson #86: Shift the thinking of your viewer

    “In terms of art, there is a possibility to provide someone with an image that will cause them to have a shift in their thinking, not necessarily to change their thinking but the possibility to think about things in a slightly different way. I don’t think that is realistic all the time, but that’s what I work toward. It’s not always successful, but it’s what I am plugging away at.” – Zoe Strauss

    One of your jobs as a photographer and artist is to shift the thinking of your viewer. What you don’t want is for your images to be forgettable and make no impact on the viewer.

    What you want your photos to do is to emotionally impact your viewer and subtly shift how they see the world and reality.

    Think about what kind of meaning your photos have, and what you want your photos to say. Also think to yourself what you want your viewers to take away from your images. Do you want them to see and appreciate more or the beauty of everyday life? Or is there a certain social issue you want to expose them to through a photo series you make? Or do you want your subject to become more empathetic to the suffering of others?

    Assignment : do a documentary project

    For this assignment, think of a concept of an important social issue to you. Choose a project that will be easy for you to access, and also preferably close to where you live.

    Your assignment is to do a documentary project of this place. If you have no experience in documentary photography, don’t worry. Just go to that place every weekend for a month, and get to know that place very well. Make friends with the people who live or work in that area and ask if it is okay that you make photos of them. Then keep going back and making images.

    At the end of the month, edit it down to 10 images, and try to make a story of that place you documented. Try to evoke some sort of emotion through the shots, that will teach your viewer about the soul of the place you documented. Expose them to new ideas, a new place, or a new way of living.

    Don’t miss out on free book updates!

    I am currently working on a print edition of this book. If you would like to stay updated with the book, don’t miss out: Join the street photography newsletter.

    You can also continue to learn more about street photography on the blog.

  • On the Shortness of Life

    On the Shortness of Life

    18063833493_520947b5cd_c

    Read this article as a Google Doc (would love your comments/edits), download and print as a PDF, as an .epub (e-reader), or .mobi (for Kindle).

    I also recommend reading the original: “On the Shortness of Life” by Seneca (order the paperback on Amazon).

    “What you do today is important because you are exchanging a day of your life for it.” —Unknown

    Dear friend,

    Today I want to share something personal with you; for a guy who is so young (I am only 27 years old) I think about death a lot– nearly on a daily basis. Why? I used to have this fear and superstition that I would die young.

    I think this fear of death has given me the sense of “hustle” in my life, not to waste a precious minute of my time. After all, time is the ultimate non-renewable resource in our lives.

    I have a friend who just recently passed away. We were good friends in middle school and high school, having lots of fun playing Counterstrike, hanging out at PC cafes, talking random shit with the boys during lunch, going to the movies, having good laughs, and stuff like that. He was supremely intelligent, talented, and had a bright future ahead of him. He graduated top of the class in high school, and went off to UC Berkeley. Once in college, we didn’t speak much.

    About half a year ago, I heard from a friend that he had seizures– apparently he had some sort of brain tumor that was “under control.” At first when I heard this, I thought about how shitty his situation was. I felt horrible for him, but at the same time I knew that there was nothing I could do about it, but have empathy and pray for him.

    Fast-forward to a few months ago; I get the news that he suddenly died. He was 27 years old, the same age as me.

    We are dying daily

    Friend, we never know when we are going to die. I am only 27 years old, but who knows, I can get hit by a car tomorrow, I can find out that I have lung cancer (have spent time hanging around smokers my entire life), I can find out I have some rare heart condition, I can die in a plane crash, I might accidentally trip while looking at Google Maps, slip, and crack open my head, or (hopefully not) piss off someone from street photography that they stab me or something.

    There is a quote I read from Seneca’s “On the Shortness of Life” which really spoke to me:

    “What man can you show me who places any value on his time, who reckons the worth of each day, who understands that he is dying daily?” – Seneca

    We are dying daily. Time is the ultimate non-renewable resource.

    For example, we can lose $100 and always in the future gain another $100. But when we lose a year of our life, we can never “add” another year of our life (no matter how rich we are). Similarly, every hour we spend in the day is one less hour that we can live.

    I have a mental exercise: I pretend that every night I go to sleep it is the last day on earth that I have. I know some friends in their 70s, and one of their honest-to-God fears is that they won’t wake up the next morning. And when they wake up in the morning, they are excited, happy, and grateful; God has granted them another day to live.

    I try to apply the same philosophy. I try to treat everyday like it were my last. And when I wake up the next morning, it is simply a bonus– a gift from God. Now  whether you believe in “God” or any other supernatural power it doesn’t really matter — being grateful for life is one of the most valuable things in life.

    What is more valuable to you: time or money?

    We often make the worst tradeoff in life; we trade our time for money. Whereas in reality, it should be the opposite; we should trade our money for time.

    For example, will I trade 30 years of my life working in the corporate grind hoping to trade it for a retirement package, BMW, and white picket house? Fuck that. I want to live and enjoy my life to the fullest.

    Don’t get me wrong, I am a greedy and self-interested bastard. I love the security of money, and nothing makes me more excited than adding more 0’s to my bank account.

    But at the end of the day, I can’t take my bank account with  me when I die. No matter how expensive of a car I buy, it will all look shitty and outdated in a few decades.

    I want to tell you one of my vices; I love cars. I have always loved cars since I was young. Perhaps it was because I am an American, and we have such strong car culture. Or perhaps it is because I was addicted to the whole “rice rocket” fast and the furious  phenomenon. Regardless, I think us Americans waste a shitload of tie, money, and effort in trying to get a nice car. And what a useless “investment” that is. After all, according to the “hedonic treadmill” — enough is never enough.

    Let’s say I bought a BMW 3-series, I would get a huge rush of happiness for the first month or so. Then after a month, I get “used” to it. Then I am jealous of my neighbor who has the BMW 5-series. I then (after emptying out my bank account), “upgrade” to the 5-series. It is awesome for another month, then once again, I go to the baseline happiness (similar satisfaction when I had the 3-series). Then I see the friend with the 7-series, upgrade to that. Then you see the friend with the Maserati, the Bentley, the private jet, the private island, then the private spaceship to Mars. When is enough truly enough?

    I still am suckered by cars. I currently drive a 2010 Prius that was a gift from Cindy’s (very generous) sister. It is an awesome car, great on gas, and perfect for that “eco-hippie trendy, conscious citizen” image in Berkeley. But at the same time, I crave a sports car. I had a 1991 Sentra SE-R (modded it out) and a 1990 Miata in college (sister crashed the car). Now I look at envy with those with the Fiat Abarth (sweet little car), as well as the Ford Fiesta ST (even Jeremy Clarkson loves it). Sure these are pretty modest cars, but I know if I ever got them, I would want to upgrade to a BMW M3, than a Tesla, Ferrari– whatever.

    But a technique I have used to try to deter me from buying these material cars is this; I imagine how shitty the car and “outdated” it will look 20 years from now. And not only that, but at the end of the day, a car is just a metal box with 4 wheels that takes you from point “A” to point “B”. The only reason I ever crave a car is when I am bored or dissatisfied with my life, and I want more excitement. Because I am a sucker to advertising, I (wrongly) believe that buying a new car will fix my life’s problems. It never does.

    And a new car is damn expensive. Start at around $30,000 in most cases. But what else can you do with $30,000?

    You can go on 30 round-trip flights around the world. You can shoot 6,000 rolls of film. You can live for 30 months in a south-east Asian country (2.5 years). You can invest that money in yourself; to attend photography classes, to buy photobooks, and travel. Money can only buy you happiness, if you spend it on experiences, not gear.

    Sorry I got distracted, but realize that your time is so much more valuable than any dollar amount in your life.

    Think about death on a daily basis

    Don’t imagine you will live forever. The only two things certain in life; death and taxes. If you’re some Russian mafia tax-dodging boss (who lives cozily in Switzerland), maybe you can avoid the taxes. But death is the only certainty in life.

    Sorry to break it to you (spoiler alert), your mom will soon die, your father will soon die, your loved one will soon die, your friends and other family member will soon die, and you will soon die.

    Thinking about death constantly helps us savor life, and appreciate it.

    I learned this one tip from Marcus Aurelius in “The Meditations” — he says whenever you kiss your child to sleep, you silently tell him, “Good night my son, I love you, and know that you might one day die on accident. I cherish the time we have right now.”

    But isn’t that bad luck, bad karma? That is just superstition and nonsense.

    Another tip: every time you say goodbye to a friend or loved one, imagine it is the last time you will ever see them again. Because nothing is certain in life. So give them a genuine hug, and tell them how much you love and appreciate them. Then if they happen to pass away suddenly or get into a car accident (I had another friend who got killed by a drunk driver at the age of 16) it will not hit you by surprise.

    “Carpe diem” (seize the day)

    Time is the quickest fleeting thing. Imagine you were stranded in a desert island, thirsty, and famished. You have gone 2 days without water in the blazing sun (110+ degrees F or 40+ degrees C). You stumble upon a stream that is gushing with water. But you are informed that this stream will only gush out water for an hour. Would you sit around and let the water go to waste? Hell no, you will fill your stomach with as much water as humanly possible, and not let any drop go to waste.

    I think this is a good analogy to time. Time is like that stream of water; it is constantly flowing out, but sooner or later, it will cut out.

    I am a guy who has a humble goal in life; I just want to be happy. But what is “happiness” to me?

    To me, “happiness” is less of a pleasure-based thing. I  am not a hedonist. I don’t think happiness is eating 3-star Michelin meals everyday, driving a range-rover, living in a mansion, and fucking beautiful women. Rather, I prefer the Greek interpretation: “eudaimonia”, which means “human flourishing.”

    What is “human flourishing?” Well to me, it is on the top of Maslow’s “hierarchy of needs” — seeking “self actualization.” Which means using all of your talents, passions, and energy to create something meaningful that you can ultimately give back to society.

    “He who lives for himself is truly dead to others.” So my goal in life is to live for others; to help others find satisfaction and happiness in their life. To create information that empowers people and brings them joy. I want to build communities, and bring passionate (and lonely) people together. I don’t give a fuck about how many 0’s I have in my bank account, whether I have the fanciest new camera, whether I drive a fancy car, whether I have a bigass house. Just give me my espresso, free wi-fi, and some eggs (so I don’t starve to death) and I have all of my basic needs met.

    But going back to the point, I need to stick this piece of advice from Seneca to my desk:

    “Hold every hour in your grasp. Lay hold of to-day’s task, and you will not need to depend so much upon to-morrow’s. While we are postponing, life speeds by. Nothing is ours, except time.”

    So what is “today’s task” for me? It is to produce information, and to write these articles and letters for you. Tomorrow is uncertain; I don’t know whether I will still be alive or not. But I want to live everyday like it were my last.

    The only thing that pisses me off is if I can’t get any writing done. My only goal in life: to write a little bit everyday, and to contribute a little to the happiness and peace of mind of others. I want to help relieve the suffering of my friends and loved ones; whether that is through my writing, or the time I spend with them. One lesson from Tim Ferriss in his article, “‘Productivity’ Tricks for the Neurotic, Manic-Depressive, and Crazy (Like Me)” is just to block out the first 3 hours of your day to doing the task which brings you the most satisfaction. Once again, that for me is writing. I try not to ever make any appointments before noon. The morning is my sacred time to get writing done.

    “But what if I have a day job or office job, where I am forced to answer emails, and do shit for my boss? Not everybody can live a life of luxury like you Eric, where you have so much free time. You insensitive asshole.”

    Don’t get me wrong, I am extremely blessed to have the life that I do. But realize that me and you are in the same boat. I get tempted by doing bullshit admin work in the morning that doesn’t contribute to my happiness or feeling of “eudaimonia”.

    My advice is this: everyone can make 3 hours of “alone time” for them. It just comes down to the question; “How bad do you want it?” For me when I had an office job (and blogging was my passion), I intentionally got up about an hour or two early everyday to get a little bit of writing done before going into work. Sometimes I would be so in the “flow” of writing that I would actually get into work late and get yelled at my boss. But it was totally worth it.

    Honestly making time for yourself is easier than it may seem. Rather than downloading new “productivity” apps on your phone, rather than reading more “productivity” business books, or listening to podcasts, the secret to creating time is to cut out bullshit and “time-wasting” activities from your day. As Nassim Taleb calls it in his book “Antifragile”, the “via negativa” approach. That you add to your life by subtracting from your life.

    So if you want to find more time for your passion in life and photography, here are some things that I have personally subtracted from my life. Now I have a shitload of time to do what I am passionate about; which include writing, photography, reading, teaching, and spending time with loved ones.

    1.”Networking” meetings

    They never go anywhere. And honestly, the only reason that I ever network is for the hope of some future gain. I think a networking meeting will help me gain more future power, influence, fame, or money. But I don’t need any more money, fame, power, social media following, whatever. So why should I waste my time networking? I’d rather spend time with loves one that I truly care about; without some hope of future gain.

    It is great, Seneca (God I think I might change my middle name to his) gave some practical advice on how networking is a waste of time (incredible that not much has changed over the past 2,000 years):

    “How much time they waste ingratiating themselves with higher-ups or networking or legal matters. Of how many that very powerful friend (who you think is your friend but is just using you for the friends that you have, people he would like to know and perhaps keep in his retinue)?”

    I have to admit, I know some “influential” people and spend time with them (not because I truly enjoy their company), but I hope some sort of “future gain” — and the hope that one day that I need a favor from them, they will be in my back pocket. This is shallow, and I need to stop doing this bullshit.

    I also think that it is better to piss off and disappoint people for the greater good. After all this is the advice I often give myself (and ask myself): “Is this hour or two you spend with this person truly worthwhile, or would I be better off using this time to write an article that can potentially help thousands?”

    Of course I don’t have that same mentality when spending time with loved ones and friends. To me, any time spent with someone you truly love and care about is time well-spent.

    2.Media (blogs, television, video games, magazines, frivolous books)

    I haven’t watched television for the last 10 years. I used to be addicted to it; watching it as a teenager until 1-2am (Adult Swim). But once I got into college, I traded that time for playing video games. But my third year in college, I stopped video games cold turkey as well, because I literally didn’t have time (and had better things to do).

    I honestly think that TV is the biggest waste of time. Sure there are some TV shows on Netflix which are great and inspire. But 99% of it is trash to be honest. It is just like junk food.

    I feel bad for people who have this daily grind; wake up, go to work, come back home from work, watch 2 hours of netflix, and go to sleep, and then rinse and repeat their schedules.

    So many people complain they don’t have enough time to do what they want to do. Television watching is horrible because it is so damn passive. True happiness and having “leisure” time isn’t sitting on your ass on some beach and watching Netflix from your iPad. True “leisure” is being active, and doing something that you are passionate about– something that feels meaningful.

    If you subtracted 2 hours of Netflix or TV watching from your life, how could you better use that time? Perhaps that can help you sleep 2 hours earlier, so you can wake up at 5am instead of 7am to go to work. And from 5-7am you can use that time to shoot street photography (beautiful sunrise early morning shooting), you can use that time to meditate, to read, write for your blog or that novel you’ve always wanted to write, play an instrument (quietly), or any other passion you have in life. Perhaps you can go into the office 2 hours early (before anyone is there, and get some meaningful work done in the office, if that is what you feel is your passion and calling).

    I also think that 99.9% of blogs on the internet are just noise. I know I spew a lot of random noise on this blog too, so feel free to unfollow whenever.

    Honestly, all the greatest ideas and inspirations I have ever gotten were from books, never from blogs. Blogs are just distillations of ideas and information, most of that information is rooted in books. So go straight for the source.

    What do I have against blogs? My biggest problem; they are distracting, and breed dissatisfaction in our lives as well.

    For example, I (still) suffer from G.A.S. (gear acquisition syndrome). I love material possessions, and I always want the newest and greatest equipment or gadgets. Not only that, 99.9% of photo blogs on the internet are just trying to sell you cameras. I have a personal rule, never trust the opinion of a camera review or rumor blog if they have affiliate links (this includes this blog). After all, it is always in the blogger’s best interest to write great things about a camera (or at least downplay the negatives) because if you buy a camera through a blogger’s affiliate link, they will get a small percentage. The solution? First of all, realize you don’t need a new camera. If you really want a new camera, just test and try it out for yourself (rent it and try it out or simply buy it and return it before 30 days).

    Not only that, but I don’t trust any blogs that have display or banner ads. Why not? I do realize they need to make a living; but banner ads always tempt me to buy shit I don’t need. Everyone on the internet is trying to sell you something (even I have the hidden hope that you might attend one of my workshops one day). But I always try to remind myself: the purpose that I blog isn’t to have you attend my workshop. The workshops are a way for me to bring people together and build confidence; but the true purpose of my life is to produce these articles and information that will help the greatest amount of people.

    So as a challenge try this; don’t read any blogs for a month. Trust me, you will have so much more happiness and clarity of thought. And nobody is going to die. Sure you might miss out of the news of that new rumored camera coming out, or Justin Bieber getting into another drinking and driving episode. Rather than falling victim to “FOMO” (fear of missing out), embrace “JOMO” (joy of missing out).

    I used to play a shitload of video games as well growing up. I regret every minute spent on video games. Sure I made some “online” friends and joined “online communities”– but honestly at the end of the day, what good does having virtual gold on World of Warcraft contribute to society as a whole? Do you really need to spend another 100 hours “grinding away” killing monsters to get that treasured mystical sword that you can simply buy in a virtual store for $25? How much do you value your time? Okay if you are paraplegic and your only way of communication is living in second life; that is fine– but I also believe 99.9% of video game playing is a massive waste of time, I wish I told myself that earlier.

    3.Not giving a fuck of what others think of you

    I want to give fewer “fucks” in my life. The problem? I do give a big fuck about what others think about me.

    Because I give such a huge flying fuck about what others think of me, I work hard (and waste time) trying to craft a certain image of myself. I spend a lot of time trying to meet up people that I “should” meet (rather than people I “must” meet). I waste a lot of time worrying whether people are judging me in a positive or a negative way. I waste a lot of time lying on the bed, regretting some stupid shit I said earlier that was insensitive, that hurt someone’s feelings (on accident). I waste a lot of time on social media, trying to argue with trolls and haters that I am a good person and not just some narcissistic asshole.

    But if I want more time in my life, what do I need to do? Give no fucks, yes, NO fucks about what others think of me– whether positive or negative.

    Another lesson of wisdom from Seneca; do not be overjoyed from the compliments of others, nor overly depressed fro the criticisms of others. The secret is to have a steady stream of consciousness, where you are always feeling “pleasant”, mild, constant, unperturbed, and steady.

    This is the source of ultimate freedom.

    It took me a long time to realize this– that praise (and hate) are equally useless.

    Why is praise useless? Well, advice from Marcus Aurelius from “The Meditations” (paraphrased from my memory):

    “Does the vine need ‘praise’ when it produces grapes? Does the sun need ‘praise’ when it wakes up everyday (without fail) and shine its rays upon the earth? Does the horse need ‘praise’ for transporting our things for us? Does the emerald need ‘praise’ to be told that it is beautiful?”

    So why do I need “praise” for what I do? The reward is the act itself. If I clean the dishes and Cindy doesn’t mention it nor pat me on the back, why should this disturb me? I am cleaning the dishes because they need cleaning, not to get some sort of approval from Cindy.

    If I give a friend a hug and tell him/her how much I appreciate them, do I need them to say it back to me? Absolutely not, I am not telling them how much I love and appreciate them in order for them to mutually tell me the same.

    If I donate a dollar to a homeless person, do I need him to thank me? No, I am giving him a dollar to help him, not to feel like a “good” person. In-fact, the only way to be truly “generous” is to give to an ungrateful person (credit Nassim Taleb).

    Similarly, why do we care if others dislike us, hate on us, say negative things about us, gossip about us behind our backs, or judge us?

    For example, let’s say you took a photo of a stranger, and they told you: “Fuck you, you fucking pervert. Who gave you the fucking right to take a photo of me? I’m going to call the fucking police on you, you fucking asshole.”

    Of course this would bother you (it would bother me as well).

    But what are words? Words are just vibrations of sound in the air. It isn’t the words that hurt us, but our interpretation of the words which hurt us.

    A personal way I have been able to not take the hate and criticism of others? Take the piss out of myself.

    For example, once some negative troll left a comment on my blog and said: “Eric, your photos suck, you’re a scammer, you’re only ‘click baiting’ people to have them attend your shitty workshops, and you are only famous because you know how to game social media and add tags to improve your ‘SEO’”. Rather than saying, “fuck you” to this commenter, I said: “I also don’t fold my bed sheets in the morning, and I’m a horrible cook.” Another tip from Nassim Taleb: never take negative hate from anybody if they criticize you for more than one thing (it is superfluous to say that an author is a horrible writer and a bad cook).

    I will tell you another personal story of the real best way to deal with negative people; simply ignore them. Would people shout at a mirror? No way, it would just make them look (and feel like) an idiot. So embrace this “Taoist” philosophy and act like a mirror; don’t retain any negative feelings or emotions, just be still, and don’t respond.

    I remember when I was a kid, a lot of kids would bully me, make fun of me, call me a fag, gay, whatever. It would make me feel like shit, and then I would go home, feel sorry for myself, and then for the next day or so, think of clever ways that I could revenge them. In the shower I  would think of witty comebacks, or ways for my friends to go and beat him up.

    But once again, that is a massive waste of time and energy. Granted I didn’t know any better when I was a kid, but there are adults out there seeking revenge all the time. But according to Marcus Aurelius, his advice is this: “The best revenge is to be unlike him who performed the injury.”

    Think about all the time you’ve one wasted, feeling negative thoughts about someone, or plotting ways to get back at him or her. Think about the time you wasted how you could get “even.” But why not invest your time in more noble pursuits; like complimenting a friend, calling up a friend and telling them how much you appreciate their friendship? Or going out and making some beautiful photos that will make both you and your viewers happy?

    Another last point on not giving a fuck of what others think of me; I want to learn how to be okay with disappointing people.

    One of my character flaws is this; I want everybody to like me. And what causes me the most psychological pain is letting others down, not living up to the expectations of others, not spending enough time with them, etc.

    But honestly, I have a noble and grand mission in life to help society as a whole. So I need to learn that is okay to let some people down, and disappoint some people, for the greater good.

    For example, I might decline a meeting with somebody because  I want to use my time in the morning to write. I’m going to feel really guilty about it, but I need to stop caring about what they might judge me as. Because after all, “letting someone down” or “disappointing them” is just a mental construct that I have in my mind. Who knows, maybe the person that I disappointed will quickly forget feeling offended. This also means being less responsive with my emails, so I can be more productive as a writer.

    4.Not worrying about the future

    If I truly believed that I am “daily dying”, and that today might be the last day I have on earth, why do I concern myself with the future?

    What Seneca taught me is that only a foolish man thinks that he has a long life ahead of him, or can plain with “certainty” about the future. After all, it makes no sense to plan for “retirement” at age 65, if I am not 100% certain that I won’t get hit by a car or get some sort of rare cancer before then. Steve Jobs died at age 56 to cancer. He didn’t worry too much about the future; but what he did was live everyday like it were his last from his Stanford Commencement speech:

    “When I was 17, I read a quote that went something like: ‘If you live each day as if it was your last, some day you’ll most certainly be right.’ It made an impression on me, and since then, for the past 33 years, I have looked in the mirror every morning and asked myself: ‘If today were the last day of my life, would I want to do what I am about to do today?’ And whenever the answer has been ‘no’ for too many days in a row, I know I need to change something.”

    According to the Steve Jobs biography, when Steve Jobs realized that he had cancer, he put a huge emphasis on trying to squeeze the most out of each of his days on earth. He dedicated his entire heart, soul, and being into Apple; to create products that inspired people and contributed to humanity in some sort of way. And contribute he did, most of my best work has been done on Apple products (11’’ Macbook Air and iPad).

    I also recall another quote from Nassim Taleb from “Antifragile” which says; never plan a day in advance.

    I have a problem where I had too rigid schedules and todo lists for myself. I try to live in the future.

    For example, I will go to bed thinking to myself, “Oh, when I wake up in the morning, I am going to do “X”, “Y”, and “Z”. I’m going to wake up super early and get all this shit done.” Of course in reality, I wake up super late, and then I am upset and frustrated at myself. Or perhaps I wake up and I feel sick, and I am no longer able to do the work that I planned the night before.

    Another tip from Nassim Taleb; never plan an appointment with someone unless it is the day-of, because we always under-estimate how chaotic things will be in the future. They call this the “planning fallacy” (first proposed by proposed by Daniel Kahneman and Amos Tversky, read more in the excellent book, “Thinking Fast, and Slow”).

    Regarding the “planning fallacy”, think of the last time you had a project. You first told your boss it would take you a week; then it ended up taking two weeks, and you felt massively guilty. Remember the last time you were running late for a meeting or a dinner appointment with a friend. You text them and tell him: “Sorry, running 10 minutes late” and then you get stuck in traffic (for even longer), and show up 20 minutes late and feel massively guilty. This has happened to me so many times I can’t even count.

    The solution? Always add an approximate buffer of 25% of how long you think something will need. For example, when I am traveling and I think I need $200 for the week, I will get $250. If I think I need 50 rolls of film for a trip, I will bring 75 rolls. If I think I am running 10 minutes late to an appointment, I tell them I’m running 20 minutes late. If I think a book project will take me a year, I make that a year and 3 months.

    Sorry, I got slightly off-topic again. But the point; never worry about the future. You have no control over what the future brings. You only have control over the present moment. Like literally, this present moment. You have the power to think about positive things now, whether you want to go read a book, whether you want to go take some photos, whether you want to look at some photobooks, or whether you want to give a loved one a hug.

    So don’t waste time “planning” for the future, or worrying about the future.

    For example, I have sat down and made a “10-year plan”, trying to set goals and all these other benchmarks for myself. But that is a massive waste of time; who knows if I will still be alive 10 years from now?

    Similarly, I have often lied in bed worrying about the future– and losing sleep over it.

    I will share a personal story for you: Last year (2014) I was in London for about two weeks on my own. It was one of the most depressing times I’ve had in the last 5 years. Why? I rented an Airbnb room on my own, and Cindy had gone back home. I was alone, to think negative thoughts. I had a difficult time finding a dinner partner in London, so I would eat in the apartment alone. Publilius Syrus once wrote

    “Solitude is the mother of anxieties.

    Even though both of my workshops in London were sold out, I realized I had no workshops planned for 2015. I started to panic. I realized I had overdrawn money from my Paypal account, and I felt anxious without having “cash-flow” to my bank account. I started to “catastrophize” and imagine all these “worst-case” scenarios. I imagined that suddenly street photography would fade into obscurity, and nobody would ever attend one of my workshops again. I imagined myself being homeless, destitute, and alone. I imagined dying alone.

    Of course all of these thoughts were overly dramatic; but I wasted so much precious time worrying about my future– when in reality (looking back), everything turned out fine.

    And the truth of life and reality is that everything work out okay in the end.

    A method that I have discovered recently to avoid this anxious fear of the future is to think of the worst-case scenario.

    For me, honestly the worst-case scenario is that I go bankrupt, nobody in the world is interested in street photography, I end up moving in back with my Mom, and becoming an Uber driver. But what is so bad about that? I will have my mother’s delicious cooking, I will spend more time with her and family, and perhaps have a fun time driving my car and meeting new strangers as an Uber driver.

    I think the ultimate fear we all have of his death. But once again, we’re privileged to live in a society where all of our basic needs are met (food, water, shelter).

    So what are we afraid of? That we will have to sell our car? So what? We learn to take public transport, and appreciate being able to take a nap on the bus on the way from one place to another. Are we afraid that we will be homeless? You will be able to get (some) help from the government, so you won’t literally be sleeping on the streets. And if you can always find a friend or family member to stay with (at least for a month or few weeks). Are you afraid that everyone will hate you? Does the opinions of others physically hurt you? Of course not.

    5. Not doing more than one thing

    One of the best books I read was “Essentialism” (another good read being “The One Thing”). The concept in a nutshell: just focus on one noble task or mission in your life, and disregard everything else.

    So for you, if that is photography, focus only on photography. Disregard all your other hobbies (playing music, learning a new language, martial arts, whatever).

    I’m not saying that you shouldn’t have more than one hobby if that makes you happy. But if you want to truly become great at one thing, you can’t divide your attention. The rays of the sun is pleasant when it is spread over the earth. But if you focus the rays of the sun through a magnifying glass, you can burn holes through steel (think of a laser).

    Once again the master Seneca shares from “On the Shortness of Life”:

    “No single worthwhile goal can be successfully pursued by a man who is occupied with many tasks – lawyer, teacher, however – because the mind, when its focus is split, absorbs little in depth and rejects everything that is, so to speak, jammed into it.”

    So practical ways you can apply this to your photography:

    • Focus only on one project
    • Focus only on black and white (or only color)
    • Focus on using only one camera and lens
    • Focus only on one subject matter
    • Focus on shooting only one area or neighborhood
    • Focus on only studying one master photographer

    For me, I would rather be remembered for one great project in my life, than 20 mediocre projects. I would rather be remembered for one great shot, instead of 20 mediocre shots.

    If I could be remembered for one thing in terms of contribution to society as a whole, it is to spread the “open source” school of thought; that information should be open and free to empower people, not locked by “copyright” to be monetized and hoarded.

    Similar line of thought; Nassim Taleb calls it “Bergson’s Razor” in “Antifragile”; the concept that a philosopher shouldn’t be known for more than 1 main contribution to society. Similarly; all the nobel prize winners are generally known for only 1 main contribution.

    Think about the greats in history: Einstein and the Theory of Relativity, Edison and the light bulb, Obama being the first black president, Steve Jobs and the iPhone, Henri Cartier-Bresson and the concept of “The Decisive Moment”, Henri Ford and the automobile, etc.

    So realize that you are dying daily, and you only have a limited time on the earth. But if you are single-minded in your life’s purpose, and give it all your energy, time, and attention, and soul– you can still live a long and meaningful life.

    For example, I mentioned earlier that my friend passed away at 27. That fucking sucks, but at the same time; if his parents were told that he would die at age 5, and he lived to 27, what would you say about the length of his life? You would say that he was blessed to live to 27, would you not?

    Similarly, someone who lives to 80 years old, or even 100 is a “long life” by most standards. But there is a difference between “living long” and “existing” long, as Seneca says:

    “A grey-haired wrinkled man has not necessarily lived long. More accurately he has existed long.”

    Once again, what is the difference between “living” and “existing”? The difference is this; living is to use everyday like it were your last, trying to do everything in your greatest power to make a meaningful contribution to society. “Existing long” is to simply dwell for a long period of time on earth before dying.

    Some people tell me, “Eric, doesn’t thinking about death make you depressed, and lose motivation?”

    Hell no; I appreciate life a hell of a lot more because I know that one day I would die.

    For example, have you ever lost your wallet, and “miraculously” found it under your car seat or in-between the sofa? Think about the extreme joy that gives you. You don’t know how much you appreciate something until you lose it.

    Similarly, you don’t know how much you appreciate your loved ones, until they die (or someone else close to you dies).

    The death of close friends and family have caused me to be more appreciative of my life, and the life of other loved ones in my life.

    6. Don’t delay gratification

    We are often taught that we should delay gratification as long as we can. There are a lot of psychological studies which show that those who are able to delay gratification end up becoming more wealthy, healthy, and well-rounded (look at the “Stanford marshmallow experiment”). The concept was this:

    “In these studies, a child was offered a choice between one small reward provided immediately or two small rewards if they waited for a short period, approximately 15 minutes, during which the tester left the room and then returned. (The reward was sometimes a marshmallow, but often a cookie or a pretzel.) In follow-up studies, the researchers found that children who were able to wait longer for the preferred rewards tended to have better life outcomes, as measured by SAT scores,[2] educational attainment, body mass index (BMI), and other life measures.”

    Part of it is the “puritan work ethic” of Americans, and the Protestant/Christian notion that if we work hard in this life, we will enjoy the fruits of our labor later in our life (or after we die).

    But the problem is that many of us waste our times getting ready to live. We live for tomorrow, rather than for today.

    Think of all the people you know who say, I will work hard for 40 years, and one day retire at age 65, and have a comfortable retirement package, and then finally travel the world.

    Problem? What if you die at age 64? Then all those years were wasted in vain.

    A story I thought of; There was once a married couple that planned their entire life to travel the world. They were both super frugal, never went out, and never enjoyed themselves; thinking that once they retired, they could finally “start living.”

    Sadly, one they both turned their mid 60’s and were able to retire, the wife suddenly died of a heart attack. How sad, they should have spent their days living it to their fullest, and not banking all of their happiness on the future.

    Seneca gives great advice:

    The greatest obstacle to living a full life is having expectations, delaying gratification based on what might happen tomorrow which squanders today.”

    Now don’t misconstrue this as living a “YOLO” (you only live once) lifestyle. Don’t just go out get drunk, do drugs and have sex with strangers, and live irresponsibly. Rather, think of how you can be happy today; rather than happy tomorrow.

    I know a lot of photographers who have a dream of traveling the world, or going to Paris, Tokyo, wherever. But they spend their lives in a fantasy world, not being able to enjoy the opportunity to shoot their own backyard.

    Or I know photographers who have great ideas for photographic projects, but they get so swept up in the details and the concept, that they don’t actually go out and shoot it.

    So don’t delay your gratification creatively; live today. Think about the one small step forward you can make to make your photographic vision and project possible.

    Not only that, but think of what you can do to be happy, at this present moment. Perhaps that is counting your blessings, calling up a dear friend, going out to take photos, taking photos of what is right next to you, or jotting down project ideas, or starting to edit some of your images.

    Another practical way to live life (also from Seneca), which is to live your life, a minute at a time:

    “The present offers one day at a time, divided into minutes.

    So the next time you feel dissatisfied, lost, or curious– ask yourself, “What can I do for the next minute which will help advance my goals and happiness in life?”

    7. Don’t waste time seeking more

    “A man is never satisfied.” – Seneca

    What true words; enough is never enough. We never have enough money, enough power, enough prestige, enough friends, influence, cars, homes, cameras, lenses, gadgets, watches, bags (I have so many camera bags its ridiculous), “time-saving” appliances, social media followers, clothes, jewelry, purses, shoes, books, souvenirs, and of course– we never have enough time.

    But if we cut out all this materialistic bullshit from our lives, imagine how much extra time we would have. Why? Because the less money (and time online shopping) we spend, the more money (and time) we will have to do things we truly love; things that bring us true happiness and joy.

    Even 2,000 years ago– materialism ran rampant (in ancient Rome). Seneca shares how people towards the end of their lives often regret living a life of luxury and materialism:

    “They cry out that they have been fools, because they never really lived, and vow to live a true life if spared from their disease. Too late they realize what time they wasted pursuing worthless things, and how so much hard work seeking happiness from materialism was in vain.”

    Seneca also really looks down upon luxury:

    “Expensive vices fuel their blissful ignorance. Such a life of luxurious despair is beneath human dignity.”

    I’m a materialistic, shallow, self-serving American. I love my materialistic shit. My Leica makes me feel important, special, and “artsy.” My iPad makes me feel more creative. My Prius makes me feel eco-friendly and environmentally conscious (which is absolute bullshit). My love of “third wave” hipster espresso makes me feel important, informed, and sophisticated. The Nike’s I wear make me feel more confident and fashionable when I walk around town. My Lindberg glasses make me feel sophisticated and low-key, because only “true glasses connoisseurs” know the brand. I wear my North jackets with pride; knowing I have the ultimate in water and cold repellant, while still being functional/fashionable. I have far too much useless and superfluous knowledge about designer watches, sports cars, fashion brands, and sunglasses.

    I want to cleanse and purge myself of all this materialistic bullshit. I am a sucker for advertising, and I have been bombarded by it my entire life. But how do I break free from it?

    What has worked well for me is to avoid shopping areas at all costs.

    For example, I live close 4th street, a trendy high-end place in Berkeley, where old rich white people go to buy designer furniture and drink expensive coffee (ironically at Artis coffee, where I spend all my time in Berkeley with my homie Walter and others). Anyways, there is an Apple store on the end of the street. Without fail, I always go there, and am suckered into having a craving or a desire to buy something new. I see the new 27’’ iMac Retina, and I daydream of all the creative opportunities it will give me. I see the new (slightly lighter) iPad Air 2, and imagine myself pretending to be artsy at a cafe, with the golden back, sketching “important” ideas with my fingertip. I see the 15’’ Macbook Pro, and imagine what I would do with all that processing power, and how many more YouTube videos I can produce.

    The solution I need to do is avoid entering the Apple store (at all costs). That little 5 minute journey into the store might give me a week-worth of craving for expensive electronics (I don’t really need). I also try to remind myself how quickly electronics get outdated (look at a 4-year old iPad or iPhone and it looks like it is from a prehistoric time). But then remember when the original iPhone came out, how futuristic everyone thought it was.

    I am also a sucker for clothes. Whenever I enter a mall, I will somehow wander into UNIQLO or some hipster boutique (with $200 flannel shirts). I see these advertisements that sucker me into thinking that once I buy those expensive clothes, I will be more creative, artsy, and important.

    For example, Cindy’s younger sister works at the mall– and whenever we would go to pick her up, I would always happen to buy something at the mall (I didn’t need, and promptly returned the next day). Do I really need  new clothes? No, the purpose of clothing is to keep me warm from the cold, nothing else. Fuck fashion, nobody gives a shit of how I look (except my insecure self-ego).

    Enough is never enough for any of us.

    Even if we do achieve some success in life, Seneca reminds us:

    ”Hope begets more hope, ambition more ambition.”

    Furthermore, Seneca also tells us:

    “The higher up you go, the greater the fall.”

    Even though I have achieved some moderate “success” in my life; having done exhibitions with Leica and Fujifilm. Also having shown my work in Melbourne, Downtown LA, Dubai, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Paris, Seoul, Cambodia. I’ve been interviewed for VICE, the BBC, Leica, Petapixel, Salon, The Candid Frame, and had work featured in Black and White Magazine and Popular Photography. I’ve done commercial work with Ford, Leica, Fujifilm, Ricoh, Olympus, Samsung, and I have also traveled to most of the big cities all around the world. I make my full-time living traveling and teaching workshops, and rubbing shoulders with other famous photographers.

    Yet it is never enough.

    I am still so jealous of those who are more famous and influential than me. I am jealous of Zack Arias, and the amount of influence and following that he has. I am jealous of Ming Thein, who is smarter than I am, and seems to make more money than I do. I am jealous of Steve Huff, who has more influence than me and a larger and more engaged community. I am jealous of Matt Stuart who is having his work featured all around the world with Leica. There are tons more people I am jealous of, not enough room here to include.

    “As soon as we have some success, we seek more.” – Seneca

    What is the solution to all of this? I need to learn how to be satisfied with what I have. I need to desire the life I already live, rather than looking up at those higher up on the mountain than me, hoping that  I was where they currently are.

    I need to stop bitching and moaning, comparing myself to others. I need to not compare myself with anybody; because my life situation is different from them. My circumstances, and my abilities are different from them. And no matter how rich, successful, handsome, or beautiful someone is– there is always someone else they are jealous of (or comparing themselves to).

    What is the problem of being jealous and coveting what others have?

    Once again to tie it back, it is a waste of time. Why should I be jealous — and waste my precious energy and time desiring the life that they have? Rather than sitting and plotting on how I can gain more money, power, and prestige; I need to look inwards and see how I can be use my (very short) time on Earth to make a difference.

    So how do we find more gratitude in our lives?

    One thing that has helped me; imagine myself from 5 years ago, and how much I would desire the life I currently live. My good friend (and manager) Neil Ta wrote this in a recent essay, “On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer.”

    So I reflect and appreciate how far I have come. Even taking it a step further back; I reflect on how grateful I am to have the life I have now.

    I came from humble backgrounds; single mom with 3-part time jobs (cleaning houses, cashier, waitress), and not knowing whether the rent would be paid (it didn’t help that my dad didn’t work ever since I was 2 years old, or how he gambled away our rent money). I think about the fear that I had that we would be homeless the next month (a lot of stress for a 12 year old kid). I remember how frightened I was when I saw my parents fight, both physically and verbally. I remember how afraid I was when I would lock myself in my room, wishing that my parents would have money, and we could all live as happy family.

    I know this is cheesy and repetitive; but I think true happiness is to be happy regardless of your external circumstances. It is to be grateful for what you have, to be grateful for how far you’ve come, and how good your life is in comparison to the lives of others.

    Also another tip; imagine life as a race, and even though you see others ahead of you, you must turn back and look at all of those behind you. We all know the cliche; think of the starving kids in Africa. But at the same time think about all the people in America (or the West) that would envy your nice camera, smartphone, car, home, income, and lifestyle.

    I also try to remind myself whenever I bitch and moan about my “problems” in life, it is just a “first world problem.”

    Another embarrassing story; you don’t know how much time I wasted and anguished over whether I should buy an iPhone 6, iPhone 6 plus, Galaxy S6, or Galaxy Note 4. I seriously lost sleep over this. Eventually I got lucky; Samsung gave me a free Galaxy S6, and even after getting it; I would still envy my friends who had iPhone 6’s and 6 plus’s. Sometimes I need to slap myself in the face.

    My next experiment when I go back to Berkeley is this; trying to go a week without a smartphone. While traveling I have had this experiment; trying to uninstall an app a day. The other day I uninstalled Instagram and email from my phone. And wow, how much clarity of thought and happiness this has brought me. When traveling I only need a smartphone for Whatsapp and Google Maps; everything else is extraneous. Honestly, I probably can even do without those applications (but it is a luxury I enjoy).

    What I want to change back home

    So I want to practice what I preach; when I get home, I want to try to go a year without accumulating any more physical possessions. The only thing I might buy is a new laptop or computer; but I might see if I can just get by using my iPad and a keyboard. I will try not to buy any new clothes. I will try not to buy any more books (rather, enjoy the books I already own, and donate the ones I no longer read, or books that others would use better than I would).

    I don’t want to have any desires for any more materialistic crap, and spend more time with friends, family, loved ones, to shoot without concern about external recognition, to not desire a new camera or equipment, a new car, new electronic devices. I want to be perfectly content with what I have, count my blessings, and appreciate what I already have. Even more so; to cut down and edit down my life (giving away more of my possessions).

    I also want to eradicate the desire of wanting to be in a place other than Berkeley, of wanting more money, or wanting more comfort, of wanting to try out new restaurants, or to fall victim to any vices.

    Remember friend, death is approaching, one day at a time.

    Life isn’t short if we savor every minute of it, and live it to the fullest.

    Farewell.

    Your friend,

    Eric

    Written @ cafe in Stockholm. Aug 27, 2015 @ 3:14pm. After drinking an espresso (Nespresso), earl grey tea (with foamed almond milk), a long espresso (Espresso, with foamed almond milk), and a soy cappuccino at Cafe.

    My workspace at ilcafe, just when I finished writing this essay!
    My workspace at ilcafe, just when I finished writing this essay!

    Some life updates:

    The good news is that it looks like perhaps this weird throat-swelling thing was because espresso by itself is quite acidic, and caused some sort of acid-reflux that caused my throat to block up a bit. It seems adding some sort of “base” like almond milk (I’m lactose intolerant) has caused this to go away. I prefer espresso, but whatever– caffeine is caffeine.

    I’m excited to visit my friend Mattias for dinner tonight with his family, and also to start my workshop in Stockholm tomorrow evening! Also super excited to almost be back home to Cindy, I miss her dearly. Flying back to Berkeley on Tuesday.

  • On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer (and the Worst Sony A7R II Review Ever)

    On Feeling Inadequate as a Photographer (and the Worst Sony A7R II Review Ever)

    A7R Test-11

    This article is written by Neil Ta, originally posted here. The views posted here are his and his alone and may or may not be shared by Eric or any other contributors to the website.

    My life is pretty good. I live in one of the coolest cities in the world, I have a lot of close friends, good family, an amazing girlfriend who loves me, and I’m beginning to think my photography business is sustainable after almost five years of hard work. I’m happier now than I have been for most of my life. But here’s the reality: I am just a blue collar photographer. I hustle my ass off to take photographs for people. If I don’t take photos, I don’t make money, I can’t pay my rent, and I end up homeless and get forced into a job as a fake pan-handling monk. I will likely never amass great riches from photography. And I’m ok with that, I think.

    Recently, I’ve been running into friends who’ve done really well for themselves. A friend still in his 20’s whose tech start-up is worth hundreds of millions of dollars, a close childhood friend who bought a new Porsche 911, several others who run successful businesses or are directors or VPs of large corporations, and everyone who seems to be living in a home larger than 400 square feet (that isn’t packed to the brim with camera equipment). In the photography world, I have friends who are massive industry icons with hefty social media presences. In comparison, I am a virtual nobody. At times, I can feel inadequate compared to them.

    A7R Test-7

    Don’t get me wrong, I’m incredibly proud of my friends’ achievements. They’ve worked extremely hard in order to get where they are. My jealousy is more a reflection of my own insecurities and life choices. So why is it that despite me being happier than I ever have been in my life do I still feel overwhelmed by the successes of others? I wanted to dive into this a little bit more, so I put pen to paper to help try to make sense of it and to find a solution. Here are some of the strategies I’ve come up with to deal with my feelings of inadequacy:

    Remember What Life Used to Be Like

    A7R Test-23

    Holy shit my life used to suck. It wasn’t long ago when I suffered from extreme anxiety. It got to the point that I would roll out of bed dreading to go to work. I had a lot of health issues and legitimately thought I was dying. I had underwent almost every medical test available to me. I didn’t know at the time that anxiety could manifest itself into physical sickness. The illness was largely due to the stresses and discontentment I experienced at my past job. I had been unhappy there for several years but just kept on hanging around hoping things would get better. They never did. When it was evident that things would be getting worse, I decided to leave and take extended time off to travel the world.

    A7R Test-8

    During my travels, I really connected with photography, deciding shortly after I got home that I would be pursuing it as a career. Most of my health problems disappeared and my life got exponentially better. When I look back on how unhappy my life was, I feel grateful that I’m no longer in that situation. The takeaway here is: anything is better than my life from five or six years ago.

    Remember Experiences are More Important than Things

    A7R Test-5

    I’ve tried really hard to value experiences in life over material possessions. Sure, I do love my cameras and shoes but other than that I don’t have a lot of material desires. I drive a 15 year old car, live in the previously mentioned 400 square foot hell hole, and still regularly wear clothes that are 5+ years old. With the money I save from living quasi-frugally, I am able to experience more things – regular travel, decent meals, and lots of Kekou gelato.

    A7R Test-1

    So while others make a boatload more money than I do, they may not have the flexibility to get away for extended periods of time during the winter or duck out of work to see their adorable niece and nephew. These are the types of experiences I value over things.

    Giving your money away can actually make you feel a lot happier as well. Each year I try to support the Rotary Wheels for Learning charity that helps purchase bicycles for needy children in Cambodia so that they have a means of getting to school. It brings me a lot of joy to know that my money is directly influencing the lives of others. Earlier this year, I paid my way to Cambodia and helped the Rotary team assemble bikes for hundreds of kids. It was incredibly enriching and an important reminder of why money is only good if it is used to buy life experiences over material possessions.

    The Money You Have is Never Enough but it’s More Than Enough

    A7R Test-13

    There are studies that show that after the necessities of life are taken care of, the amount of money you make plays little to no factor in your level of happiness. So for example, if you’re making $10,000 a year in Toronto your happiness level will likely be really low since that is not enough to meet the necessities of life. However, if you’re comparing the happiness of someone making $50,000 and another person making $1,000,000 it is likely there is no difference in their levels of happiness. In fact, the person making $1,000,000 is likely to be unhappier because their job would have greater stresses and demands.

    A7R Test-20

    Drawing from our own personal experiences, I think we can all remember happy times when we didn’t make much money. Think about what it was like being a broke college student. When you don’t have money, it can add a lot of stress in your life leading to unhappiness. But once you can meet the basic necessities of life, it really doesn’t have bearing on your overall contentment. Yet we believe that the money we have isn’t enough.

    Somewhere, Someone is Envious of You

    A7R Test-14

    Envy and jealousy are funny things. When I talk to my friends of their successes and I start to wish that Porsche they’re driving was mine, they will often respond back by saying they’re envious of my travel experiences and the flexibility/freedom in my work schedule and being your own boss.

    A7R Test-10

    Last week, I bought the new Sony A7R II camera. It is the hottest camera to hit the streets in years, with long waiting lists to get. It seems that every photographer wants it. I guess some people wish they had my camera, even though I’m more or less over it already (scroll down for my full review). So while I am drooling over my buddy’s Porsche 911, others are drooling over my camera and at the end of the jealousy chain is some poor kid with clean water and food envy. So no matter where you seem to be or what you appear to have or don’t have – there are others who want to be where you are.

    A7R Test-9

    So yes, I do sometimes feel inadequate in life. I know others have more stuff than me and are doing bigger and better things. There’s millions of photographers that are better than I am. But at the end of the day, I am happy where I am. When I started my photography career, all I wanted was to earn an honest living from it. I never thought I would see the successes I’ve experienced so far. I see progress with my photography and have a bit more clarity in my life direction. To my friends who are killing it: keep killing it! And to those who sometimes feel like I’ve felt this past little while, I leave you with some perspective from one of my favourite songwriters, Eddie Vedder: “I wish I was as fortunate, as fortunate as me.”

    Notes (+ A7R II Review): all images used to illustrate this post were taken haphazardly with the new Sony A7R II camera. The camera does exactly what cameras do. It is more similar to the camera you already have than it is different. It’s a nice toy. However, it is highly unlikely that my clients will notice any difference in what I deliver to them. Verdict: buy it if 1) you have enough in your bank account to buy it outright and to cover life expenses for at least three months 2) the differences in this camera compared to yours will result in new business and; 3) it provides greater shooting enjoyment.

    Personally, I would still prefer to use a Fuji X100T for personal work and as an everyday camera over the Sony A7R II. I wouldn’t completely replace my Canon 5D Mark III as my workhorse either because I can’t replicate the skintones I get from the Canons. Plus for the most part I don’t want to shoot weddings at 42MP. My computer will explode.

    Neil’s portfolio.

    Neil’s Instagram.

    Neil’s Xpan Blog.

    Neil’s Facebook.

    A7R Test-4

    A7R Test-21

    A7R Test-2

    A7R Test-12

    A7R Test-22

     

  • Small is Beautiful

    Small is Beautiful

    14001485096_2aa40031c2_c

    Read as a Google Doc or PDF.

    Dear Friend,

    I wanted to share with you some thoughts that are on my mind:

    The first thing that came to mind: “small is beautiful.”

    So I have a problem; I am inflicted with this American obsession that “bigger is better.” We want bigger houses, we want bigger cars, we want bigger bank accounts (more money), we want cameras with bigger sensors (more megapixels), we want bigger houses, bigger closets (to put in more of our shit that we don’t really need), bigger screens on devices (think of the iPhone 6 plus), and a bigger circle of influence (everyone wants to be YouTube and social media famous).

    One of the things that I learned from my 3 months abroad is this; all the material possessions I really “need” can fit into a backpack. The only things I truly “need” to be productive and produce information is a camera and some sort of typing device (can either be a smartphone or a laptop/tablet). As for my clothes, you probably already know that I only travel with two shirts (Uniqlo Airism) and two pairs of boxers (Exofficio) which quickly dry, as I wash them with shampoo in the shower every night. I only have one pair of pants (Uniqlo stretchy denim), and two pairs of socks (also quick-dry), and my trusty Nike Flyknit 4.0 (seriously the most comfortable and lightweight pair of shoes I have ever owned).

    I don’t know if I told you this yet either, but I am moving to Vietnam next summer, and going to live there for a year with Cindy. I have a lot of shit in my house that I can’t take with me, so what am I going to do?

    I have a plan; I want to go to Vietnam with no excess baggage. I only want to bring what I can fit into a single backpack (the trusty Thinktank Perception 15 I picked up in Aix-en-provence after I got my backpack stolen in Paris).

    So what am I to do? I have a shitload of photo books that are just chilling in the closet, and haven’t been read for ages. I know that some of them are sold-out and quite rare and expensive. Rather than selling them on eBay or Amazon, I have a plan; I want to start giving them away to friends and other street photographers I know would love and appreciate them. I want to breathe new life into these books, rather than hoarding them. Perhaps I can throw a big party, invite all my friends, and let my friends take all the books they would like. Not only that, but for them to pay it forward, by continuing to give them to other photographers who might want to read them. I don’t want people to treat books like it “belongs” to them (or anybody for the matter). I want books to be “common property” — and to treat them almost like a public library.

    And the thing is, is there a photo book that I truly love so much that I want to lug it all the way to Vietnam, and waste space in my tiny little backpack? To be honest, I don’t think there are any books that I truly love that much. My plan is this; to just bring my iPad and enjoy one of my favorite photographer’s images (Richard Avedon) on the free Avedon iPad app. I love photography books with all of my heart; I love the texture, the three-dimensionality, the feeling of flipping pages, the matte of the paper, the smell, and the feel of a physical object in my hands.

    But honestly at the end of the day, to me, the image is the most important thing. I don’t care if I see an image as a print, in a book, or on a screen. As long as the image is able to evoke some sort of emotional response out of me, that is good enough.

    Furthermore, I am lucky and blessed that all of my favorite photobooks can be seen online on the magnumphotos.com website.

    I also very much like this idea of purging all of my physical things and starting afresh. In-fact, I try to apply this line of thinking everyday I wake up. I think to myself, “If today I was born anew, and was able to live this day without any baggage from the past, how would I live this day differently?”

    A funny idea I had when I had my backpack stolen in Paris: what if I got my Leica stolen? Would I end up buying a new one?

    The thought was actually quite exciting. In-fact, I wish I did infact get my Leica stolen, to see how I could start all over from scratch.

    So this is advice I would give myself if I started shooting street photography all over again; just buy a digital Ricoh GR, and take photos of anything that interests you, without any sort of self-editing, or pressure or need to share or publish the images on the internet. To truly shoot for myself, and perhaps print out a few photos of the images that are truly meaningful to me. And also not to “chimp” and look at the photos, and let them “marinate” for at least a week (or better yet, a month) before looking at them.

    I don’t know if I would tell myself to buy unnecessary hard drives or any other excess baggage. I’d probably shoot all the photos as JPEG+RAW, and have Google Photos Auto Uploader to store the 2000px wide photos to the cloud for free. And for my favorite images, I would save the full resolution images to Dropbox or Google Drive, (perhaps also Flickr). And for my absolute favorite images, I would print them out and hand them to friends, family, or anybody who would enjoy them.

    I have long aspired to publish a photography book of my series of images, but the funny thing is that I find my ambition dampening. And it has given me a lot of peace of mind. I would love to publish a book one day, but  I’m not in any hurry or rush. I will let the opportunity present itself to me naturally.

    But what if I die in some freak car accident before I ever have a book of my own published? Honestly, I will be dead (so I would have no regrets). Not only that, but most of the people who follow me have already seen my photos online. So how much of me publishing my photos in a book is a self-vanity thing (trying to show off and preserve my “legacy”), or bringing some sort of value to the lives of others?

    I thought something else of last night; I actually prefer prints over photobooks. Why? Well, a print is much easier (and affordable) to give away as a present, that brings so much happiness and joy to others. I’m not sure if you know, but all my images are free to download on Flickr (full-resolution) for people to print themselves. People can also download my entire portfolio (and do whatever they want with them) on Dropbox and Google Drive. Oh yeah by the way, while you’re reading this, don’t forget to download all the free e-books on street photography on Dropbox or Google Drive. In-fact, I have compiled all of my materials for free (and convenient) downloads on the new “Downloads” section of the blog.

    I have no interest in making money off my prints. What  do I prefer? Making a few extra hundred bucks selling prints, or spreading happiness and joy by giving it away with “no strings attached?”

    To get back to the point, a print can be hung on the wall, admired everyday– whereas a photobook can only be appreciated when taken off the shelf, and looked at (with a nice coffee or glass of wine).

    I also had another random idea; I want to start sharing more of my photos as prints, to make a small little collection of 10 photos and print them on some thick paper, and to send them to people who might appreciate them. I shot around 80 rolls of Tri-X black and white film (pushed to 1600) in Europe this summer, and that approach might be suitable. I need to remind myself; less is more. I would rather have 10 strong images from 80 rolls of film, rather than a mediocre book. I remember what I learned from Mary Ellen Mark; each photo should stand on its own, and I want to strive for every photo I share to be “iconic.”

    I apologize for straying off the original point; that small is beautiful.

    So let me share some other ways that I feel that small is beautiful in photography (and life):

    1. Small laptop:

    The benefit? It is portable, you can carry it with you everywhere, and you can do more writing anywhere you would like. I had an 11 inch Macbook Air as my only machine for about 3 years, and the smallness of the screen (and how light it was) was a huge benefit for me. Because the screen was so small, I couldn’t multi-task. This allowed me to be more focused on the thing at hand. Whereas in the past when I had two 24-inch monitors on my desktop computer, I would multi-task so much and never get anything done.

    Multi-tasking is the death; simplicity is to have constraints.

    Focusing is easy when you can only have one thing on the screen at a time. I think my next machine is the 12’’ Retina Macbook, as it is (even) lighter than my old 11’’ Macbook air, and I don’t need that much computing power. In-fact, I would imagine the benefit of getting an “underpowered” machine is that I won’t get tempted to buy any new digital cameras (with tons of megapixels that require a strong machine). It should be good enough to look at photos shot on a digital Ricoh (which I think is the only 1 camera I want to bring to Vietnam).

    2. Small home:

    I have long lamented that I wish I had a bigger apartment; to have more room for my photobooks, to have a private office to do my photography work, and more space to feel open, free, and inspired.

    But I am quite fascinated with the idea of the “tiny home” movement; especially with the “life edited” tiny houses.

    Cindy and I used to live in a 2-bedroom apartment in Berkeley, paying around $1,800 a month (before utilities). We had a spare bedroom that we thought “would be nice” to have guests over. But in reality, we rarely had guests (only one guest every few months)– and that extra room caused us a lot of stress. We wondered whether it was a good idea to rent it out, to host an AirBnb, or else it would go to “waste.”

    The best thing we ended up doing was moving into a smaller 1-bedroom apartment (only $1,300 a month, with utilities included!) There have been so many benefits; we use our space more mindfully, we don’t accumulate shit we don’t need, and other practical stuff– it is easier to clean (fewer floor space to clean), the distance from the kitchen to the living room is much smaller (it is pretty much the same space), we have an extra $500 a month (we can actually afford to eat in San Francisco on the weekends!) and less stress about finances and rent. Not only that, but if I want to experience a bigger space, I just visit Artis, the local cafe with huge floor-to-ceiling windows and 2-story high ceilings. Why aspire to buy my own bigass modern house, when I can go to a cafe and enjoy the same experience for $2? (price of an espresso).

    One of our dreams is in the future to buy our own home. If we do so, I want it to be smaller than we need it to be, and to enjoy every square inch of the house the fullest.

    3. Small group of friends and photographers

    Another realization I had in my life recently; I don’t want to “network” anymore. I only want to spend time with people that I love and care about. I don’t need any more money, power, fame, or influence. All my basic needs are met (food, water, shelter), and the only other things I “need” include love, companionship, and friendship. Was it Aristotle (or perhaps Socrates) who said that “friendship is the ultimate good”?

    I once read, “You are the average of the 5 closest people to you.” That is a quote that has stuck with me for a long time.

    Another quote from Seneca: “He who travels constantly has many acquaintances, but a few true friends.”

    I want to start subtracting more from my life; to spend more time with people I care about, and less time with negative people, time-wasting people, and people who are just like dark clouds, doom, and gloom.

    All I want in my life is 5 good friends, and to give them all my attention, love, and energy. Quality over quantity.

    Similarly, I want to reduce the amount of photographers in my life, and who I am inspired by. I’ve studied so many of the masters of street photography, but there are only 3 who I want to consider being part of my “inner-circle.” They include:

    1. Josef Koudelka
    2. Richard Avedon
    3. Bruce Gilden

    At first I tried to think of 5, but I honestly couldn’t think of another 2 off the top of my head. Perhaps “3” is a better number than 5. So to redact my previous point; perhaps all I need in life is 3 really good friends.

    I was reading “Letters from a Stoic” by Seneca earlier, and he taught me all these great things on the topic of his second letter: “On Discursiveness in Reading”:

    One of his words of wisdom:

    “You must linger among a limited number of master thinkers, and digest their works, if you would derive ideas which shall win firm hold in your mind.”

    So applied to photography, I should only linger among a few master photographers, revisit their work, and thoroughly digest their work.

    Going back to that point that I mentioned earlier, here is the actual quote:

    “When a person spends all his time in foreign travel, he ends up having many acquaintances, but no friends. And the same thing must hold true of men who seek intimate acquaintance with no single author, but visit them all in a hasty and hurried manner. Food does no good if it leaves the stomach as soon as it is eaten; a plant which is often moved can never grow strong.”

    So what I need to do is subtract the number of photographers I am inspired in life by, and just thoroughly chew, digest, and absorb the inspiration and wisdom from the few master photographers I admire.

    But what if I get bored of their photography, and crave something new? The master Seneca gave me some amazing advice:

    “When you crave a change, fall back upon those whom you read before.”

    I have been applying this philosophy to books in general; whenever I crave new books to read, I simply re-read the books that most influenced my life (Letters from a Stoic by Seneca, Tao Te Ching by Laozi, and Meditations by Marcus Aurelius).

    Another random quote I got from Seneca (via the philosopher Epicurus): “It is not the man who has too little, but the man who craves more, that is poor.” That is a nice reminder for me to be contented with what I already own and have in life, and not strive for more.

    I also have an endless thirst for money and “security.” I am lucky in the sense that I have some control over my income. For example, if I want more money, I just can teach more workshops.

    But I have been wondering, how much money do I truly need? At what point do I stop teaching workshops? I came up wit a good rule for myself: “Would I do this activity if I didn’t get paid; and would do it for free?” If the answer is “yes”, it is an honorable activity that is worth doing. I am so lucky that I love doing workshops with all of my heart; I love bringing people together, helping build their confidence, and bringing joy into their lives. And yes, I have taught many free workshops in the past, with equal amounts of enthusiasm (as if I were being paid). So in the future, I plan on doing more free community-oriented workshops (especially for those who cannot afford them), give out more free scholarships, and continue to do “paid” workshops to pay the bills.

    Seneca also gave me some good advice about money:

    “Do you ask what is the proper limit to wealth? It is first, to have what is necessary, and second, to have what is enough.”

    So what is really “necessary” in my life? Paying for food (cheap, I can survive off eggs), paying for water (cheap, I can drink tap water), paying for rent (not as cheap in the San Francisco Bay Area, but still do-able).

    And what is “enough” in my life? The things I already own. I don’t need new clothes (two pairs of clothes is sufficient), I don’t need a new camera, I don’t need a new laptop (although it would be nice, as the keyboard on this $300 Lenovo Windows 8 laptop I bought at the airport in Lisbon has an unresponsive keyboard).

    I don’t need a new smartphone, I don’t need any new photobooks, I don’t need any new philosophy books, I don’t need any new friends, I don’t need more money, I don’t need to travel to any new places, I don’t need a fancy espresso machine (tempting, but I prefer going to the cafe), I don’t need to try out any new restaurants (already had amazing food from all around the word, how much more variety does my tongue need?)

    I don’t need more followers on social media (currently deleted all the social media apps from my phone, wow, what a great sense of serenity this has brought me), I don’t need more information (the less “junk-food” media I get from TV, magazines, and the internet, the better. One of the reasons I don’t own a TV, surf the internet and blogs”, or subscribe to magazines which are 80% advertisements), I don’t need appreciation or admiration from others (I should be content with myself).

    I don’t need to leave a legacy (we’re all going to die and be forgotten anyways), I don’t need a gym membership (pushups, one-legged squats, and chin ups are sufficient), I don’t need bullshit, fear, and negativity.

    Wow, I didn’t realize that there was so few things that I really “needed” in my life.

    4. Small geographic area

    Another idea I have been meditating on a lot; I don’t need to see the world. The whole world is in my own backyard.

    One of my problems is this; I always crave and seek novelty. I am never happy where I am. Even when I was in Istanbul, I remember when I was on Facebook and was jealous of my friend sipping a Corona on the sandy beaches of the Caribbeans. I am an ungrateful bastard. After all, how many other people in the world would be jealous of me being in Istanbul? I always want what is out of my reach, and am never satisfied.

    Once again Seneca comes to the rescue; he gave me this advice (which was initially written to his friend Lucilius):

    “Judging by what you write me, and by what I hear, I am forming a good opinion regarding your future. You do not run hither and thither and distract yourself by hanging your abode, for such restlessness is a sign of a disordered spirit. The primary indication, to my thinking, of a well-ordered mind is a man’s ability to remain in one place and linger in his own company.”

    Once again, my problem is that I always seek novelty in terms of my environment. Even though my apartment in Berkeley is lovely (I have a nice light-wood birch table that I got at the clearance aisle of IKEA that is smooth to the touch, and faces the railroad from my window, where I can see lots of trees, grass) I always crave to get out of the house, and to go to hipster cafes and do work. But I need to enjoy spending more time at home.

    But I always make excuses; I always tell myself that I can only get writing done at a cafe, because I prefer the company of others. But in reality, I can get writing done anywhere, and shouldn’t seek to always change my abode.

    For example, the last two days I’ve been here in Stockholm, I’ve enjoyed staying at my friend Brian’s home, without the need to go outside. After all, I got peace, quiet, access to superfast wifi (without feeling guilty to ask the barista for it), a toilet (no worries about people stealing my stuff at a cafe when I need to piss), free coffee and tea, and power outlets (I seriously get anxiety when my battery runs low on my laptop and smartphone). And damn; I have been productive. I’ve been able to focus and write an epic article on Mary Ellen Mark, the freedom and space to think and meditate on my own, and also to do some yoga, stretches, and exercise.

    I think I have come up with a small epiphany: The best cafe is your own kitchen. And the best place to write is wherever you are sitting. And the best place to take photos is in your own backyard.

    You also know me; I am an extreme extrovert. According to the Myers-Briggs personality test, I am an “ESFP” — which means that I gain energy from being in the company of others. But at the same time, I don’t want to distill my entire personality and human soul into 4 arbitrary letters, as my friend Lara taught me at a recent workshop I had in London. I want to be able to “remain in one place, and linger in my own company” (while enjoying it).

    So perhaps the solution is to learn to spend more time by myself. I still love to see my friends, and enjoy a nice dinner with people I love and care about. So perhaps the solution is this; block off all my time in the morning, and only dedicate that time for myself. Then meet friends in the afternoon or evening, and don’t work for the rest of the day.

    One lesson I learned from Nassim Taleb from his excellent book: “Antifragile” is to never plan a meeting a day in advance. Otherwise, I will feel like a prisoner. What if I start writing in the morning, and I get into a deep “flow” state, and can go on writing for another 5 hours, but I have a “meeting” or lunch appointment? Then effectively, my entire day is ruined.

    So I just need to make more white space in my life; fewer appointments, only with people I truly love and want to see.

    But how can I best enjoy my time alone? I can use time to read more, to write more (the thing that brings me the most satisfaction in life), to daydream more (take more naps instead of just bombarding my system with more caffeine and espressos), and to just chill the fuck out without feeling that I need to “do” anything and be “productive.”

    I often preach that “the best photos to take are in your own backyard.” Unfortunately, even I have a hard time sticking to this rule. Living in Berkeley, I see San Francisco as so much more interesting. Fortunately I have done a lot of urban landscapes in Berkeley, which brought me a lot of pleasure– especially with the “zen” nature of shooting 6×6 on the Hasselblad. To be honest, none of the photos that came out really pleased me (ironically enough, many of the urban landscapes I shot on my smartphone, I preferred).

    Now that I have been on the road for about 3 months away from home, and looking at Berkeley from a distance– it is such a cool place, ripe with so many photo opportunities. Surprisingly, a lot of people from Europe actually know where Berkeley is. Not only that, but historically Berkeley is famous for being the epicenter of the “free speech movement” as well as other socio-political and civil issues — tackling issues like racism and same-sex marriage. It is always easy to get jaded by your own hometown; but I have a dedicated plan when I get back home: to only shoot street photography in Berkeley for the next month, without any desire to shoot in San Francisco.

    The thing too is that there are very few photographers who have done substantial bodies of work in Berkeley. San Francisco, LA, and New York have already been shot to death. I want to shoot my own city with as much vigor and energy as possible; from the perspective of an insider, not an outsider.

    I was talking with my buddy Brian Spark and he brought up a good point to me; there tend to be two different types of photographers. First, there is the type of photographer who travels to exotic locations, and takes ordinary photos of interesting things. Secondly, there are photographers who take photos in their own boring town, but make them extraordinary. I want to be the second type of photographer.

    5. Small books/prints

    Another thing I discovered is that I actually prefer small prints and small photo books. I hate huge photobooks which are huge, expensive, and difficult to hold, and read.

    The smaller photobooks are more beautiful, more personal, more affordable, and more manageable.

    One of my favorite photobooks is Jason Eskenazi’s “Wonderland” — which is the size of a small paperback book. The pages fold flat (workss well with the horizontal spreads), and it is easy to take with you everywhere you go.

    Similarly, if you aspire to make huge prints, you have lots of problems. First of all, they are really expensive, difficult to frame (also expensive to frame), and you need a huge wall or space to hang them. Smaller prints (4×6, 8×12’’, my favorite sizes) are easy to carry around, give to friends, and to edit series or sequence projects. Because they are smaller, they force the viewer to hold the images closer to their faces, which forces them to be more engaged with the images, and for the viewer to try hard to look at the details. This is much more “interactive” than a big ass print in a famous gallery, which looks down at you (rather than you looking at it).

    So moving forward, I don’t plan on publishing my work as huge, expensive, “art pieces.” Rather, I want them to be small, simple, inexpensive, humble, and easily accessible to the masses.

    To conclude, I will just ramble off some other ideas where “small is beautiful” and much more preferable to big, fancy, and expensive:

    Benefit of small cameras: inexpensive, light, easier to carry with you, always with you, chance to catch more “decisive moments.”

    Benefit of small cars: cheaper, more fun to drive, better on fuel economy, easier to park, easier to wash, and less pretentious.

    Benefit of small phones: easier to text with one hand, smaller battery is a benefit (you learn to use your phone less, and not be a slave to your phone), cheaper (iPhone 6 plus and Note 4 “phablets” are quite expensive), fits more easily in the pocket.

    Benefit of small bags: you carry less shit with you, you probably will only bring one camera and one lens (and a few rolls of film or batteries), less strain on the shoulders and back, less expensive than bigger bags, easier to put under the space under your feet in planes.

    Benefit of a small (yet well curated) library: you only own the photobooks you truly love, don’t need to buy more shelves, gives you the chance to re-read more of your books, helps save you money, and saves space (especially if you live in a small apartment).

    Benefit of a small closet: you have less “decision anxiety” when deciding what to wear in the morning, you spend less money on clothes (you have less space to fill your closet with). Apparently Steve Jobs only had one “uniform” (black turtleneck, blue jeans) so he didn’t have to stress what to wear. Similarly, Barack Obama only owns two suits (black and navy blue) so he can reserve his “decision-energy” on more important things (like world politics).

    Benefit of small kitchen: you don’t accumulate useless “labor-saving” devices from IKEA, like blenders, onion choppers, avocado peelers, and waffle irons (honestly, how often do we use these appliances?) Also you have fewer cups, pots, pans, and dishes– so there is less stress of having them fitting neatly in the cupboards.

    Benefit of small bank account: it sucks to have little money in the bank account (I grew up not knowing if we’d be homeless the next month), but it is true that “hunger breeds sophistication” — that the fewer options and choices we have, we are forced to be more creative. For example, the concept behind Airbnb was that two guys had a space living room and air mattress, and thought it would be a good idea to rent their living room (and air mattress) to make a few bucks on the side. Also in the beginning, the founders of Airbnb didn’t have enough money to advertise their startup, so they came up with ingenious ways; like giving away free cereal boxes. Now they are a multi-billion dollar company. Almost all great inventions and ideas are out of necessity. Rarely do great ideas come from mega-rich individuals or companies swimming in millions of dollars for their “R&D teams.”

    Don’t have enough money for a fancy camera in photography? Harness the creative potential of your smartphone. Don’t have money to travel? Shoot your own backyard. Don’t have money for photobooks? See them online for free at magnumphotos.com. Can’t afford to print your own photo book? Either make them available online for free, or print them on-demand (blurb.com) so there is no startup cost.

    Benefit of small notebooks: you only write down your best ideas, are more frugal with your space, improve your handwriting, and easier to carry around.

    Benefit of small ambitions: you are rarely disappointed (preferably never disappointed), and you live a life more true to yourself, rather than relying on the admiration of others for self-fulfillment.

    Benefit of small storage space/hard drive: you delete excess crap, which forces you to “edit down” and focus on what is truly essential. If you have a phone with limited storage, this means following the “via negativa” approach of uninstalling one app a day, rather than trying to add a new app everyday. And the funny thing, the fewer apps I have on my phone, the more productive and focused I am.

    Let me leave you off with one of my favorite Steve Jobs quotes:

    “That’s been one of my mantras– focus and simplicity. Simple can be harder than complex: you have to work hard to get your thinking clean to make it simple. But it’s worth it in the end because once you get there, you can move mountains.”

    Farewell my friend, and Godspeed,

    Eric

    20150826_121404

    Written @ the home of Brian Sparks, with an espresso in the morning (damn Nespresso machine are convenient), an earl grey tea (with foamed almond milk), and another espresso (long) with some foamed almond milk on top. 12:15pm, 8/26/2015, before meeting up Brian and my friend Mattias for lunch :)

     

  • Conquer Your Fears (and Meet New Peers) in SF, New Orleans, and LA!

    Conquer Your Fears (and Meet New Peers) in SF, New Orleans, and LA!

    Group selfie from my Berlin Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop!
    Group selfie from my Berlin Conquer Your Fear Street Photography Workshop!

    Dear streettogs,

    I am excited to share my new upcoming street photography workshops for the rest of the year! If you want to conquer your fears in street photography and meet new peers, don’t miss out on this chance to invest in your education!

    I know the workshop isn’t cheap, but I can guarantee you that it is an experience you will never forget, and something that will help inspire your photography for years to come. Not only that, but you will have a chance to pick my brain, get pushed outside of your comfort zone, and to connect with a community of other passionate street photographers in your own city!

    Below is my full upcoming schedule. If you have any questions, email my manager Neil at neil.ta@erickimphotography.com

    Excited to have you! :)

    August 7-9th

    Berlin –Introduction to Street Photography WorkshopSOLD OUT!

    August 14-16th

    London – Introduction to Street Photography Workshop – SOLD OUT!

    August 21-23rd

    London – Intermediate/Advanced Street Photography Workshop – SOLD OUT!

    August 28-30th

    Stockholm – Introduction to Street Photography WorkshopOPEN!

    September 16-18th 

    Seattle – Introduction to Street Photography Workshop in association with PopUp GPP Seattle  – SOLD OUT!

    October 2-4th

    San Francisco – Conquer Your Fears of Shooting Street Photography – OPEN!

    October 14-18th

    New OrleansWeek-Long Travel Street Photography Workshop – OPEN!

    November 6-8th

    San Francisco – Discover Your Unique Voice in Street Photography – OPEN!

    November 13-15th

    Downtown LA – Conquer Your Fears of Shooting Street PhotographyOPEN!

    November 20-22nd

    Downtown LA –Discover Your Unique Voice in Street PhotographyOPEN!

    You can learn more about my street photography workshops and see the before/after photos!

  • A Real and Unique Pleasure by Pierre Belhassen

    A Real and Unique Pleasure by Pierre Belhassen

    a129 copie

    (Words and Photos by Pierre Belhassen)

    I’m Pierre Belhassen. I started photography 10 years ago. After studying cinema, I was given a camera. I wanted to discover New York City. It became a revelation in my life. I realized that there are endless possibilities and different ways to reinvent reality. For me, there was no doubt. I felt this inner calling which gave sense to everything.

    (more…)

  • How to Love Your Haters

    How to Love Your Haters

    12892992504_ee03bbf43e_c

    Read as a Google Doc or download as PDF.

    Dear Ming,

    I wanted to write you this letter regarding all the trolls and “haters” you have been getting over on your blog. I have a lot of advice for you– advice that has helped me deal with all the negativity on the internet. None of this is meant to sound preachy at all. We both deal with the same issues, and this is advice that has helped me, and I wish to help you too, my brother.

    First of all, I know getting trolled sucks. It is really shitty. You put in all this effort, energy, love, sweat, blood, and tears into your posts, and people still have something negative to say.

    Out of all the photography blogs on the internet, there is none as comprehensive and in-depth as yours. Sometimes I read your articles, and I think to myself, “How the hell does he blog so prolifically, while still doing editorial work, flying all around the world, taking care of his family, answering 200+ emails a day, make powerful images, respond to every comment, without doing cocaine?”

    I say this as a compliment. There is no harder hustler in the photography blog-o-sphere than you. I truly admire you pursuing your passion in photography as well. Having worked in the corporate world of bullshit, office politics, and the chase of money — I know how difficult it is to hustle as an entrepreneur.

    First, I would take it as a badge of honor that you have all these trolls on your blog. It is a huge sign of your success, and honestly– most of this negativity comes from jealousy. Think about all the people in the world who would love to be in your shoes. You are artistically gifted, a shrewd businessman, a hustling entrepreneur, a prolific writer, and someone constantly pushing his boundaries. Most people are dissatisfied with their lives, being stuck in a cubicle. They are insecure about their lives and their photography, and they simply project their frustrations upon you. When you are such an influential person on the internet, it is easy for people to throw punches as you. As photography bloggers, we are easy punching bags (unfortunately).

    But also know that if you weren’t successful and doing such a good job, nobody would be trolling you. After all, at the end of the day, you only have two options in life: to either be judged (usually negatively) or ignored. I think it is much better to be ignored.

    Secondly, I know this is really fucking difficult, but think about the positive people who love and support what you do, rather than the trolls. Trust me, I’m the same– one negative comment can cancel out ten positive comments. But at the end of the day, if you can touch and inspire one individual, it is all worth it.

    I know that sometimes it is hard to visualize the positive impact you have on the world and society. You talk a lot about gear, but you do it from a unique standpoint that you emphasize that both the gear and your artistic vision is important. A painter can’t paint without knowledge of different brushes and different paint mediums such as acrylic, oil, or watercolor. Whoever think that you are a “gearhead” is obviously missing the point.

    I think at the same time, you are concerned and worried about having people getting the wrong idea; that photography is more about the gear, rather than the art of photography. Don’t get me wrong, you’re going to give people GAS whenever you write a camera review. That’s the nature of the beast though; you are going to help people who are curious about a new camera, but at the same time, you’re going to cause dissatisfaction with people who don’t have the newest and greatest equipment. That’s why I personally try not to blog about gear much anymore, as gear is constantly being outdated, and at the end of the day, all cameras are more similar than dissimilar.

    I think your best articles are the ones in which photographers 200 years from now will find value in. Your articles on creativity, inspiration, and travel are the ones which inspire me the most. I also feel that perhaps moving forward, focus more on these. You are a guy who has such limited time anyways; I also know that you’re more passionate about teaching and spreading the love of photography (not just the gear).

    Another tip that has helped me deal with negative people online (and offline); imagine them like barking dogs.

    Have you ever walked on the streets and a dog started to bark at you for no reason? Does that bother or piss you off? Of course not. Why not? The dog is just a dog; it doesn’t know any better.

    Similarly, have you been on a plane and there is an annoying baby crying? Does that bother you? Yeah definitely, it disturbs your sleep, and peace of mind. But do you blame the baby or get angry at the baby? Of course not. Why not? Because the baby doesn’t know any better.
    Similarly, some adult human beings are also like crying babies. Imagine all of these negative trolls online like little babies crying and pounding away at the keyboard. Visualize how hilarious that looks, and it will make you laugh at negative comments or emails, rather than make you feel frustrated, upset, or depressed.

    Another piece of advice that my friend Mijonju told me, who probably get 10x more trolls than I do on YouTube:

    Have you ever been on the bus or subway, and there is a random crazy homeless guy (or psychologically unstable person) who randomly comes up to you, and yells at you while waving his hands? If so, how does that make you feel? For me, I just look at him weird and not take it personally. Why don’t I take it personally? Because he is crazy, and probably does that to everybody. I just happened to be a random target. I then just try to ignore what happened, and carry on with my day.

    Similarly, I honestly think a lot of people have some serious psychological problems. You never know if this online troll is bipolar, just experienced a death in the family, had a partner or spouse leave (or cheat on them), or whatnot. If you think of your trolls as sad, lonely, depressed, angry, or frustrated brothers and sisters, you will pity them and feel bad for the instead of feeling anger or resentment towards them.

    Let me tell you a story. I’ve always wondered about the psychology of “haters” out there, and have discovered some interesting insights about humanity.

    This one time, I received a really negative comment on one of my articles. The user name was like something like “Eric Kim is a con artist” and the comment read: “Eric Kim is rubbish. His street photography fucking sucks, and he is a horrible human being. He is a con artist, and anybody who signs up for his workshop is getting ripped off.”

    At first my knee jerk reaction was, “What the fuck? Who the hell is this guy, and what did I ever do to him?”

    I was curious who this person was, and if they ever left any comments in the past. I use DISQUS to power my comments, and there is a feature which allows you to search comments based on ip address. Funny thing: this guy left 2 comments, one about two years ago, and one as this hateful message. Even funnier? His prior comment was very positive and supportive. Even funnier? He was a street photographer I hugely admired and respected, and even collaborated with in the past before.

    I was puzzled. Why would he be so negative and mean to me, when I was never mean or negative to him?

    I went to his blog to investigate if everything was okay on his end. Funny enough, I discovered that he started teaching street photography workshops too, and perhaps he saw the workshops I taught as a threat.

    So I emailed him, asking him what I ever did to insult or hurt him. I told him how much I respected him, and how much his comment hurt me.

    He then replied and profusely apologized, and let me know that he suffered a death in the family, how his girlfriend left him, and how he has been psychologically sick and depressed. He asked me to delete the comment, and please to forgive him.

    I did so, and realized an important truth; what others say about you is never about you. It is always about the other person.

    Don’t feed the trolls

    In a recent post, you wrote an article about your gear, and tried to reiterate how you’re just trying to carry less stuff in the field:

    “I am not a gearhead for the sake of it or because I’m obsessed with the gear: it’s because I know what I want/need, and you often don’t know which compromises are workable and which are not until you get the stuff in the field. I’d like to carry less and be more focused, but I don’t want to compromise on image quality or printability. I cannot help but think that like our current government, it’s time for yet another major cabinet reshuffle at MT HQ…I don’t know which direction it’s going to take yet, but there’s more than a niggling feeling there will be both a lot of casualties and some unexpected rationalisations at the end of it.”

    Not sure why, but it looked like you had a lot of negative emails and comments. You followed up by writing:

    “Coda: There will be one more change. After the number of incredibly rude emails, messages and comments following the recent post, I have decided I am going to stop pulling punches. If you want to troll, go join the rest of your breathen under the bridge at DPR. If you are immature enough that your camera is your religion and you cannot distinguish between objectivity and personal attack, or had parents who never taught the basics of civil interaction, you will be dispatched and banned. If you want to criticise, remember that your own work is also out there for evisceration – or if it isn’t, then you have zero credibility. It seems to be far too easy to forget that the internet does not absolve you of manners and you are a guest here. I do this for free, and I reserve the right to a) stop when this is no longer enjoyable, and b) kick out those who seem to delight in making life a pain for everybody else. That is all.”

    I read that follow up from you, and felt your pain. You’re putting in all this work and effort for free; what gives others the right to criticize you? Why don’t they just stop reading your blog, and just move on instead?

    But this is what the trolls want; they want you to be negatively hurt. They are like bullies on the playground, they want to see you cry.

    I honestly think the best way to deal with negative criticism is to just not acknowledge it, and to ignore it. Yeah I know, easier said than done. But here are some mental models I’ve learned from the master Stoic philosophers which helped me greatly (from my hero, Seneca, who wrote this nearly 2,000 years ago):

    Let’s do another thought experiment: if there was something that pissed you off, would you vent your frustrations and anger on a rock? Of course not. Why not? A rock wouldn’t respond, and it would not be worth your time.

    Similarly, if you don’t even acknowledge negative criticism, the trolls will eventually go away. Why? They will find it has no effect on you, and they will feel like idiots, and be embarrassed, and love on.

    Another tip: self-depreciating humor helps tremendously.

    I remember when I was in high school, the worst thing you could call another guy was “gay”, “faggot”, or “fag.” Most guys would be fucking pissed off or hurt when they heard that. I know I did, and I was bullied a fair amount growing up.

    But what was the antidote? The next time bullies (or my best friends) would call me a “fag”, I would take the piss out of myself by flicking my wrist (the politically incorrect way to imitate a “gay person”) and say, “So what if I love to suck big black cocks?” Then the bully would be shocked and follow up by saying, “What the fuck? You sick homo” and try to take another blow at me by saying, “Well, I fucked your mom last night!” Instead of getting pissed off, I would just give him a weird look and say,  “Dude, that’s pretty gross. If you like to fuck old women, good for you.” Then the bully would look like an idiot, feel embarrassed, and move on.

    So similarly, you have no need to “defend” yourself regarding being a gearhead or whatever. There is also no need for you to write a disclaimer and publicly state that you’re not a gearhead. Why not? Because you know you’re not.

    It’s almost like writing an article and saying at the end of the article, “By the way, I’m not black, I’m Asian.” Anyone who thinks that you’re black is either a) Colorblind, or b) Confused.

    Perhaps the next time someone insults you or calls you a “gear head” just try out self depreciating humor. Instead of defending yourself, just say something like, “I like to collect Ferrari’s too.” Or say, “But all of my cameras keep me warm at night.” Or if anyone insults your writing style, you can say, “I’m also a horrible cook” (I’ve used this one before).

    Don’t ruin your own self serenity

    At the end of the day, insults are nothing but words. And what are words? Simply vibrations in the air. How can vibrating air hurt you physically? Any sort of mental anguish you get is more of how you process that information and interpret it. Take away your interpretation of a negative criticism and the pain goes away.

    What is a negative criticism or hateful comment in reality? If people write you a hateful email, break it down into physical elements. The “hater” is nothing but an ape-like creature with these appendages called “fingers”. These fingers of his (or hers) will be moving through the air, and hitting little plastic squares called a “keyboard”. This keyboard will then interpret these keys into 1’s and 0’s and input them into the computer. The computer will then decipher this into words, and sentences. Then the email provider will once again interpret this data and relay it into your inbox. Then when you open up the email and read it know that the words you read are nothing but 1’s and 0’s. How can numbers hurt you or have any negative impact on you?

    Ultimately you can’t control whether or not people will say negative things about you. But what you can ultimately control is how you interpret what others say about you in either a positive or negative way.

    I also have another personal rule (that once again, I learned from Seneca). The rule in ancient times was this: wait at least 1 day before deciding to beat your slave. In modern times I interpret it is as this: wait at least 1 day before responding to a negative comment or email. This way, it helps me be more objective when responding, than emotional.

    Usually after waiting one day the sting from the negative comment goes away and there is no longer any need to respond. In the cases that I do want to respond, I try to treat the “hater” as a person as a benevolent teacher, and try to convert them from an enemy to a friend.

    So I’ll respond by telling them that I appreciate their message, and appreciate their love and consideration for trying to help me. I then say that I’ll try to incorporate their feedback into future articles I write, and for them to please continue giving me “constructive feedback.” I then end the email with a smile face and tell them to take care, to continue their passion in photography, and give their loved one a hug (no matter how nasty someone is, there is still people they love and care about).

    What usually happens? They either never respond or they respond and apologize for being harsh, and they end up being positive and supportive. When life gives you lemons, make lemonade.

    Another practical tip: wait at least a week before reading any of the comments on your blog. This is what I do. Why?

    When you write something immediately, you’re emotionally attached to what you wrote. Inevitably there will be at least 1 negative comment or critique. So by waiting at least a week before reading comments you can focus on future articles you want to write, while also considering your reader’s feedback. Not only that, but you can be more objective when considering reader feedback. The two comments you usually get on the blog are either people who say a) “You’re awesome!” or b) “You suck!”. Both are equally useless. So don’t be too overjoyed when getting a positive comment, yet don’t be too gloomy when getting a negative criticism.

    Getting elbowed

    Have you ever been walking somewhere, and someone accidentally elbowed you in the back of the head? Yeah it sucks. It hurts. But you don’t get angry at the person because it was an honest mistake or accident.

    I feel there are also a lot of people out there that “accidentally” hurt you from their feedback. Some people have asperger’s syndrome, or are slightly autistic and have a difficulty understanding the feelings of others, or “social tact.” But what if they are a “normally functioning” person, that isn’t diagnosed with any mental illness? It technically doesn’t matter, because they obviously have something wrong with their mind if they spew negative hate on you.

    That is all the advice I have at the moment. If I come up with more ideas, I’ll send them over.

    But yeah man, what you’re doing is fucking awesome. You’re living the dream life, a life that many envy and wish they lived. Be grateful for the privileged position you have. You’ll always have “haters” no matter what. Even the Beatles, Picasso, Andy Warhol, and all the great artists have had “haters.” Even the most noble people in history who had no malice towards anybody (Jesus, Socrates, Gandhi) had “haters” and we’re killed for their beliefs. Consider us lucky, we will never be killed for our beliefs (hopefully), the worse is that people might spit upon us or call us bad names. But how can the drool or barking of a dog hurt us? Treat the haters like dogs that need love, support, and rehabilitation. Haters are just sad and lost souls that need a hug. Because at the end of the day, no matter how negative a person is, they still desire two things in their life: a) To avoid pain and suffering and b) To be loved and appreciated.

    I wish I could wear a shirt that says, “I love my haters” and whenever someone said anyone negative about me, I could meet them up for a coffee and just “hug it out” with them. In fact I have met many “haters” of mine in real life, and after some fried chicken and beer, we became good friends. Not only that, but these once “enemies” have turned into my most loyal friends.

    So carry on and do the amazing work that you do. You are never going to please everybody. But as a fellow “blogger” to you, I highly admire you and what you do. You are an inspiration to me, and know that I am one of  your fans. And at the end of the day, even an audience of one is sufficient.

    Also know that I’m always here to love and support you. You are a fellow brother, and as much as we hate to admit it, all of our readers (the positive and negative ones) are also our brothers and sisters in this journey of life.

    So keep smiling, and whenever you get any more future negative criticisms, don’t forget to continue to smile and thank your haters.

    Let’s meet up the next time I visit Kuala Lumpur, let’s have some nasi lemak, a nice espresso, and I’ll tell you face-to-face how much of a “gear head” you are ;)

    Lots of love at 50,000 feet in the air (in transit from London to Stockholm),

    Eric

    P.S. next time try out Norwegian air, they have free wifi onboard! And the soy “flat white” from Pret-a-manger isn’t too bad either. 7:34am, 8/24/2015

    You might also like these other other articles I wrote as a form of self-therapy:

  • 7 Lessons Josh White Has Taught Me About Street Photography (and Life)

    7 Lessons Josh White Has Taught Me About Street Photography (and Life)

    5751088405_f47d0cf619_o

    Read as a Google Doc or download as PDF.

    Hey Josh,

    I just wanted to write you this letter wishing you a happy (belated) birthday, and the lessons in life you’ve taught me, and how much I appreciate your love and friendship.

    Shit, I still kind of forget how we first met “virtually.” Was it on your wordpress, Flickr, or somewhere else? Regardless, I remember when I first saw your “bokeh-licious” photos, I was drawn less to the bokeh, and more to the emotions in your photo.

    As a Korean-American, I have always had this romantic view of Korea, especially Seoul. I have always felt like kind of an outsider– that I was never fully accepted as being “Korean”, because my accent sucked (I sounded like an American), and culturally I was a lot more American. I remember whenever I visited Korea, I would always feel massive amounts of shame not feeling “Korean enough”, and the sense of alienation I felt as a 2nd-generation Korean-American “gyopo”.

    Somehow your photos really spoke to me. I think you felt a similar way, as a Canadian outsider, living in Korea. You were probably enjoying a pretty comfortable living teaching English, getting a sweet free place to stay, but still– you know, Korea is one of the most xenophobic and nationalistic countries in the world. Even though you made good friends, you were never fully “accepted”, nor integrated into Korean society. That must have given you a lot of pain, stress, anxiety, and frustration.

    I also forget how we first met “IRL” (in real life). Was it in Seoul or Toronto? Think it was Seoul, when we did the Leica workshop together. Anyways, when we first met, you were really like a “brother from another mother.” Your views on life correlated with mine spot-on, and the sense of “realness” and down-to-earthness made my soul sing. We’ve also had so much fun that other time we did the workshop together in Toronto, and we hung out with Neil and would just talk about random shit. Good time man.

    But I wanted to let you know how many lessons you’ve personally taught me about photography, life, friendship, and more.

    First of all, you’ve taught me the most important thing in life is friendship, relationships, and connections– not photography.

    dsc00043_1

    I remember how difficult it was when your father passed away, and how tragic it was. Regardless, it gave you a huge revelation, which also gave me a huge revelation. You said something like:

    “Why is it that we use these $10,000 cameras to take photos of strangers, when we take photos of our loved ones with smartphones? It should be the other way around.”

    As shitty as it was that your father passed away before he should have, know that this realization you have had truly changed my life (as well as thousands all around the world). It taught me to truly not take any of my friends or family for granted, and it made a huge shift in my photography. I no longer took shitty snapshots of Cindy or my mom, friends or family anymore– but rather tried to take the best photos of them on my Leica. I learned to cherish every moment with them, knowing that sooner or later, death is going to take them all away from me.

    Secondly, you’ve also taught me that at the end of our lives, we’re not going to give a shit about the photos we’ve made, but the friendships we’ve made.

    dsc00563

    I remember us talking how we can both image one another being 80 years old, sitting at some cafe on the patio, drinking coffee, complaining and moaning about the world of photography and all the “new guns”, and throwing rocks at little kids outside, and reflecting on our life’s journey together. We will reflect on all the difficulties we endured in life, the heartbreaks, the deaths of loved ones, but also the fun times we taught together, had beer and fried chicken together, and the great conversations we’ve had about life while loitering for hours with just one coffee in Seoul.

    You’ve really taught me that the friends I’ve made through photography far outweighs any photos I will take in my life. After all, who gives a shit about photos? They are perishable, and after we die, nobody is going to care about them. But there is nothing more immortal than friendship. Love your post you wrote on it with shooting with Neil in Busan.

    Thirdly, you taught me that at the end of the day, it doesn’t matter if you shoot film or digital, as long as you shoot with heart, passion, soul, and that you enjoy the process.

    l1010519

    I know we both are massively afflicted with GAS, and we always switch from film to digital, and back and forth. We have this strange love-hate relationship with our cameras, and the other physical possessions we own. We are both suckers to advertising and fancy shit, like our strange obsession with leather backpacks and other “artisanal” goods.

    We know that material stuff doesn’t make us happy, yet we are both afflicted. Yet, talking to you has always helped ease some of the mental suffering I have inside. We both jump from Ricoh, to Leica, from black and white to color, from digital to film, and even fucking around with medium-format. But at the end of the day, nobody even can tell whether our shots are film or digital, and neither should we care. Regardless if your photos were shot on film or digital, they still have a signature “Josh White” look; they exude emotion, soul, and empathy for your subjects.

    Honestly, we’ve never going to find the “perfect” camera, lens, or setup for our gear. But we’re both going to continue to enjoy the process, and try to temper one another’s “GASSINESS” as we grow older together.

    dscf7585

    Fourth, you taught me to photograph my “muse” (aka Cindy) with more intensity, love, and care. Seeing the photos you take of Areum really inspire me so much. You’ve taught me that I don’t need to only shoot “street photography”, but that the best subject to photograph is my own life– and those closest to me. “Personal documentary” as Anders Petersen calls it (someone who we both love). After all, at the end of our lives, the photos we shoot of Areum and Cindy are much more close and personal than any photos we’ve taken of strangers. I think ultimately the photos we take of Areum and Cindy will be the best “project” or “body of work” at the end of our lives.

    12747726363_9fd123de10_o

    Fifth, you’ve taught me and inspired me to bleed more onto the page when writing, and to make my writing (and photography) more personal.

    Whenever I read your blog (the only photography blog, or blog in general I read), you really pour your emotion, heart, and soul into whatever you write. I feel like I’m having a conversation for you. It feels so real, so genuine– so you. You really wear your heart on your sleeve, and your viewers feel like they are a part of your life. Through your blog, I have followed you through your ups-and-downs in your life; death, love, heartbreak, depression, joy, and self-seeking fulfillment.

    Whenever I write an article for the blog, I try to think of you– and treat it almost like a letter that will also help and benefit you. And recently I’ve been thinking of making the blog more personal, and it seems that others have really responded well to this. So I will continue to follow in your footsteps, and to continue to bare my soul on this blog, and through my photography.

    img_3917

    Sixth, you’ve taught me that I need to first enjoy my life, and then secondly be a photographer.

    I remember that whenever I would go out with a camera, it would be like a hunt, and I had to go “take” photos. But you taught me that it is much better to just enjoy myself; to hang out at cafes, at bars, meet up with friends, eat Korean BBQ, and just take snapshots of my life. You’ve taught me the secret to making better photos is to just enjoy my life more, and to just document what I experience.

    I remember you said something like, “I don’t ‘do’ taking photos anymore” — and that really struck a bell with me.

    Ironically enough, ever since I’ve followed your advice, I have been getting better shots. I no longer force myself to go out for hours at a time, and endlessly wander trying to capture “the decisive moment.” I am much more relaxed now, and let the shots come to me, wherever I am. I just am diligent about carrying my camera on my neck, so I can take that shot if the moment arises.

    jvnbhjjb-2-01

    Seventh, you’ve taught me how to “kill my babies.” I love how we randomly chat with one another on Kakaotalk and message each other shots, and we can just be brutally honest with one another, without any concern of hurting one another’s feelings. I respect your opinions so much, and you have really helped shape my style and vision in my photography. I love it when you told me how you liked my color work, and how you think I should proceed shooting more color “street portraits”, as well as more portraits of Cindy. I respect you as a human being and a photographer, so getting advice from you in terms of what direction to take my photography gives me a lot of confidence, solace, and happiness.

    I was going to write 10 things you have taught me about street photography and life, but I ran out of ideas, haha. But honestly, 7 is more than enough, in-fact, I  heard that it is easier to remember 7 digits than 10 (that is why in America phone numbers are only 7 digits long).

    But anyways, this is a personal letter to you (that thousands of random people on the internet are also going to read haha). No but seriously, thank you for all the love, support, guidance, and friendship you’ve given to me the past few years.

    Whenever I get a message from you, you always brighten up my day. It is so funny, I’ll be with Cindy and checking my phone and she will say, “Eric, why are you suddenly smiling so much?” I then feel embarrassed for a second, and will tell her that I got a message from you. She then goes, “Oh, you and Josh are so cute together!” She also was so happy to see how much fun we had together in Korea together. And also a nice memory (to boost your ego), remember whenuj I told you that she looked at your Flickr randomly and said, “Hmmm, Josh is actually really good!” And trust me, she doesn’t give false compliments at all, and she has a great eye.

    dsc04154_2

    So never doubt yourself and your photography. Remember to enjoy the process. Fuck whether you shoot film or digital. Just enjoy yourself and have fun. Who cares what others think of your photography, know that I’m always your biggest fan. And in terms of having an “audience” for our work, I honestly feel that as long as we are friends, we will be enough of an “audience” for one another. If I can make photos that please myself and please you, that is enough for me.

    Farewell my friend, have a kickass day, hope you get more hits on your blog (haha) and more followers on your Flickr and Instagram (don’t know if you have notifications on your iPhone turned on, but hope it buzzes nonstop! haha).

    This sounds totally douchey, but maybe you can do a similar post on your blog about what I’ve taught you about street photography and life? Might be an interesting comparison.

    Anyways, excited to collaborate more brother. Take care of Areum, your mom, and know that whenever you are feeling sad, lonely, or lost– I’m always here to support you and share my heart with you.

    Here are some fun snapshots and memories, haha– good times:

    46958_10101006695551421_317448811_n 210652_10153076048865601_1698042380_o 411748_351732644842870_1794516654_o 1015893_10102368028139446_1873963003_o 10476574_10103591397986466_4223911897940422058_o 10483819_10103591396369706_6919630770103230897_o 10497497_10103591398380676_4151589790195915584_o 10506742_10103591398769896_4043766117666420880_o 10560560_10100276009237142_8482162579781845262_o 10547931_10103591396100246_3227559174289495907_o

    Love always,

    Eric

    Written @ my friend Liz’s house in Leeds, Friday, Aug 21, 10:33am, 2015, with an espresso (I’ve found as long as I limit my coffee to just one a day, I don’t get that weird throat swelling acid reflux shit). Let’s chat soon bro, peace out.

    Make sure to check out Josh’s work:

  • Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 14

    Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 14

    SA14ANNOUNCEMENT

    Cheers to another assignment wrapped and here’s a new one to keep everyone in Streettogs Academy moving, shooting, and perhaps for this assignment, following the beat!

    (more…)

  • On the Emptiness of Social Media Fame

    On the Emptiness of Social Media Fame

    16214812012_c2aa1a7a23_c

    Read as a Google Doc or download the PDF.

    Dear friend and fellow streettog,

    I went to sleep last night, and woke up this morning in beautiful Leeds, England, and suddenly this story came to mind. I would like to share you this story if you don’t mind.

    I forgot where I first heard the story– it is definitely from one of the Stoic philosophers. Unfortunately can’t figure out whether it was from Seneca, Epictetus, or Marcus Aurelius. But anyways, here goes the story:

    There was once a very skilled artist, who made the most beautiful paintings, that amazed whoever saw them. However he was quite obscure, and nobody really knew who he was. One day, a man approached him and said to him something along the lines of:

    “Master, aren’t you sad or frustrated that you possess this amazing skill, yet people from other countries, continents, and nations cannot see or appreciate your work?”

    Upon this, the master artist says this in response:

    “I am happy with some, I am happy with one, and I am happy with none.”

    (Drops the microphone)

    To translate this, the master artist said he was happy with some people liking his work, one person liking his work, or none liking his work (besides himself).

    My start in photography

    When I started photography, I started off in “social media” in 2006, before Facebook, Flickr, and certainly before Instagram was around. The only type of “social media” were “photo blogs”, where you would upload a photograph a day for people to admire and comment on.

    This was before “likes” or “favorites” were mainstream, so the amount of love you would get were to get a lot of comments.

    At first, I shot to please myself. I had a little Canon point-and-shoot digital camera, and I loved just taking random snapshots of whatever I found interesting.

    Soon as time went on, I discovered all these other photographers on the internet who created these amazing “bokeh” shots, with really high image quality. I wanted to create similar images, so I got a Canon 350D (Rebel XT), and eventually a 50mm 1.8 lens.

    Once I started to get more “serious” with my photography, I wanted to share my photos with the world. I wanted them to be loved and appreciated, as I saw them like my children.

    My start in “social media”

    So when I started off in social media, I had no idea what I was doing. The first obvious thing was to make a photo blog, and to aim to get lots of people to see my work (page views), and to get lots of comments (to feel loved and appreciated).

    So after I setup my photo blog, I wondered to myself: “How can I get more pageviews and comments?”

    I first started off visiting lots of other photoblogs I admired, and started to leave them meaningful and in-depth comments (with the hidden hope that they would also go back to my photo blog, and comment on my photos as well).

    In the beginning, this was brilliant. I made a handful of good (virtual) friends in the photoblog community, and their constructive criticisms and feedback really helped me grow and develop as a photographer.

    Chasing fame

    But after a while, I started to crave fame. There were tons of “top photoblog lists” on the internet, and I became massively jealous and envious of how many followers and comments they got on a daily basis.

    In the beginning, getting even 1 or 2 comments brought me extreme joy (wow some people actually care about my photos!) However once I saw others having 20, 30, or even 50 (!)+ comments, I felt like a loser by comparison.

    So my next step was that I really wanted to be on one of these “top photoblogger” lists. A shallow goal I know, but my goal nonetheless.

    So I started to visit as many other photo blogs on a daily basis, giving them comments only to hope that they would comment back to me. I was quite sly, I tried to give them enough of a decent comment (3-4 sentences), so it would look like I showed interest in their world, whereas in reality I just wanted them to “follow me back.”

    I was lucky that I worked in IT as a student in college at the time (I was around 19 years old) and had several hours to browse the internet when nothing was going on in the office (most of the time).

    So I started to go down this rabbit hole, chasing fame. It was damn shallow, and never really brought  me any real joy.

    I started to also have higher expectations. For example, my new baseline for my happiness would be 5 comments on a photo I uploaded. If I got any less than 5 comments, I would feel depressed (why doesn’t anyone love me?) If I got more than 5 coments, I would be overjoyed and then seek to get 10 comments as a new baseline.

    During this period in my life, I never made any top photoblog lists, but it taught me an important lesson in life: chasing fame is so damn shallow, exhausting, and never brings you any real satisfaction or happiness in life. I was so much happier when I was shooting for myself, and just enjoying myself, rather than seeking external means of happiness and recognition.

    Killing the Facebook news feed

    About 2 years ago, I was in Istanbul with my buddy Charlie Kirk. We were chilling at his flat, and about to sleep, I was bored and surfing Facebook on my phone. I was mindlessly scrolling through my Facebook news feed, and saw all of my friends living their amazing lives. Some of them were buying new BMW’s, some of them buying new homes, and one of them was sipping a Corona in the Caribbeans.

    I saw the selfie of him drinking the Corona, and I felt jealous. I’ve never been to the Caribbeans, and the weather there looked so lovely. I felt the negative sting of envy pervade my body.

    At that moment, I mentally slapped myself and told myself, “Wait hold up Eric, why are you jealous? You are in Istanbul, you unappreciative bastard. Don’t you know how many people would die to be in your shoes? Why are you jealous of your friend in the Caribbeans?”

    At that moment I knew I had to change something, and that social media was kind of fucking up my perception of reality, and wasn’t good for my mental health.

    The next morning, I installed the “Facebook News Feed Eradicator” plugin for Google Chrome. I would have to say, this is the single thing I have done in my life which has made me 80% happier in life (by cutting my feelings of envy from my friends on Facebook).

    Think about it: social media is a distorted view of reality. People only upload the highlights of their life, and Facebook curates those highlights. 99% of the time, people have boring and mundane things happening. But through your Facebook news feed, you assume everyone else is having the time of their lives, while you sit at home, eating ice cream, alone and depressed, watching another episode of “Game of Thrones” on Netflix.

    Not only that, but I hate seeing “pity parties” or people bitching or moaning about negative things on Facebook. It ends up negatively coloring my thoughts, and I let other people’s drama negatively influence my life and thoughts. I have enough problems and mental stresses and anxieties in my life, why should I take on even more drama from others– especially when my life has so many problems already?

    So anyways, going back to this Facebook news feed eradicator. It is quite brilliant. Instead of showing you the Facebook news feed (which is a distraction and horrible for your mental health and well-being, it will show you an inspirational quote. Such as:

    “Rule your mind, or it will rule you.” – Horace

    You can still use all the functions of Facebook to keep in touch, without the drama of the news feed.

    “But what if I still want to keep in touch with friends?”

    You still can. Now if I want to cyber-stalk my friends on Facebook, I will go directly to their personal page and see their updates. Better yet; I will send them a message on Whatsapp or Facebook messenger and just say hello. Better yet (if I live close to them), I will ask them for a coffee or dinner.

    I think ultimately social media is only useful for one thing: for bridging people from the online to the offline. Some of my best friends I have met online, and ended up spending time with them in “real life”. You can never replace face-to-face communication (Facetime and Skype video come close, but not close enough).

    Why I am following 0 people on Instagram

    Another experiment I started 3 months ago: I unfollowed everybody on Instagram.

    To be honest, I never spent much time on Instagram on the “news feed” as well. I found it to be a massive distraction, and the addictiveness of Instagram is worse than crack cocaine. I would be working on something “important”, somehow fall into Instagram, and for the next hour or so, mindlessly scrolling through images, and liking photos. I felt like a rat pulling a lever to get a hit of dopamine, hundreds (if not) thousands of times.

    Another problem: I was following close to 600 people, many of them random people I didn’t know. The problem I made was when I first joined Instagram, I automatically followed people based on who was a contact on my phone or Twitter. Of course I followed a ton of people in the beginning to show them I was also on Instagram, and with the hope they would follow me back.

    But once again, there was too much clutter. I was sick of seeing dog photos, cappuccino photos, and what people were having for breakfast. Sure a few decent street photos here and there, but I started to get the feeling that people would upload photos on Instagram on a daily basis (for the sake of uploading and getting lots of likes), rather than sharing their best work. Instagram was the McDonalds of social media; quantity over quality.

    So I wondered to myself, “What would happen if I followed everyone on Instagram, similarly to how I installed the Facebook News Feed Eradicator? Would I be less distracted? Would I be happier? What if people thought I was a douchebag (like Kanye West who only follows 1 person on Twitter)? What if people get offended that I unfollow them? What would people think? Would people suddenly start unfollowing me? What kind of explanation could I make?”

    In the spirit of being a sociologist (and enjoying “social experiments”) I decided to make myself a test subject. So I thought “Fuck it, I’ll just try it out and see what happens.”

    At first, it took forever to unfollow everybody. I wish Instagram installed a massive “unfollow all” option (but of course this is against their financial and advertising ideals). Anyways, after I unfollowed everybody, I did end up pissing off a few people (some of them really good friends). I felt massively guilty, because they asked me– “Why would you unfollow me? I thought we were friends.” And I thought they would understand, after all, weren’t we still friends in “real life?” I apologized massively, and genuinely did feel guilty. I tried to explain that I was trying this “experiment” — and they told me, “Well, I hope your experiment went well, because it cost you a friend.” Ouch.

    I then really started to question myself: was this really a good idea? I decided to carry on, because I do believe that you can still be real friends with someone (even though you unfollow them on social media). Even scarier: some people have applications on their phone which notify you once someone “unfollows” you on Instagram. I’m not sure why people would have this application, as it would cause massive depression every time someone unfollows you.

    Interestingly enough, I did read one study that “unfriending” someone on Facebook is equivalent to telling them in real life that you are no longer friends. It is one of the worst social “faux pas” you can make.

    But going back to unfollowing everyone on Instagram: it was probably one of the (second) best things I did for my mental health. I suddenly felt much more focused, in-control of my own life, and felt like I was able to get off the social media rat race and treadmill.

    I wrote in another article that one of the things I try to do is uninstall one application from my smartphone a day. This also means that I try to be active on one fewer social media platform a day. There are loads of social media platforms out there for photography: Facebook, Instagram, Google+, 500px, EyeEm, Tumblr, Flickr, and probably hundreds I don’t even know of. People always ask me which ones they should be on. Now I’m starting to realize that less is more; the fewer social networks you are active on, the better.

    In-fact, the only social media I am still “kind of” active on is Instagram. I like sharing photo book recommendations on it (using the #buybooksnotgear hashtag), as well as random life updates or street photography tips. But at the same time, I’m thinking of also trying to cut Instagram out of my life.

    The irony of social media is that no matter how many likes/favorite you get, it is never enough. I remember when my goal on social media was to get 100 likes. Then it became 200 likes. Then 500 likes.

    Now I get (on popular posts) 1000+ likes. The funny thing is now whenever I get anything less than 1000 likes, I feel like shit. For example I recently shared something on Instagram that got (only) 500 likes. I felt like a failure by comparison.

    And what is really a “like” anyways? It is just someone tapping a little heart icon on your photo. It doesn’t mean anything. When you die, you can’t take your “likes” with you. Your “likes” won’t keep you warm at night, or pay your electric bills. Does anyone really want etched on their gravestone: “Here lies John, he had 1,000,000 followers on Instagram.”

    Not only that, but there will always be a “new” social media platform. Remember when Myspace was going to conquer the world? Then Facebook took over? Now Facebook is for old people, and now everyone is flocking to Instagram and Snapchat. And after Instagram and Snapchat, there will be something else.

    Will anybody care about how many social media follower you had in 200 years? Is the “internet” still going to be around as we know it? It might be Google brain telepathy integrated into people’s minds or whatever. But all the stress, effort, and ass-kissing we do in social media would have been a massive waste of time.

    The solution

    The solution to all this social media bullshit and obsession with likes,  favorites, comments, and followers?

    Disconnect.

    Take a break from social media. Start “fasting” from social media.

    Apparently “intermittent fasting” is proven to provide a lot of health benefits to people (rather than regularly consuming food, it is better to remove some meals at random). So now, I never eat breakfast (only coffee), have a small lunch (preferably only vegetables), and then splurge on meat in the evenings. And on some days, I will also skip lunch (and deal with mild hunger pangs until dinner). Other days I will try to go vegan the entire day. Other days I will eat massive fatty steaks for the entire day.

    But anyways, I give you a challenge: try to go 30 days and abstain from social media. Completely cut it out of your diet. Uninstall Facebook from your phone, and install the “Facebook news feed eradicator” on your browser (if you use Google Chrome). Or find some other sort of website blocker plugin (“StayFocusd” for Chrome, or “Wastenotime” for Safari). Try unfollowing everyone on Instagram, and after 30 days, re-follow those who you really care about. Also try to go without uploading any photos to social media (refrain from uploading to Flickr).

    I can guarantee that if you take a break from social media for 30 days, you will be much mentally healthier and happier. You will have less stress, anxiety, jealousy, envy, and dissatisfaction in your life. Not only that, but you will learn to not become distracted with your photography projects, and learn how to make photos that please you, not others.

    I will do this with you. I won’t upload anything to Instagram for the next 30 days as well (I just uninstalled it from my phone). I am lucky enough that I shoot film, so I have nothing to show anyways (until I get my film processed and scanned, which might take me another few months). I hope to print more photography books or zines, and not feel rushed to always upload stuff on social media to feel loved and appreciated.

    Remember, happiness in life is about subtraction, not addition. So take out social media from your diet, enjoy your fast, and see what benefits it brings you.

    I know this will be tough friend, but be strong. Life is all about experimentation, so make a pledge and let’s all do this together!

    Love,

    Eric

    Written @ my friend Liz’s house in Leeds, England. 10:25am, with a nice Americano (abstained from coffee yesterday, I feel much better). Thursday, Aug 20, 2015.

    My workspace
    My workspace

     

    I had a brilliant fish and chips in Whitby yesterday, at “Magpie cafe” (the haddock was bigger than my head) and enjoyed a beautiful drive through the seaside. I highly recommend those visiting England to check out places outside London, and enjoy the countryside. Great for the soul.

    Best fish and chips ever, with Liz at "Magpie Cafe" in Whitby, England.
    Best fish and chips ever, with Liz at “Magpie Cafe” in Whitby, England.
    Drive through the countryside
    Drive through the countryside

     

    Currently reading: “Dialogues: the complete collection of Seneca” on the Kindle — brilliant, and only 99 cents.

    Also two of my favorite black and white photo books: “Gypsies” and “Love on the West Bank”:

    Two must-own black and white photoboks
    Two must-own black and white photoboks
  • Kill Your Babies

    Kill Your Babies

    8675029335_4a2c7fd6f4_o

    Read this as a Google Doc or download a PDF.

    I have a problem. I often get too attached to my photos, especially my bad photos. I look at all of my photos like my children, and I have a hard time deciding which to keep and which to ditch.

    One mantra I have always tried to remind myself is: “Kill your babies.”

    The problem is that our photos are like our babies, and the idea of getting rid of them (especially “killing them”) is emotionally painful. And if the phrase “kill your babies” is too graphic for you, I recommend the British saying, “Kill your darlings.”

    The problem in today’s society is that we have an overabundance of stuff, information, and especially images. Every minute there are hundreds and thousands of being uploaded to the internet. And 99% of these images are just junk or noise.

    The solution? Before you decide to upload an image, think of why you are uploading the image. Is it because you are trying to show a beautiful masterpiece that will bring value to someone else’s word? Or because you are trying to get more “favorites” and likes?

    Killing my own babies

    I recently went through my own baby-killing session. I went to my website splash page and edited down my splash page to my 5 favorite images, all of which I felt had some sort of consistency and emotion to them.

    I also edited down my portfolio from 6 projects down to 3. It was really difficult to do, but my good friend Diarmuid McDonald helped me be brutally honest over some nice Turkish food. I once told him to edit down his entire Flickr down to 5 images, so I had to practice what I preached.

    I then went home, took out the axe, and started to remove tons of my photos from my website portfolio and Flickr. At first it was very painful, but by the end, it was insanely refreshing. It felt almost if a huge weight was taken off my shoulders, and I looked at all of my images with admiration. They were all strong and had a good cohesion and style to them.

    It is rare you make a good photograph

    The photographer I am trying to imitate the most at the moment is Josef Koudelka. He is a photographer who has been shooting for over 50 years, and has dedicated his life to 3 main projects: his “Gypsies” project, his “Exiles” project, and his new panoramic landscape work. All 3 of these projects are powerful, emotional, memorable, and iconic.

    I want to be like Koudelka. I want to aim to create at least 1 strong body of work before I die. Less is more.

    Remember, street photography is hard. Damn hard. The most difficult genre of photography out there. It is very rare that you make a good photograph. If you can even get 1 good street photo a month, 12 decent shots in a year, and 1 truly great image in a year, you’re doing really well. Bruce Gilden even admits only taking 1 photo he really likes for every 50 rolls of film.

    Keeping photos for yourself

    Just because you “kill your babies” doesn’t mean you have to delete the photos or throw away the negatives. Rather, what I encourage is to kill your photos that are public and not very strong.

    I have some images that have personal significance to me, but I know that they aren’t necessarily good photos. So I keep them on my hard drive for myself, print them out and put them into photo albums (for myself and family), and not share them in public.

    Even another practical tip: when I recently edited down my Flickr down to my best 20 images (from 9 years of shooting street photography), I simply marked the weaker shots to “private.” So I still have the images just in-case, but I don’t need to clutter my site.

    “But what if I want to get feedback on my photos? Isn’t sharing them on social media a good idea?”

    That is a good idea if you don’t know anybody in-person you can share them with. But I have even a better method I like to do with my buddy Josh White, Neil Ta, and Charlie Kirk: I will send them a photograph that I am not sure about, and simply ask them: “Keep or ditch?” I will also encourage them to be “brutally honest” and help me “kill my babies.” They then have no problem taking out the axe and doing the dirty work for me.

    Apparently even Steve McCurry didn’t really like his “Afghan Girl” photograph. He shot several of her, and actually preferred another shot. But his editor told him that the (now) iconic image was the best. The editor knew better than McCurry, and now it is one of the most famous images in the world.

    Oftentimes I don’t know what my best images are, because I am too emotionally attached to them. I know too much of the backstory behind my images, and sometimes I had a very engaging conversation with the person. This confuses me, and impairs my judgement.

    This is one thing I love about shooting film: I am an impatient bastard (I’m the guy who complains when Google Maps takes longer than 2 seconds to load), and shooting film forces me to be more patient and let my images “marinate” and sit for a long time (before I  judge them).

    Recently my last big batch of film I developed was 164 rolls of film. I waited an entire year (not out of discipline but out of pure laziness and business of my travel schedule). What it taught me was that I was able to “kill my babies” more brutally, because I forgot shooting the majority of the images. So it was almost like I was editing someone else’s images.

    It is always easier to kill someone else’s babies than your own. Furthermore, it is actually easier to work on longer-term projects, without being disappointed on a daily basis with digital photography.

    I have nothing against digital photography. In-fact, I prefer the convenience and the cost (film is damn expensive). But the thing is that shooting digital makes me miserable. Why? Whenever I go out and shoot for an entire day, it is very unlikely I will get a good shot in a day. So when I look through all the images, I am massively disappointed. But with film, I only see my photos one every 6 months or once a year. And over that period of time, I am bound to at least get 1-2 shots I’m really proud of.

    This is another philosophical issue I am dealing with: I technically know that shooting digital will make me a better photographer. Also all of my recent shots I like are shot from a digital Ricoh GR.

    However, shooting film gives me more peace of mind, zen, less disappointment, and therefore more happiness.

    So what do I do? Do I am to become a better photographer, or to just be happier?

    Granted these things aren’t mutually exclusive. I can do both at the same time. Perhaps in the future I can try not to “chimp” as much when shooting digital, or to treat digital like film (not look at my photos often, maybe only one a month).

    Removing your ego from your photos

    Another practical tip when it comes down to “killing your babies” or editing down your portfolio: remember, you are not your photos. Not only that, but your photos have no feelings. If you decide to “ditch” a shot, your photos don’t care. If anything, they are happy to be released once again into the ether or the digital cyberspace they came from.

    So when people critique or criticize your photos, they aren’t criticizing you. They are criticizing your photos.

    I often get criticized for the writing on the blog, but I also try to remind myself: people are criticizing my writing, not me as a human being. They are different.

    Even when people criticize my actions, I try not to get offended. I remind myself: I am not my actions. I therefore try to change my actions in the future.

    Killing your ego is one of the most difficult things, something that take a lifetime. Your ego is that little voice in your head that never shuts the fuck up, and is always criticizing you. This is why studying meditation and Zen Buddhism can be so useful. If you’re interested in learning more about Zen and Street Photography, download my free e-book: “Zen in the Art of Street Photography.”

    Moving forward

    So moving forward, I am still trying to figure out my life and my photography.

    Currently, the only camera I own is a film Leica and 35mm lens. Everyday I need to fight the urges of GAS (Gear Acquisition Syndrome). Everyday I don’t feel inspired, I think buying a new camera will magically make me more inspired. That is bullshit, it never does.

    What I always try to do is whenever I crave a new camera, I buy a new book instead. Some books on my radar currently include Sergio Larrain, “Songbook” by Alec Soth, and a new personal favorite: “For every minute you are angry you lose sixty seconds of happiness” (you can see the project online here). Remember: Buy books,  not gear.

    Another thing I’ve been thinking about: there is so much depressing photos online of people and society. I want to start taking happier photos. Photos that are positive and encourage people, rather than capturing alienation and confusion.

    Anyways, I don’t have anything left to say. I started to get another weird reaction from drinking coffee again (throat swelling). Instead today I got an Almond milk Chai Latte which was lovely too.

    Godspeed,

    Eric

    Written @ ExMouth Coffee in London, 11:26am, 8/18/2015

  • Streettogs Academy 13: “Darkness” Results and Analysis

    Streettogs Academy 13: “Darkness” Results and Analysis

    SA 13RA

    (Cover Photo by Community’s Choice, Jomel Bartolome)

    In order for a photograph to exist, it has to have light but for this assignment, we are going to focus on the other side of the spectrum which is darkness. Darkness is not just the absence of light but it also connotes certain meanings. That is why assignment no. 12 Editor’s Choice Sasha Cherny picked this as the assignment theme. Let us see how the rest of the group interpreted the theme with these selections:

    (more…)

  • Photography (and Life) is About Subtraction, Not Addition

    Photography (and Life) is About Subtraction, Not Addition

    Provincetown, 2015
    Provincetown, 2015

    Read this article on Google Docs or download as a PDF.

    I believe photography (and life) is more about subtraction (instead of addition).

    I’m re-reading “Antifragile” by Nassim Taleb, and his chapter on “Via Negativa” is absolutely golden.

    The concept is that in modern life, we think the secret to happiness, success, and health is “via positiva” (adding things to our life). But true wisdom in life is “via negativa” (by subtraction).

    Taleb brings up great examples how subtraction is what creates beauty and art.

    For example, the idea that statues are created by subtraction. Even when Michelangelo carved the famous “David”, he said it was quite simple– he just let David “free” by carving him out of the stone.

    Similarly, happiness is best dealt as a negative concept– meaning that avoiding unhappiness bring us more happiness than “seeking happiness”.

    For example, removing 1 negative person from your life will bring you more happiness than adding 10 positive people to your life. 1 rotten egg can ruin the whole basket of eggs. One red sweater thrown into the washing machine full of white clothes will turn all the other clothes pink.

    To take another example, roman philosopher Seneca also shares the importance of keeping your distance from negative people. Imagine this: if you walked through a sewer, you would smell like shit and piss. Similarly, when you spend time around negative people who gossip about others, seek shallow things (fame, money), or constantly complain about life, their negative views on life will taint us.

    So the solution? Subtract, don’t add to your life.

    One of the books that has most influenced my life is the “Tao Te Ching” — a classic book on Taoism and how to live life happily without stress and anxiety. I recommend most the version by Stephen Mitchell.

    One of the quotes in the book says something like this: The fool tries to do 1 more thing everyday, but the master tries to remove 1 thing everyday.

    I have tried to apply this philosophy of removing 1 thing from my life everyday.

    For example, I believe in the concept of 1 camera, 1 lens. For all the cameras I didn’t use, I gave them to friends or those in need. In the past I have given away a Ricoh GR1v (my friend Josh White), a Fujifilm x100s (my friend Vu in Vietnam), x100t (surprised a kid named Lance who is autistic), XT-1 (my friend Joe Aguirre), Canon 5D (my friend Michelle’s younger brother who went to photography school), Canon 350D (one of my best friends Justin), Ricoh GR (Cindy), Pentax K3 (my friend Mehdi), Contax T3 (my friend Marlon whose camera broke), Leica M6 (friend Bill Reeves).

    Giving away cameras has brought me infinitely more joy than hoarding them myself. After all, you can only ever use one camera or one lens at a time. I read an ancient Greek saying that no matter how rich you are or how many mansions you have, you can only ever sleep in 1 bed at a time.

    Not only that, but having fewer choices is less anxiety and stress. So in a sense, giving away these cameras has been a selfish thing– because it brings me joy, less stress and anxiety, and the “feel good” emotion. But I do believe that if a tool (camera) can empower people, why not give it away and help others in need, or those who can use it to create art? I am just now left with the Leica MP and 35mm lens, which is all I need (until I get my next episode of GAS, Gear Acquisition Syndrome).

    How do you make better street photos? Subtract from the frame, don’t add.

    If you shot everything with a fisheye lens, your photos would be boring. Why? You are too general. By photographing everything, you photograph nothing.

    What you want to do instead is be like a surgeon, and slice out very specific pieces of reality. You want your lens to be like a magnifying glass and to highlight what exactly in the world you find interesting.

    Albert Einstein has a quote that says something like: “Make it simple as possible, but not simpler.”

    So applied in street photography, constantly try to cut and subtract from the frame. Protip: subtract from distracting elements from the background by looking at the edges of the frame.

    One of my favorite photographers of all-time is Richard Avedon, who made a career of shooting powerful and emotional portraits of people against white backgrounds. Why did he do this? It helped prevent the viewer from being distracted, and to only focus on the essential of his subjects: their face, body language, and soul.

    Another idea: try to travel less, and try to see less of your own city. Cut out a specific slice of a city, and get to know that area very well, rather than trying to see everything. This is also a good strategy for traveling. See less of the city, but get to know it better.

    Also with photography projects: a tight edit is preferable over a loose edit. Meaning, I would rather look at 10 amazing photographs than 50 “okay” photos in a book. Borrowed from photographer Todd Hido, aim for your photography series to be “all killer, no filler.”

    One strategy I try to employ on my Flickr is to constantly subtract from it, not to add to it. Every few months I go back and mark photos that I no longer think is good to “private.” My dream is that by the end of my life, I will only be remembered for one photograph (currently my photo of the laughing woman in New York City).

    In-fact, I think a noble goal of a photographer is to just be remembered for 1 meaningful photograph. Even the most famous photographers in history like Henri Cartier-Bresson are known for only 1 famous shot (Bicycle shot by Cartier-Bresson), the “Kid with Gun” photo by William Klein, “Napalm girl” by Nick Ut, or “Twins” by Diane Arbus.

    So the secret to becoming a memorable photographer? Make at least 1 memorable photograph in your lifetime– a difficult yet attainable goal.

    In terms of finding your style in photography, it is all about figuring out what you don’t like to photograph.

    For example, I discovered “street photography” because I realized I didn’t like to shoot landscapes, HDR, macro photos, baby photos, wedding photos, product photos, etc. My first love of black and white came out of the reason that I despised the way that digital color photos looked. So by process of elimination and subtraction, I discovered I loved street photography.

    When I first started street photography, I hated “posed” looking photographs. So I discovered my “style” of candid street photographs. However as time has gone on, I discovered that I am starting to dislike taking random candid photos of people. I prefer interacting with my subjects, so I am now focusing more on shooting “street portraits”, in which I ask for permission and engage with my subjects.

    Also if you want to build a stronger vision as a photographer, it is quite easy– don’t look at “shitty” photos. I avoid photos of cats, food, and HDR photos like the plague. While there is also great photos on social media and Instagram, I am trying to “fast” from social media. The only photos I trust are from the “masters” of street photography, in which their work has stood the test of time. If a photographer’s work has been around for 20 years, it will probably still be relevant 20 years from now. But a photographer whose work has only been around for 2 years only has a good likelihood of being around 2 years from now. So avoid fads in photography, stick with the classics and what has been around for a long time.

    Even in books, I trust 2000+ old philosophy texts from Stoicism, Zen Buddhism, Taoism, and Christianity, rather than read self-help books published just a year or two ago.

    You know that I always preach: “Buy books, not gear.” But at the end of the day, I don’t want you to own 1000+ photography books. At the end of the day, I want you to have a well-curated library of books that you really love and are inspired by. It is better to have 5 photography books in your library that you read over and over again, than having 500 books that you only read once or twice.

    Seneca gives sound advice in his book: “Letters From a Stoic” in which he says something like, “Whenever you are bored with your books and seeking to read something new, don’t try to read new books. Rather, return to the books you have already read, and re-read and re-discover them. It is better to know a few authors very well, than to know many authors superficially.”

    Also with social media, try to focus on the bare essentials. Subtract from your social media diet, don’t add. In many ways, I think social media is like fast food or McDonalds. Sure you have a burger and fries one and a while and you will be fine. Eat chicken nuggets every day, and your health will be shitty.

    I have a personal rule: I try to uninstall one application from my smartphone everyday. If I haven’t used an application for a week, I uninstall it. Same with social media, I try to be less active on social media. At the moment I am down to just Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Tumblr, and Google+. If I could just choose one it would be Instagram (the most popular one at the moment). But if I could really choose just one, it would be none of them, and the only “social media” I would use is the blog.

    So in terms of your influences in photography, just choose 3 photographers or so who inspire you the most, and stick with them. It is better to have 3 best friends than 100 acquaintances. So rather than trying to constantly learn more about different photographers and seeking novelty, seek depth over breadth. Practical suggestion: browse the “Learn From the Masters” series, and once you stumble upon a photographer you like, buy all of their books, watch all their interviews on YouTube, see all their exhibitions, learn about their life and biography, and try to imitate their style for a year.

    The photographers I have imitated in the past and considered my personal tutors and “masters” (in order) include: Henri Cartier-Bresson, Bruce Gilden, Martin Parr, and (currently) Richard Avedon.

    If you want to become great, you need a mentor or tutor. And we are so blessed with the internet, we have access to any of these great masters of photography in history. When you go out and shoot or edit your images, think to yourself: What would “Photographer X” do, say, or encourage me to do? And one again, less is more– try not to choose more than 1 tutor at a time. As humans we can only do 1 thing very well at a time.

    Subtraction in photography is also perfectly mirrored in the idea of “creative constraints.” Having limits in our photography gives us true freedom.

    So subtract your options in photography: subtract the cameras and lenses you own, subtract the areas in which you shoot, subtract the number of photographers you look at, subtract the number of photographers you meet with, subtract the subject-matter in your projects (focus on just one type of subject matter), subtract distractions from the backgrounds of your photos, subtract the amount of electronic gadgets from your life, subtract negative people, subtract unhealthy food, and subtract negative self-thoughts (I am not good enough in photography, my photos suck, I will never be good enough).

    Less is more.

    Show fewer photos online, upload fewer photos, and remember, you’re only as good as your weakest photo.

    One of the main reasons I’m (currently) switching back to black and white is because sometimes color can be a distraction. Ultimately I am more interested to show emotions and the soul of people, not the color of their clothes. So by removing color from my images, I can add more to the emotion and soul of my subjects.

    So fellow streettog, I encourage you to subtract more in your life and photography. Ultimately, I want you to be happy. Subtract negative thoughts, shitty people, and stress from your life. Edit down your images, remember less is more, and simplify as much as possible (but not simpler).

    I want to leave you with these quote from Steve Jobs (one of my heroes in my life):

    Focus is all about saying “no” and subtraction:

    “People think focus means saying yes to the thing you’ve got to focus on. But that’s not what it means at all. It means saying no to the hundred other good ideas that there are. You have to pick carefully. I’m actually as proud of the things we haven’t done as the things I have done. Innovation is saying “no” to 1,000 things.”

    Subtract the opinions of others from your life:

    “Don’t let the noise of others’ opinions drown out your own inner voice. And most important, have the courage to follow your heart and intuition.”

    Subtract doing extraneous bullshit from your life, and focus on what’s important for you in your life:

    “For the past 33 years, I have looked in the mirror every morning and asked myself: ‘If today were the last day of my life, would I want to do what I am about to do today?’ And whenever the answer has been ‘No’ for too many days in a row, I know I need to change something.”

    Farewell, and Godspeed my friend!

    Love,

    Eric

    Written @ Exmouth Coffee, London, 9:06am, after 1 doppio espresso and 1 almond milk cappuccino (good coffee is proof that God exists)

  • How to Be Happy in All Circumstances in Photography

    How to Be Happy in All Circumstances in Photography

    17661566516_8812b5ef6f_c

    (You can also read this as a Google Doc, or PDF)

    Dear friend,

    I just finished reading a book by Roman philosopher Epictetus, titled “Of Human Freedom.” It got me thinking a lot about my own freedom in life, how to be happy in all situations, and how to treat some of the “diseases of my mind.”

    One of the things that I found the most interesting was how one can be happy despite his/her circumstances.

    For example, let’s say that we wish that we had more time to shoot, we wish we had more money (to travel, buy gear, books), that we wished we lived in a different city, that we were younger or picked up photography earlier, that we were more famous, had more Instagram followers, got more “likes” and meaningful comments on our photos, if we were more inspired, or if we knew more interesting photographers in our own home city.

    What is the problem with all of these things I just mentioned? They are all thing that are out of our control. Sure we do have some control of these things, but complete control? Not at all.

    How do we be happy, undisturbed, and grateful in all circumstances in life regardless of our situation in life?

    One of the secrets is to find the hidden benefit of every “negative” in our life.

    For example, let’s say that you don’t have that much free time to shoot. Rather than complaining or feeling frustrated that your day job doesn’t allow you more time and flexibility for your photography, you can see this as a benefit. By having limited time, you don’t waste your time when you actually do have time to shoot. You are more grateful for your time, and you end up shooting with more focus, intensity, and drive.

    In-fact, the common mistake I see photographers make is hoping that they had unlimited time to shoot. In reality, too much free time makes us lethargic, lazy, unmotivated, and uninspired. Sometimes the constraints of a day job in terms of time helps us to be more inspired.

    Let’s say you wish you picked up photography at a younger age. You might have traveled a lot in your life, and regretted not having taken photos at that time.

    But picking up photography at a later time in your life can be a benefit. Why? When you’re older, you have more wisdom, life experiences, time, and money to pursue your passion.

    “But what if I am really old and don’t have many years of my life to live, I will probably pass away in 10 years, if I’m lucky!”

    Well, remember; it doesn’t matter how long you photograph, but how well you photograph. Life is like a play, if we are an actor, it doesn’t matter how long we perform on stage. What matters is the quality of our acting. I would rather be a photographer who shot for only 5-10 years and created 1 great body of work, rather than a photographer who shot mediocre landscape and HDR photos for 50 years.

    Let’s say that you own a “shitty” camera, and that you wish that you had the newest and flashiest camera. You might be frustrated by the poor image quality, the low-ISO performance, or how soft your lens is.

    But remember, this can be a benefit.

    How so?

    Well, if your camera doesn’t have good image quality, then you really have to find good light to shoot in. Any camera, regardless of how poor, will perform well if you have good light. So now you will begin to pursue to shoot only in conditions and situations where the light is actually good. This ends up being a benefit.

    Let’s say that your lens isn’t sharp. Well, isn’t it Henri Cartier-Bresson who said: “Sharpness is a bourgeois concept”? In-fact, I dislike photos that are too sharp. Sometimes I prefer softer lenses, which evoke more of a dreamy look and feel.

    For example, Junku Nishimura, a talented Japanese street photographer, shoots with a Leica M5 (commonly called the “ugliest” Leica camera ever made) and an old 50mm Summaron lens (known to be very soft and unsharp). But this helps him create a unique look in his work, that evokes the past. If he shot with a high-end digital camera with super sharp lenses, his images wouldn’t have the same emotion and feel.

    Another common complaint a lot of photographers have: that they wish they lived somewhere else; that their own hometown is “boring.”

    But know that “boring” is just an opinion. You can live in New York City or Tokyo and still call it “boring.” It is all a state of mind, and how you see things.

    If you were an alien that just landed on earth, imagine how interested you would be in your own neighborhood. Consider all the interesting people, buildings, and sights.

    Another benefit of living in a “boring” city; it hasn’t been photographed as much, which means you have a greater opportunity to make a unique body of work. Mark Cohen photographed in a very “boring” town for his entire life, and still was able to make a strong body of work.

    Also the benefit of photographing your own city is this: you know your own town better than any tourist. You know what shots are “cliche” and not, and you also know the paths off the beaten path.

    Let’s say that you don’t have any followers on social media, and that you are a “nobody.” That can’t possibly be a benefit, can it?

    Well, sometimes it is a blessing to be unknown. Saul Leiter shot his entire life in obscurity, and only enjoyed fame later in his life in his 70’s and onwards. But he found this to be a true blessing, because he wasn’t bothered by anybody. He could simply shoot how he wanted, without feeling constrained by the expectations of anybody else. I’m sure even if Saul Leiter wasn’t “discovered” before he died, he would still be supremely happy.

    Let me bring in a personal example; I recently got my 11 Macbook Air laptop stolen in Paris. Instead, I bought a cheap Lenovo Windows 8 tablet/laptop device for 300 euros, which isn’t the fastest or most capable machine. I missed all of my Apple software (Pages, iBooks author) which I was using to produce my new free e-books on street photography.

    But the benefit of getting my laptop stolen and using a weaker machine is this: I discovered the joy of working on the Google cloud, and have enjoyed using Google Slides (see my free presentation: “7 Lessons From the Masters of Street Photography”), and Google Docs (which I am currently using this to write). Not only that, but I know that even if I fell into poverty and could only afford a cheap laptop, I wouldn’t be encumbered or held back by lack of technology. Whenever I think that my computer, smartphone, or camera isn’t capable enough, that is just me making excuses. My mind is always the ultimate limit.

    When I am traveling, I am limited by the stuff I am able to carry. I don’t have access to my photography books, to my scanner, or other digital equipment. All I literally have with me at the moment is my laptop, smartphone, film Leica camera, film, ThinkTank Perception 15 backpack (brilliant, bought it after my backpack got stolen), Kindle, Moleskine notebook, extra Uniqlo Airism shirt and Exofficio boxers, and that’s it.

    But having limited space while traveling ends up being a benefit, I learn how to cut the extraneous things from my life, and only focus on the essentials.

    Let’s say that you wish you had more photography books in your library. I had a phase in which I bought 1-2 photo books a week, but the problem was that I only looked at them once or twice, never to be seen again.

    The benefit of only owning a few photobooks is that you get to know them really well. In-fact, I think it is better to just own 3 photography books you really really like than have a library of hundreds of books that you barely look at. For those of you who are curious what 3 books I would keep it would be “Exiles” and “Gypsies” by Josef Koudelka, and “Chromes” by William Eggleston.

    Ultimately I think the goal in our photography shouldn’t be to become rich, famous, influential, to publish a lot of books, have a lot of exhibitions, own a lot of Leica’s, or to be written in the history books. Our goal should be to seek happiness, self-contentment, and peace of mind in our photography.

    Taken a step further, photography isn’t the most important thing in our lives. It is to live a happy life. Photography is just a hobby which supplements our life.

    As my friend Josh White says, the goal isn’t to be a photographer and make interesting photos. The goal is to live an interesting and meaningful life, and happen to take photos along the way– of your loved ones, family, friends, and moments which give you purpose and make you feel alive.

    As a parting thought remember: You can be happy in all circumstances in your life, regardless of the external situations. Also remember, you can turn all negatives into a positive. It is all a matter of how you perceive and interpret reality.

    Think to yourself: “What are some frustrations or restrictions that I have in my photography or life that I can turn into benefits?” How can limited time, limited money, and limited camera equipment help me be more creative, happy, and grateful in my life?

    Fellow streettog, I wish you good luck, happiness, prosperity, and inner-freedom and tranquility. Now go seize the day!

    Love,

    Eric

    Written at Exmouth coffee roasters, London, 12:39pm, with a lovely drip coffee (low acidity blend over some ice cubes)

    Share some of your thoughts of how a negative an be a positive by leaving a comment below!

  • Free Sample Chapters: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography”

    Free Sample Chapters: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography”

    IMG_20150813_140109

    I am currently working on a new book: “Learn From the Masters of Street Photography”, which is a distillation of all of the lessons that I’ve learned from the masters of street photography.

    You can get a free sneak peak by downloading the PDF of the sample chapters here.

    If you want to learn more, read all of the in-depth articles from the “Learn From the Masters” series on the blog here.

  • Jack Simon Explains What Makes Great Street Photography

    Jack Simon Explains What Makes Great Street Photography

    Jack Simon, a good friend and a street photographer I greatly admire shares what he thinks makes great street photography in the 2 minute video above.

    Check out my video where I shoot with him in San Francisco here.

  • Desire the Life You Already Have

    Desire the Life You Already Have

    Vienna, 2015
    Vienna, 2015

    “One should not spoil what is present by desiring what is absent. Rather, realize that what we have were among the things we might have prayed for.” – Epicurus (via the “Epicurus reader“)

    I’m never satisfied. I always want more. Nothing is ever good enough. My lifestyle isn’t fancy enough, I lust after different cameras, cars, more money in the bank, more security, more fame, more recognition, and more impact in the world.

    We’re always striving for what we don’t have, rather than appreciating what we already have.

    I’m a pretty happy guy, but there’s still moments of dissatisfaction in my life. Even though I have a “perfect” life in terms of my flexibility to travel, to do what I love (teach, write, photograph), and meet amazing people from all around the world, I always want more.

    The shortcut to happiness in life, photography, whatever is this: Desire the things and the life you already have.

    So there are many different ways we can apply this philosophy to our lives.

    First of all, desire the cameras you already own.

    Even though I own my “dream camera” (film Leica MP and 35mm f2 Summicron lens) there are still random moments where I think, “What if I had camera ‘X’?” These are often moments when I’m feeling uncreative and dissatisfied with my life.

    So whenever I have an urge to buy a new camera, I think about how much I dreamed of owning my film Leica. I try to remember myself 3 years ago when I read all these reviews of the Leica on forums, blogs, and from my friends. I try to relive the happiness I had when I first got my camera. This helps me be more grateful for what I have, and figure out how I can make photos with the camera I already own, rather than trying to make excuses why my camera or gear is insufficient.

    Another idea: desire the life you already live.

    I live in Berkeley, California, which is a mini paradise for hipster cafes, organic food, quinoa, almond milk cappuccinos, and other hippy yuppie stuff.

    But I still daydream of living in San Francisco, where all the “cool” things are happening.

    But I always try to remind myself: rather than daydreaming what I can do on the other side of the bridge, try to cultivate my own city and garden in Berkeley.

    Also I try to remind myself of how many hipsters from all around the world would love to live in Berkeley. This helps me open up my eyes to the opportunities and possibilities in Berkeley.

    Usually all the art events and photography exhibitions happen in San Francisco. But I partnered with my buddy Walter Margerison and curated a street photography group show at a local Berkeley cafe called “Artis Coffee”, which was a big hit. Keeping it local is key.

    Another idea: desire the job you already have.

    No matter how “shitty” your job is, there are always benefits. Let’s say you work crazy hours, but at least you make good money which allows you to buy photography books, plane tickets for traveling, and photography education and workshops. Sure you might not have that much time, but at least you can make the fullest potential of the little free time you have.

    Let’s say you’re dead broke and working at a coffee shop. But at least you have more time and freedom to do what you love, rather than wasting precious brain energy on trying to get a promotion at a bit corporation, staying extra hours, and kissing ass. You might not have money for a fancy camera or to travel, but at least you have freedom of mind to shoot and flexibility of schedule.

    You can be a billionaire and still be miserable, because you’re so busy you can’t take a nap or go a day without answering 300+ emails.

    You can be living in poverty but still be happy because you have friends and family who love and support your creative endeavors.

    Rather than focusing on the negatives of our lives, jobs, or circumstances, let us be grateful for what we have.

    Let us desire the life we already have. Let us desire the camera we already have, the job we already have, and the mind we have.

    Your life is perfect just the way it is.

  • Should You Shoot if You Don’t Want To?

    Should You Shoot if You Don’t Want To?

    tumblr_nsk2wkCCJU1qd0y8do1_1280

    Dear friend,

    I want to share with you something that has been on my mind for a while: whether a photographer should take a photograph everyday, or only when he/she feels like it.

    I know I often espouse the benefits of always having your camera with you and taking photos everyday. But what’s the point of forcing yourself to take photos if you don’t feel like it?

    Although there are a lot of great photographers who make it a habit to shoot everyday, I have realized there are also many great photographers who don’t shoot everyday, nor do they carry a camera with them everywhere they go.

    For example, Bruce Gilden doesn’t bring his camera with him wherever he goes. Rather, he only has it with him when he’s seriously working on his projects, and when he’s shooting he gives his 100% attention to shooting.

    William Klein is another example: he hasn’t actually spent that much time in his life taking photos in the stress. For his seminal book: “Life is Good & Good for You in New York“, he only shot it for two weeks, but shot like a madman. His other books on Tokyo and Rome were also shot in similarly short time spans.

    So bringing us back to the question: is it advantageous to shoot everyday, or only when you feel like it?

    For me, I rarely have the inspiration to pick up the camera. This makes me feel unmotivated, and I become jaded and uninterested in life.

    But the funny thing is when I pick up a camera, I suddenly start seeing interesting things. The camera is a tool that helps me see the world more clearly.

    But if you genuinely don’t feel like shooting, don’t force yourself to shoot. You have enough stress in your life from your family, work, and other obligations. Why add to that stress if you’re not enjoying your photography?

    Also if you don’t feel like bringing your camera with you everywhere you go, that’s fine too. Sometimes it is more important to enjoy an experience (watching fireworks, enjoying a nice dinner) rather than frantically trying to document everything. There is even a psychological study out there that shows if you take a photo of something, you’re actually less likely to remember it.

    Ultimately follow your gut.

    If you’re the type of photographer where you feel anxious if you don’t shoot everyday, always have your camera with you, and force yourself to be creative and see the world as interesting. Then your efforts will pay off.

    However if you’re the type of photographer in which photography only brings you joy when you don’t force yourself, don’t feel like you need to shoot all the time. Only take photos when you feel inspired.

    The secret to happiness in your photography? Remember the saying: “Know thyself.” Discover your style in photography by following what makes you feel energized, excited, and what helps you flourish.

  • Presentation: 7 Lessons from the Masters of Street Photography

    Presentation: 7 Lessons from the Masters of Street Photography

    Screenshot_2015-08-07-14-06-21

    Hey streettogs, just gave a free talk at EyeEm in Berlin last night titled: “7 Lessons from the Masters of Street Photography.”

    You can see and download the slides for free here.

  • The Beauty of “Creative Constraints” in Photography

    The Beauty of “Creative Constraints” in Photography

    Amsterdam, 2015
    Amsterdam, 2015

    My friend Josh White made a great point to me about cameras in photography: why is it that we as photographers always talk about the camera we want (that will apparently make us more “creative”) rather than using the cameras we already own to create art?

    I’m currently re-reading “Letters From A Stoic” by Seneca in which he tells a story of a sculptor who was able to make a beautiful statue regardless of the material; marble, stone, wood, or gold.

    I think this is a beautiful analogy for our photography. I think we can make beautiful art regardless of the tools or instruments we have. Rather than goading for what we don’t have, let us try to make the best with what we have.

    I know a lot of photographers who wish that they had expensive digital Leicas or some other camera. But these photographers are better off using the cameras they already own and going off and making images, rather than wasting valuable time, attention, and energy into wanting what they can’t have.

    The best example I think in street photography is the emergence of “mobile street photography”, in which photographers from all around the world are only using smartphones to make beautiful images.

    But some people say: “Oh, but a smartphone isn’t a ‘real’ camera and that it has limitations. It has shitty low iso capability, you can’t print it big, and it isn’t as responsive as a ‘real” camera.”

    But these limitations can actually help our creativity. They call it “creative constraints.” If your smartphone has poor image quality, then it forces you to only shoot in good light. If your smartphone has a slow autofocus, you can focus on just shooting people who aren’t moving.

    Let me take this analogy further; let’s say your camera has a long minimum focusing distance (a Leica can only focus up to 70 centimeters). Sure it would be nice if it could focus closer, but that constraint forces you to be more creative with your compositions.

    The prime example of creative constraints in street photography are prime lenses (sorry for the bad pun). By limiting your field of view, you are forced to capture reality into your limited frame in an interesting and novel way.

    Also if you think about it, the art of photography itself is about constraining reality into a single frame. What you keep out of the frame is more important than what you decide to leave in the frame.

    I recently got my laptop stolen in Paris, and I first was upset. But it is probably the best thing that happened to me, as now I’m restrained to doing most of my writing on my smartphone (I’m typing this on my smartphone as we speak). I’ve found the restriction of not having a laptop has helped me be more creative to use my smartphone in novel ways.

    Let’s take this idea further: restricting yourself to either color or black and white is another great “creative constraint”. By only shooting in color, it forces you to try to make images that have good color combinations. By focusing only in black and white, it forces you not to be distracted by colors.

    Another great creative restraint is by restraining the area in which you shoot. Very rarely are world travelers the best photographers. All of their photos end up being touristy “National Geographic” shots of landmarks in Asia and other “exotic” countries. A photographer who is doing a long term documentary project in his or her hometown generally ends up making more interesting photos, as they are forced to create more interesting images out of “boring” subject matter.

    Creative constraints will set you free in your photography and life.

    See what other constraints you can create for yourself, like only shooting one type of subject matter, or focusing only on one project. Strip away the superfluous and extraneous, and you will create beautiful art.

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #7 Don’t Be a Slave to Your Camera

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #7 Don’t Be a Slave to Your Camera

    Copyright: Anders Petersen
    Copyright: Anders Petersen

    “You are not supposed to be a slave of mechanical tools, they are supposed to help you and be as small and unimportant as possible not to disturb the communication.” – Anders Petersen

    There is a disease and a sickness out there. It afflicts thousands (if not millions) of photographers globally, and it costs people hundreds and thousands of dollars. This disease breeds insecurity amongst photographers, and causes photographers to make tons of excuses about their photography.

    The disease? It is called “G.A.S.” (gear acquisition syndrome). The concept is that you become addicted to getting new cameras, new gear, new lenses, and new gadgets in photography (rather than focusing on just becoming a better photographer). You make excuses about your gear, and that your camera and equipment is holding you back. You tell yourself, “Oh if I just had camera ‘X’ I would be more inspired in my photography, and take better photos.

    I personally still suffer from G.A.S. Whenever I am dissatisfied with my photography, I always think that buying a new camera or lens will help inspire me to become a better photographer. It never does.

    The only real way that I have improved my photography is by traveling, attending photography workshops, buying books (not gear), and by just shooting.

    I have discovered that when you are actually out shooting, you become very unaware of your camera. You get caught in the “flow” of shooting— and all the excuses about your camera or lens disappear. You become one with your camera, and it is almost as if the photos take themselves.

    I always lust for gear when I spend too much time online and on gear forums or review sites. Beware: 99.9% of the photography sites online are just dedicated to gear (as advertising and affiliate sales of cameras drive the photography industry).

    How can you cure yourself of “G.A.S”? Unsubscribe (or block) all gear review websites, and whenever you have the urge to buy a new gear just buy a photography book. Realize that your camera is just a tool to create images.

    As photographer Anders Petersen tells us, just try to get a small camera that is unobtrusive and focus on making images. He shoots with a simple Contax T3 (a point-and-shoot 35mm camera), and focuses on the emotion in his photos. Focus less on the camera, focus more on shooting, telling stories, and use your cash to travel.

  • “Letters from a Recovering Camera Addict” Step 2: The Pact

    “Letters from a Recovering Camera Addict” Step 2: The Pact

    Iksan, South Korea. M5.
    Iksan, South Korea. M5.

    This article is written by Josh White, originally posted here. The views posted here are his and his alone and may or may not be shared by the website as a whole ;)

    Disclaimer: Sarcasm doesn’t always transfer into written word. 

    Well, “tomorrow” turned into a week. Thank you for those who worried that I may have relapsed. Not the case! Once an addict, always an addict is what I guess they say. Well, I have honestly been “sober” for quite a while and just now have decided to write down my thoughts. I feel like this, at least in my brain, makes what I’m doing and going through more legitimate.

    The real reason for my taking so long to post step 2 was that I recently took a trip to the small town in Korea where I had lived for the first four years of being here. An interesting experience. While of course I’m not Korean, that small town feels more like a hometown than anything else to me anymore.

    Iksan, South Korea.
    Iksan, South Korea. M5.

    During the trip, I had a lot of time to think about what I would write here. Step 2 (of overcoming GAS) is probably the hardest for me. I’ve entitled it, “The Pact”, because this step is a self contract to limit the equipment I’ll use for the immediate future.

    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.
    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.

    Basically, the pact I made with myself is as follows:

    I, for the foreseeable future will use just two cameras. One film, and one digital. One lens on each. I didn’t limit this to a year, not because I don’t think I can last a year, but, because I want it to last longer than that. I don’t “need” anything else and therefore have no reason to buy anything else.

    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.
    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.

    Okay, so, the two cameras. First, the main camera I have used and will continue to use is a Leica M5 in black. I should start by saying I received this camera from a friend after having to sell a bunch of cameras to pay some bills while back in Canada. I’m sure some people reading this will go out and buy one. I recently wrote about the camera on instagram and the immediate response from some people was something like “it is the one camera I really want.” I thought this to be funny, considering it is the same thought I had about every camera I ever bought. I have this camera because a friend happened to give it to me. IT has been my friend ever since and will continue to be. Any camera is good enough and any camera is one we can use and love. In fact, the longer you own one the more you will love it as is the case with this one. And don’t get me wrong, I wasn’t mocking the person for saying they wanted to buy one, just commenting on the fact I would have one time felt the same way.

    Suwon, South Korea. M5.
    Suwon, South Korea. M5.

    Anyway..

    I say unabashedly that I love film. It is stupid, I know. Sometimes I say film has a “look” and everyone laughs. I get it, it is like a hipster saying tight jeans and big glasses give them a “look.” Honestly though, I’m sure that in 30 years when I look back at my photos it will be the film ones I remember and still have. I don’t have any explanation for this. Maybe the negatives will be the only thing I would have kept.

    Suwon, South Korea. M5.
    Suwon, South Korea. M5.

    The lens? Well, I use the 35mm Voigtlander 1.4 SC. Yep, nothing fancy and most people say this lens sucks. I don’t particularly care a whole lot as they are generally the type of people that comment on the photos I took with the Sony 9 year old digital point and shoot and ask me what type of film I used ;)

    For me, the lens was cheap, and just about wide enough. Works for me.

    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.
    Myeongdong, Seoul, South Korea. Xpro1.

    I know, I know… Why TWO cameras. People are going to say this is an excuse for me to not commit to one. Well, I believe it is a necessity. Let me explain.

    I don’t always have film. I don’t always want to buy film. I don’t always want to pay to process film if I can’t do it.

    Yes, not very “artist-y” of me. Well, it is what it is. I sometimes want to shoot but don’t have the time, money, or willpower to do so on film.

    Suwon Station, South Korea. Xpro1.
    Suwon Station, South Korea. Xpro1.

    Thus, enter the digital camera. Honestly, I chose the Fujifilm Xpro1 for a couple of pretty boring reasons.

    First, I had it already so it wasn’t a matter of acquiring one which would be counter productive as I have rid myself of everything else. Second, in practice, it is the most affordable way to get a digital camera to work similarly to the M5 for those times when I’m not shooting film. Part of the reason I came to the conclusion that this process was necessary was that I was disappointed looking at my photos as I felt like they lacked cohesion. While the photos from both will never be exactly the same, because I can use the same lens (albeit as a 50mm lens) on the Fuji, it maintains similar characteristics and sort of a similar look. A big deal for me.

    Third and finally, my girlfriend loves the Xpro1. This is kind of a big deal, ha. Probably could have just skipped to this part.

    Suwon Station, South Korea. M5.
    Suwon Station, South Korea. M5.

    Too much choice is never a good thing. Paralysis by analysis as they say. I remember being on a trip to Japan and having four cameras with me (M9P, M8, GR1V, Leica X1) and a bunch of lenses and honestly having a hard time deciding what to take out in the morning. I would always end up taking two or three cameras “just in case” all the while telling myself I might need one of them for a certain kind of photograph. Stupid as fuck. The trip became about photography, not about being on a trip. I am not a professional photographer, I should enjoy myself on a trip for the sake of enjoying myself. Enjoy the company I’m with and the places I see. Even in everyday life this should be the case.

    Not to mention, I can’t tell you how many photos I missed trying to figure out which camera to use and how many times I pissed off the people I was with trying to decide which camera was best. It isn’t worth it. Not to mention the amount of travel I could do with the proceeds of selling off all of those cameras and lenses. Money is always better spent on experience. In 50 years, I can guarantee the fact that I won’t look back at the cameras I owned, but, the experiences I had.

    Suwon, South Korea. M5.
    Suwon, South Korea. M5.

    And hopefully I’ve taken some okay photos of those experiences.

    Why else take photos in the first place.

    So, thus ends step 2. A pact with myself to keep a couple of cameras and be happy with them. Something that is necessary and needs to be done. If I don’t stick to it, you’ll all know and hopefully call me out. You know how addicts like to justify “needs” ha.

    Also, I want to thank everyone for the amazing comments both here and at Eric’s blog (if you didn’t know, I have written for my friend Eric Kim‘s blog for years and often post in both places). I appreciate them so much, and always like hearing from people about this stuff. Talking about photography is one of the best ways to get over GAS, haha. Step 3, should come soon and will cover the giving away of cameras instead of selling them as a way to “purge” yourself and atone for having lived a GAS filled life. Stay tuned ;)

    Josh’s blog.

    Josh’s flickr.

    Josh’s twitter.

    Josh’s instagram.

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #6 Provoke Your Subjects

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #6 Provoke Your Subjects

    Copyright: William Klein
    Copyright: William Klein

    “Rather than catching people unaware, they show the face they want to show. Unposed, caught unaware, they might reveal ambiguous expressions, brows creased in vague internal contemplation, illegible, perhaps meaningless. Why not allow the subject the possibility of revealing his attitude toward life, his neighbor, even the photographer?” – William Klein

    There is a general scorn in street photography against “posed” photos (or photos that aren’t shot candidly). A lot of people follow the Henri Cartier-Bresson school of street photography in which the photographer shouldn’t interact with his/her subjects, and to be an unattached observer.

    However there is more than one approach to street photography. On the other extreme of Henri Cartier-Bresson (who covered his silver Leica with black tape to be more discrete) is William Klein; a street photographer who gave a middle-finger to all of the “rules” in photography, and acted like a director on the streets. He would provoke his subjects, and interact with them.

    Even for his most famous “kid with gun” photograph, he told the kid: “Look tough.” At that moment, the kid with the toy gun pointed the gun to Klein’s face with a look of hate, anger, and intensity.

    I often take this approach in street photography (similar to Klein). While I do enjoy shooting a lot of candid street photographs, I also like to engage and provoke my subjects. Sometimes I will tell them to just look into the lens and not smile. Other times I will ask them to explicitly do things for me (look the other direction, cross your arms, take a puff of your cigarette, look down).

    But once you engage your subjects and ask them to do something for you, doesn’t it make the photograph less legitimate? Doesn’t the photograph become less about the subject, and more about you?

    Every photograph we take is a self-portrait of ourselves. We decide how to filter reality. We decide what to put into the frame and what to exclude. So don’t have any personal qualms about showing your own version of reality through your photography. Embrace it.

    “Can you do that again for me?”

    7536778624_8208853edb_b

    Sometimes you see things happen in the street; certain gestures, facial expressions, or actions by your subjects. A tip? I approach the subject and ask them: “Oh, I just saw you blowing your nose. Can you blow your nose again for me?” This is what I did in the photograph above.

    Believe it or not, most people are quite happy to repeat certain gestures for you.

    Another thing you can do: if you see an interesting scene approach the subject and tell them: “Excuse me, I think you look really cool smoking on this corner here. Do you mind if I take a few photographs, and you just pretend like I’m not here?’ The majority of people will laugh, and comply, and literally ignore you.

    If your subjects don’t ignore you, simply linger around. The longer you wait, the more people begin to ignore you, and just continue their business. Once they drop their guard, start shooting.

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #5 Emotionally Detach Yourself From Your Photos

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #5 Emotionally Detach Yourself From Your Photos

    Copyright:
    Copyright:Estate of Garry Winogrand

    “Sometimes photographers mistake emotion for what makes a great street photograph.”
    Garry Winogrand

    Imagine this situation: it is a cold and rainy day. You are out shooting on the streets, and you are feeling miserable. You haven’t got any good shots all day, despite the fact that you left your warm (and dry) house to take some street photos. You are about to give up and go home when you see a little girl with a red umbrella about to jump over a puddle.

    You think of the famous photograph of Henri Cartier-Bresson (man jumping over puddle), and get excited. You hold up your camera, and wait patiently. The girl then jumps, and you click. You quickly look at your LCD screen and you realize: “voila!” You just captured the “decisive moment.” You are excited.

    You then rush home, quickly download your photos to your computer, post-process the photo, and then upload the photograph to your social media website of choice. You cross your arms, and think that it is one of the finest photographs you have ever taken. You are excited that perhaps, finally, you will get over 100+ favorites/likes on this image.

    A day or so passes, and you only got 10-15 favorites/likes. You throw up your hands in rage and think to yourself: “These people on the internet wouldn’t know a great image if it hit them in the face!” You then continue about your day.

    A week or two go by, and you revisit the image. You then look at the image and tell yourself: “Hey, this image isn’t quite as good as I remembered it to be.”

    What just happened? You became emotionally attached to the backstory of how difficult it was to get that image (and the emotion you felt of being excited). This confused you into thinking that this was actually an “objectively” good shot.

    This happens to the best of us. We get too emotionally attached to our shots, because we were there. We experienced it. It feels alive and vivid inside our memories.

    But the problem is that our viewers have no idea what the backstory of the image is (unless you write a long caption, which I generally advise against).

    So what is the solution? Try to emotionally detach yourself from your photos.

    When editing (selecting) which images to “keep” and “ditch,” ask your peers to be “brutally honest” with your work.

    Another tip: don’t refer to the photos you take as “my photos.” Refer to them as “the photos.” The difference? Calling them “the photos” detaches you emotionally from them, so you can be more critical and objective when editing your shots.

    Stories don’t exist outside of the frame

    14799923850_8c9f90a3a0_b

    In photography, the entire story of the image must exist inside the frame. If you want to tell a better story, include context in your photos (like this environmental portrait I shot of a man in San Diego).

    I have this vivid story in my head of how I got the image: I saw this well-dressed man in a hotel lobby, and asked if I could make a few photos. He said, “No problem,” and I started to take a bunch of images. Afterwards, I asked him what he did and what he was up to. He told me, “I own this hotel!”

    Now I have this vivid backstory, but the viewer has no idea about that story or information in this photograph. But regardless, viewers find this photograph interesting because the outfit of the man looks like he’s from the 1950s — a relic of the past. The viewer then makes up their own story about the man, based on the TV shows (Madmen) or any other films they have seen in the past.

    Morale of the story? If you have a photograph which is weak without having a compelling story, ditch the shot. When you have to “explain” the back-story of a street photograph, it is like explaining a joke. The funniest jokes don’t need to be “explained” (or else it isn’t a good joke). A good photograph shouldn’t need an intricate backstory or explanation in the caption.

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #4 Don’t Crop

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #4 Don’t Crop

    hcb_seville

    “If you start cutting or cropping a good photograph, it means death to the geometrically correct interplay of proportions. Besides, it very rarely happens that a photograph which was feebly composed can be saved by reconstruction of its composition under the darkroom’s enlarger; the integrity of vision is no longer there.”
    – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    Another common mistake a lot of photographers make is that they over-crop their shots. They are “crop-a-holics,” in which you crop every single photograph you take.

    I am also a recovering “crop-a-holic.” When I shot on the streets, I would be sloppy. I disregarded framing, as I told myself, “Eh, if I don’t get the shot right, I can always crop it later.”

    However when I learned this lesson from Henri Cartier-Bresson (the master street photographer on composition), I decided to give it a try. At first, it was difficult not to crop my shots. But when I gave myself the “creative constraint” of not cropping, it forced me to improve my framing in-camera.

    Over the course of a year, I discovered that my framing and composition got much better. I worked harder to get the shots right in-camera, and this caused my photography to improve drastically.

    Now I am not saying that you should never crop your photographs. There are a lot of master street photographers who heavily cropped their photographs (Robert Frank did some radical cropping for his seminal book: “The Americans,” even turning some landscape shots into portrait shots with cropping). Also the irony is that one of Henri Cartier-Bresson’s most famous photos (guy jumping over a puddle) is cropped.

    gare

    Cartier-Bresson’s explanation for cropping the shot:

    “There was a plank fence around some repairs behind the Gare Saint Lazare train station. I happened to be peeking through a gap in the fence with my camera at the moment the man jumped. The space between the planks was not entirely wide enough for my lens, which is the reason why the picture is cut off on the left.”

    If you are trying to improve your composition and intuitive sense of framing: give yourself the assignment of going an entire year without cropping. I can guarantee you that a year later, your photography will improve dramatically. And if in the future you do decide to start cropping again, always do it in moderation. Very rarely does a poorly-framed photo look better when cropped.

    A practical tip for framing better without cropping? Look at the edges of the frame while you’re shooting. Avoid suffering from “tunnel-vision” (only looking in the center of the frame).

    At the end of the day, cropping is no evil. I would say crop in moderation, and if you’re going to crop, try to keep the aspect ratio consistent. 

  • Street Photography Quick Links: July 2015

    Street Photography Quick Links: July 2015

    FOR SPQL JUL copy

    Street Photography Quick Links is a compilation of Links, Projects, News, Videos, Events, or anything that is related to street photography or photography in particular that I have personally consumed. Perhaps these might interest you or make you think. If you want to send some links my way, details will be at the post below.

    (more…)

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #3 Don’t Shoot From the Hip

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #3 Don’t Shoot From the Hip

    Copyright: Estate of Garry Winogrand
    Copyright: Estate of Garry Winogrand

    “I never shoot without using the viewfinder.” – Garry Winogrand

    Another common mistake that aspiring street photographers make is that they try to overcome their fear of shooting street photography by shooting from the hip (photographing with your camera at waist-level and not looking through the viewfinder).

    Personally when I started shooting street photography, I was dependent on “shooting from the hip.” I was too scared to bring my camera’s viewfinder up to my eye, because I was afraid of getting “caught” of taking candid photos of strangers.

    Garry Winogrand was one of the most prolific street photographers in history. He shot with a Leica M4, 28mm lens, and was known for creating layered, edgy, and head-on shots.

    If you go on YouTube, you can see how close he is to his subjects when shooting, and he always quickly looks through his viewfinder while shooting. This allowed him to frame properly, and capture the moments he found interesting.

    Why not shoot from the hip?

    “[Don’t shoot from the hip], you’ll lose control over your framing.” – Garry Winogrand

    In my experience, I found that shooting from the hip was a huge crutch. The more I shot from the hip, the less confident I was as a street photographer.

    Not only that, but as Garry Winogrand said, I lost control over my framing. My shots would be poorly framed, skewed, and any shot that I got that looked half-decent was because of luck.

    Remember as a street photographer, you aren’t doing anything wrong. You are trying to make images that people can empathize with. If it weren’t for street photographers, historians would have no idea what people did in public spaces in the past. All of the iconic street photography done by Henri Cartier-Bresson, Helen Levitt, Robert Doisenau, and Vivian Maier wouldn’t exist.

    Be confident. Have faith in yourself. By not shooting from the hip, you’re signaling to the world that you’re not doing anything wrong.

    Also by using your viewfinder (or LCD screen), you can have better control over your framing and composition.

    Getting “caught in the act” 

    So what happens when you’re shooting street photography (with your viewfinder), and you get “caught in the act?”

    My suggestion: Look at your subject, smile, say ‘thank you’ and move on.

    The benefit of having your subjects see you while shooting them5993173792_382b5d5f53_z

    Sometimes it is good to have your subjects notice that you are about to take a photograph of them.

    For example in this photo I shot in Hollywood, I saw this hip older lady with these great sunglasses and hat. I crouched down, and took a photograph with my Canon 5D and 24mm lens. The second I was about to take a photograph of her, she looked at me and posed with her hands (giving me the “jazz hands”).

    Now if I shot from the hip, she might have not noticed me about to take a photograph. Therefore she would have never posed for me, and this photo would never had been created.

    But does that ruin the photograph, the fact that your subject noticed you?

    Absolutely not. William Klein famously engaged with his subjects a lot when he shot street photography, and his presence made his photographs more vibrant, dynamic, and edgy.

    Hungry to learn more? Check out the full series here: “Learn from the Masters of Street Photography.”

  • Join Me at PopUp GPP Seattle for a Special “Conquer Your Fear of Shooting in the Streets” Workshop (September 16-18th, 2015)

    Join Me at PopUp GPP Seattle for a Special “Conquer Your Fear of Shooting in the Streets” Workshop (September 16-18th, 2015)

    popup_banner_july5_04

    Hey streettogs,

    I am excited to announce I will be teaching my popular “Introduction to Street Photography Workshop” in Seattle (September 16-18, 2015) hosted by Gulf Photo Plus as part of their PopUp GPP Seattle event!

    For those of you who have never heard of “Gulf Photo Plus”, it is the most happening photography educational center in Dubai. Their annual “GPP” event is also the most exciting, fun, and informative photography event that I have personally attended. You certainly don’t want to miss out on this event, and have lots of great coffee in Seattle as well!

    About the workshop

    In this action packed 3-day weekend workshop, you will learn the fundamentals of street photography, how to create visually compelling images, how to conquer your fear of shooting street photography, as well as tips & tricks how to capture “the decisive moment.”

    The workshop is limited to an intimate class of 12 passionate individuals who want to take their street photography to new heights. The workshop will be an intimate experience in which you will learn solid fundamentals, get honest & constructive criticism on how to improve your photos, and meet other enthusiastic street photographers. This workshop is ideal for beginner or intermediate street photographers.

    Who is Gulf Photo Plus?

    Chio Gonzalez, Manila 2013 workshop
    Chio Gonzalez, Manila 2013 workshop

    GPP (Gulf Photo Plus) believes in the art and science of photography as a medium of creative expression, and exists to inform, educate and inspire photographers of all levels. The Dubai-based company organises year-round photography workshops, inspirational talks, exhibitions and events for the local photography community, and is famed the world over for its biannual photofests. March 2015 was the 11th edition of the annual GPP event in Dubai.

    The annual GPP event draws participants from around the world with their impressive line-up of photography educators. Past educators include Magnum’s David Alan HarveyZack Arias, Joe McNally, Steve SimonDavid Hobby (Strobist), Greg Heisler, and Joey Lawrence to name a few! I was fortunate enough to be an instructor at GPP2014 and it was one of the most rewarding teaching experiences of my career.

    What is PopUp GPP Seattle?

    Jill McGuire, Seattle 2014 workshop
    Jill McGuire, Seattle 2014 workshop

    Following the success of PopUP GPP in London and Singapore, GPP is continuing with their winning formula – the best instructors, exceptional organisation and a passion for photography…next stop, Seattle September 19th and 20th, 2015.

    Participants of my workshop September 16-18th will receive free admission to the weekend’s event, which will feature sessions from Zack Arias, Joe McNally, David Hobby, and Greg Heisler! These are all masters of their respective genres and photographers whom I have great respect and admiration for.

    How Can I Register for PopUp GPP Seattle?

    Shay Allen, San Francisco 2013 workshop
    Shay Allen, San Francisco 2013 workshop

    There are two ways you can register for the PopUp GPP Seattle event:

    1) Register for my workshop Conquer Your Fear of Shooting the Streets (September 16-18th), which includes admission to the September 19-20th sessions!

    2) Register for the main PopUp GPP Seattle event (September 19-20th) featuring Zack Arias, Joe McNally, David Hobby, and Greg Heisler!

    For more information on the two PopUp GPP Seattle events, contact Gulf Photo Plus at hello@popupgpp.com. They promise to get back to you within 24 hours except on weekends – weekends are Friday and Saturday in Dubai so bear with us if you send an email on the weekend. You can also reach them by phone at  +971 4 380 8545.

    Excited to see you in Seattle :)

    Ximena Echague, London 2014 workshop
    Ximena Echague, London 2014 workshop

    Other Upcoming Street Photography Workshops

    If you can’t make the GPP event in Seattle, join me at one of my other upcoming street photography workshops!

  • “Letters from a Recovering Camera Addict” Step 1: Admission

    “Letters from a Recovering Camera Addict” Step 1: Admission

    Seoul, South Korea.
    Seoul, South Korea. Last week.

    This article is written by Josh White, originally posted here. The views posted here are his and his alone and may or may not be shared by the website as a whole ;)

    Hi.

    My name is Josh and I’m an addict.

    No, I never did drugs. I don’t smoke. I hardly even drink.

    I’m addicted to something more pricey than any of those. I’m addicted to cameras.

    Any kind of camera. I don’t discriminate. I don’t care anymore if it is expensive. I don’t care if it is new. I don’t care if I’ve tried it before. If it is out there to be bought, I probably want to buy it.

    I get angry at other addicts. This stems from a strong denial of my affliction. Stems from the inability to admit my own flaws.

    Some say there isn’t anything wrong. This ISN’T an addiction. I’m here to say, they are wrong. Addiction by definition is the inability to stop a habit.

    There are many symptoms. First, the morning coffee. The coffee, a different addiction, is just a means to sit in front of a computer and feed. The first thing you may check is ESPN or the news. That makes the addiction feel less real. Next though, the reality of it.

    The next part depends on the “drug” of choice. Maybe you go directly to the newest gear news. If you prefer the old stuff, you check used shops for their newest posts. I used to be the prior but have migrated towards the later. “Wow, that is interesting” or “I took one of my favorite pictures with one of those.” The starting thoughts to a chain of events leading to getting a fix.

    At this point, “you” still don’t feel there is a problem.

    “I’m just looking..”

    At work during free moments you check forums or reviews. Listen to other addicts talk about why they needed that fix. If you’re like me, you look at the old photos you took with the current “mark.”

    “I remember when I took this. I really loved that camera…”

    Other people need to latest and greatest. They aren’t the nostalgic type addicts like myself. They can forget the past easily because it will never be as good as the future. I was like this before. I remember the feeling of not wanting to use my current because I knew I would get the newer. The “lame duck” mentality.

    “What if I take the picture of my life with this? How can I get something else then?”

    This leads to another problem. Hoarding. The inability to let go because at some point something may be needed. Some day, you may want to fondle or hold. I’ve never really been a hoarder, but addiction is unpredictable.

    Justification. The crux of the matter.

    “If I only had that camera I could take the shots I want.”

    Weirdly, that thought is very rarely followed by:

    “I wonder how I can take interesting shots with the camera I have?”

    At least not in the mind of an addict.

    In our hypothetical day, the addict will then spend the rest of it daydreaming about what they could do with the new camera. They will dream of the inspiration. Somehow, when looking at forums and reviews they don’t seem to see the negatives. Either that or ignore them.

    Finally before the day is over the website is checked one last time. Some small part of your brain wants it to be sold.

    Not because you want the addiction to stop but because you want it to continue.

    “It wasn’t really that good anyway. Tomorrow, there will be something better.”

    Seoul, South Korea. 2014.
    Seoul, South Korea. 2014.

    When I look at my favorite photographers, there is something interesting about them. For the most part, they have a very specific style. Their photos have a “look.” They have a clearly defined “feeling” to their photos. Something that isn’t easily explained aside from with another hypothetical situation.

    I open flickr and I see a photo without the name because, I am of course at work and the browser window is minimized. Even so, I know right away that photo was taken by Junku Nishimura ( a friend from Japan and probably one of the best contemporary street photographers in existence). I don’t need his name to know the photo is his.

    People will argue this point. Most of the people that argue will be addicts. I know because I did so myself. They will say that if you have a style you can take photos of that style with anything. This is true, on some levels, but not all. Not because of specifications or technical details but because of the vision of the artist. Their camera is just their tool. It is a method to expose a frame. A medium on which to capture.

    Anyway, I digress. I am slowly recovering. It is hard, I still fall back into the routine of addiction. Maybe I will always be an addict. In fact, I think I will be. I just want to learn how to deal with it better. I NEED to. I want to be proud of the work I’ve made and want it to be consistent. This addiction doesn’t allow for that.

    So, I’ve decided to start with the 12 steps. 12 steps of my own invention. Consider this, step one.

    Admitting I have a problem.

    Step 2 is maybe the first on the actual road to recovery. A pact. A pact to use one camera and one lens for a year. 365 days. More on this tomorrow.

    Tokyo, Japan.
    Tokyo, Japan. 2011.

    Josh’s blog.

    Josh’s flickr.

    Josh’s twitter.

    Josh’s instagram.

  • Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 13

    Streettogs Academy Assignment No. 13

    SA13

    Let’s just jump to the next assignment. I think this one is going to be fun because there are two ways to approach this one:

    (more…)

  • Streettogs Academy No. 12 “Love” Results and Analysis

    Streettogs Academy No. 12 “Love” Results and Analysis

    SA 12 COVER

    (Cover photo by Assignment No. 12 Community’s choice Forrest Walker)

    All the things we do are best done when you love what you are doing. This is an emotion natural to all of us that is open to a lot of possibilities and executions. With that said, here are some of the best of the best for Assignment No. 12:

    (more…)

  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #2 Shoot From the Gut

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #2 Shoot From the Gut

    Copyright: Anders Petersen
    Copyright: Anders Petersen

    “My photography is not ‘brain photography’. I put my brain under the pillow when I shoot. I shoot with my heart and with my stomach.” – Anders Petersen

    Anders Petersen is one of the most influential contemporary master photographers. He shoots with a simple point-and-shoot film camera (Contax T3) and shoots soulful black and white images which he refers to as “personal documentary.” He makes himself and the people he meets as his main subjects, and he shoots from the heart.

    A photograph without emotion is dead. The problem that a lot of photographers make is that they try to become too analytical with their photography. They are too preoccupied with composition, framing, form, nice light, and they forget the most important thing of making a memorable image: creating an image that has heart, soul, and passion.

    So when you’re out shooting, try not too be too analytical. Shoot from your intuition and your guts. If you find anything even remotely interesting, don’t self-censor yourself. Don’t let your brain tell you: “Don’t take that shot, it is boring, and nobody will find it interesting.” Take the photograph anyways, because you can always edit it out (remove it) later.

    When is it time to become analytical?

    Eric Kim / Tokyo, 2011
    Eric Kim / Tokyo, 2011

    “It is more after when I am shooting when I am looking at my contact sheets, and then I try to analyze and put things together.” – Anders Petersen

    Shoot from your gut when you’re out on the streets, but use your brain when you’re at home and editing your shots. Analyze your images after-the-fact as a post-mortem, and learn how to “kill your babies” (your weak photos that you are emotionally attached to, but you know aren’t great photos).

    Separate the shooting and editing sides of your photography. They use different parts of your brains, and if you try to do both of them at the same time, you will fail. As a practical tip, turn off your LCD screen when shooting, and refrain from looking at your images immediately. Let your shots “marinate” by not looking at them until a week after you have made your images.

    Letting a photograph “marinate”

    I shoot both film and digital, but one of the biggest advantages of shooting film is that you’re forced not to look at your photos immediately after you’ve shot it. I generally don’t get my film processed until 6 months-1 year after I’ve shot it. This helps me truly help disconnect myself emotionally from my shots, which allows me to look at my photos more objectively.

    For digital I find it a lot harder to let my shots “marinate,” as I am prone to “chimping” (looking at your LCD screen immediately after you’ve taken photographs).

    For this photograph above, I saw this woman juxtaposed against this billboard behind her in London. I got close to her, and took two photos: both with a flash. One of them she was looking away, and one she was looking directly at me.

    At first I didn’t think that it was an interesting shot, but then I let the shot “marinate”— and the longer I sat on the image, the more I ended up liking it. I also ended up showing the photograph to a couple of my close friends, who all agreed that it was a strong image.

    For some shots, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the more you like them. For others, the longer you let your shots “marinate,” the less you like them. Imagine oil and water in a bottle. You shake the bottle hard, and they are both mixed. But the longer you wait, the oil will soon rise to the top (your good photos), while the water will sink to the bottom (your weak photos).

    Learn From the Masters

    If you want to learn more practical wisdom from the masters of street photography, read more below:

  • The Street Photography 2015 Contest: Get Your Work Published In A Book Curated by Colin Westerbeck (UPDATE: Deadline Extended to Aug. 25)

    The Street Photography 2015 Contest: Get Your Work Published In A Book Curated by Colin Westerbeck (UPDATE: Deadline Extended to Aug. 25)

    main

    unnamed

    UPDATE: Deadline extended until AUGUST 25, 2015! 

    You’ve read that right! Colin Westerbeck, acclaimed curator and author of the book, Bystander: A brief history of Street Photography together with Acuity press and PDN are looking for your best work to be part of a book that will showcase the current practice of street photography. It will be juried by Eric together with Ken Schles, Matt Stewart, Daniel Arnold, and John Free.

    Here are some of the contest details:

    • Head on to the Street Photography 2015 Website and sign up.
    • Upload your images with the size at least 11 x 17 at 300dpi jpeg. (Mobile Phone Images at least 1920 x 1920 pixels)
    • There are several categories ranging from Urban Landscape, Urban Culture, Portraits, Social Circumstance, Street Fashion and etc.
    • Deadline of Entries is on August 11, 2015  August 25, 2015 (Extended!)
    • There is an entry fee of $35 that will let you upload up to 6 images.

    For more info on the contest visit the competition website and follow PDN and Acuity press for the latest news!

    • A.g.
  • Learn From the Masters: Lesson #1 Get Closer

    Learn From the Masters: Lesson #1 Get Closer

    Hey streettogs, I’m starting a new book on a distillation of all the “Learn from the Masters” articles I’ve written. I hope these daily lessons can inspire you, I know they inspired me!

    © Robert Capa / Magnum Photos. SPAIN. Cordoba front. September, 1936. Death of a loyalist militiaman.

    “If your photographs aren’t good enough, you’re not close enough.” – Robert Capa

    One of the common mistakes that many beginning street photographers make is this: they don’t get close enough.

    We have many fears and provide a lot of excuses for not getting close enough in our street photography. We are worried about pissing people off, we are worried about making other people feel uncomfortable, and we are worried that strangers might call the cops on us (or even worse, physically assault us).

    However realize that this is all in your head. By getting closer to a stranger, you won’t die. In-fact, I have learned that in photography (and life), with physical proximity comes emotional proximity.

    It isn’t enough to use a telephoto or zoom lens to get “close” to your subject. That is fake intimacy. By using a telephoto lens, you are treating your subjects like zoo animals, and your photography is a safari hunt.

    However when we read the quote from Robert Capa on closeness, it doesn’t necessarily mean physical proximity. You can be physically close to your subject, and still emotionally distant. The most important thing as a street photographer is to empathize with your subject and try to connect with them, their emotions, feelings, and condition.

    In street photography I generally recommend using a 35mm lens (full-frame equivalent) for most photographers (Alex Webb, Constantine Manos, and Anders Petersen shoot with this focal length). The human eye sees the world in around a 40mm field-of-view, and I find that shooting with a 35mm lens gives you enough wiggle-room around the edges of the frame.

    A 50mm is fine too (Henri Cartier-Bresson was famous for using it for nearly his entire life), but in today’s crowded world, I find it to be a bit too tight. A 28mm is fantastic too (William Klein, Bruce Gilden, and Garry Winogrand have used this focal length), but realize that you have to be close enough with this lens to fill the frame.

    As a rule-of-thumb, I try to shoot with a 35mm at least two-arm-lengths away (or closer). 2 arm-lengths is 1.2 meters (around 4 feet). Therefore I always have my camera pre-focused to 1.2 meters, set at f/8, ISO 1600, and I simply go out to find moments to shoot.

    The .7 Meter Challenge

    NYC, 2015

    To truly get comfortable getting closer to your subjects, try this assignment from my friend Satoki Nagata: For an entire month, only take photos of your subjects from .7 meters (1-arm-length). For this assignment, switch your camera to manual-focusing mode, and tape the focusing mechanism of your lens to that distance. By setting yourself this “creative constraint,” you will learn how to better engage your subjects and get them comfortable with you shooting at such a close distance.

    Start off by asking for permission, then once you feel more courageous, start shooting candidly.

    You can read more on the .7 meter challenge here.

    Shooting street photography with a telephoto

    You don’t always need to shoot with a wide angle lens. Some of the greatest street photographers have used a longer lens, such as Saul Leiter, Tony Ray Jones, and Rene Burri. They used long lenses intentionally to compress their backgrounds and make unique images. However their images still have emotion and soul to them, as they caught moments of the “human condition.”

    Ultimately use the lens and focal length which suits your personality. But if you’ve never tried shooting wide and getting physically close in street photography, I recommend you to try it out, and push yourself out of your comfort zone.

  • Of Raising Dogs And Pursuing Reflections: An Interview With Siri Thompson

    Of Raising Dogs And Pursuing Reflections: An Interview With Siri Thompson

    15352362056_39d339c292_c

    (Interview by A.g. De Mesa. All photos by Siri Thompson)

    Siri Thompson is a photographer based in Toronto, Canada. She constantly photographs her city in a manner inspired by her photographic heroes while putting her own unique twist. Siri also has a soft place in her heart for animals. Her photos feature a lot of imagination as seen by the layers of content in her frame but they can be easily understood. It is a mixture of mundane daily life and deceptively complex scenes.

    Find out more about how she photographs and what keeps her fascinated with our interview below:

    (more…)

  • How to Overcome Excuses in Street Photography

    Bercy Park / Paris, 2015

    A photo posted by Eric Kim (@erickimphoto) on

    Getting my laptop stolen recently has been the best thing that happened to me recently. Let me explain why.

    Not having a laptop the last week, I’ve been making all these excuses not to blog and write. I generally prefer working with a a laptop, having a keyboard, and the flexibility of having a “real” computer.

    So the last week I’ve been just dependent on my smartphone. And damn, I’m pretty impressed and realize how much I can truly do with a smartphone. I can (obviously) check my email, plan my schedule, pay bills, but even better– I can record videos, take photos, process my photos, update my blog, and even “write” (actually “text”) articles on my smartphone (like I’m doing now on my smartphone).

    Funny enough, I can probably text as fast as I can type. I use android and with the “SwiftKey” keyboard, I rarely make typos. Not only that, but I can write ideas while standing (not possible on a laptop with keyboard), while waiting in line at the store, or when in a cramped airline (Ryanair).

    In fact, I’m starting to really wonder nowadays with the cloud and Google services what we really need laptops for. Of course for the power user (heavy video or photo editing) or Excel gurus you’re going to need a computer. But I really feel that 99% of “normal” people no longer need a “normal” computer.

    Bringing the topic back to excuses, there were a lot of articles I wanted to write but I made the excuse that because I didn’t have a laptop, I couldn’t write it. But then I really wanted to write, so I used the only tool I had: my smartphone. And I’m able to “write” on my smartphone just fine.

    So perhaps moving forward, I’m going to do less “writing” on a laptop, and putting down more ideas on my smartphone using Evernote. I really have no more excuses for my tools being insufficient for writing.

    I also used to make excuses that my camera wasn’t good enough for street photography because I didn’t own a Leica. Now that I own a Leica I have finally leaned (the hard way) that the camera is an excuse. Not having a good enough camera is always a bad excuse. The only limitation is your creativity, inspiration, and vision of the world.

    What other excuses have I made in my life and art?

    1. I don’t have enough money to travel to shoot interesting street photos. Solution: shoot your own city.

    2. My camera isn’t good enough. Solution: use the camera you already use.

    3. I don’t know any other photographers to inspire me. Solution: buy photo books and make masters of photography your personal tutors.

    4. I don’t have enough time to shoot. Solution: try to take at least 1 photo a day during your lunch break, before work, after work, or of people you know.

    5. I’m too old. Solution: use your age as benefit (you have great wisdom that young people don’t have, which can aid your learning process). Jack Simon didn’t pick up street photography until he was 65, and at age 70 is one of the best in the world.

    6. I’m not talented or artistic enough. Solution: educate yourself by investing in photography education (artists are made, not born).

    7. I’m too lazy. Solution: use your laziness to your advantage and just use a smartphone and make “boring” photos of your everyday life.

    8. I don’t understand technology. Solution: just use a disposable film camera and get the shots printed at the nearest drugstore as 4×6 prints.

    9. I’m afraid to take photos of strangers without permission. Solution: start off by asking permission. If scared of asking for permission start off by asking friends and family to take their photos. Worst case scenario: your mom will never say no.

    10. I’m not inspired. Solution: shoot first, the inspiration will follow.

    Conclusion

    Don’t make excuses, make photos.

  • Creative Constraints are Freedom: Abstract Street Photography by Maarten Rots

    Creative Constraints are Freedom: Abstract Street Photography by Maarten Rots

    maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-11 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-12 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-13 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-14 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-8 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-10 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-9 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-7 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-6 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-5 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-3 maarten-rots-siting-qlick-editions-15

    Restricting to open up. How less can be more when going out to shoot.

    I am strongly convinced that creating restrictions leads to more freedom and development when it comes to creativity. This may sound very counterintuitive but I have experiences to back up my claims. I just finished an intense week of photographing which led to an exhibition opening last night. It was a great experience and I would like to share some of the things I came across and learned during this week.

    I think we all know how it sometimes can be hard to go out and shoot. We’re all very good at coming up with excuses and it can be tough to break the cycle of non-activity. Next to that it may sometimes feel like we’ve gotten used to a certain way of working which slows down our development so much that it feels like we got stuck and keep coming home with different but the same photographs time after time.

    Work within a frame

    What I like to do to work around this is to set up some rules and make agreements that involve others to push myself a step further. This past week I did exactly that, really enjoyed it and think this can be of help to others as well.

    My project

    I came up with the plan to shoot within a 1000 meter radius only, then pick one photograph each day to be printed and finish up the project by showing the outcome in an exhibition. I pitched the plan – Siting: Qlick Editions – to the nice people of photo gallery Qlick Editions in Amsterdam who were very enthusiastic about the idea and we set a date for the project to happen. As the moment to start came closer I made sure I had nothing else going on during this week and dropped all of my other routines so I could fully focus on this one-week project.

    Each day of the past week I walked through the area, accompanied by my camera, for about 8 to 9 hours and would come back into the space to make my selection. Not always an easy task, but very rewarding as the photo would be printed and delivered to the gallery the next day. As you may know from your own experience it can be very tough to choose that one photo on the day you took it. That’s why I worked together with Eric: every day I would send him my final selection of around 8 images and he would get back to me with constructive criticism; very helpful in order to get to the pick of the day.

    I also devoted a blog to this project on my website so anyone interested could be really involved in the process. I attempted to keep it as open as I could by sharing a lot of the images that did not make the cut, to give some insight into my way of working. Also I used geotagged images to place on a google map to make it possible to see where each image was taken.

    I developed this project with the intention to explore different areas in different cities all over Europe and hopefully on other continents as well.

    My experiences

    Restriction leads to digging deeper into the possibilities that are at hand which may lead to some exciting new discoveries. I truly believe you can find beauty and interesting subject matter anywhere as long as you force yourself to look for it. By limiting the area to work in I did just that and it really gave me a clearer idea of what I’m looking for when I go out searching for interesting photographs. I had to look harder, but also learned to faster recognise the situations that trigger my attention. I had to pull myself through moments when I felt nothing was good enough and exterminate the fear of ending up with a shit picture getting printed. I had to go on when the weather was not as I prefer it when I go take pictures and learned to shoot when it’s a rainy day. I narrowed my scope but didn’t become closed minded, this project actually opened my view and made me see (and capture) things I wouldn’t have seen a month ago.

    Make decisions

    Dealing with the time constraint is a challenge but it keeps you from procrastinating to make decisions that have to be made regardless. Most of the time it really doesn’t help to postpone a decision. Do it now and you are relieved of one more thing that’s in the back of your head messing with your focus and concentration.

    Develop your own project

    I don’t think the boundaries I set myself are necessarily the right ones for you. Restriction can come in many forms and it’s only a matter of applying one or more simple rules to your workflow. For example shoot only between 6 and 7 am, use only one camera and one lens (less really is more and healthy for your back and wallet as well), shoot only in portrait orientation, shoot only one photograph of each scene (edit before shooting) etcetera.

    Also think about restricting yourself in the process that follows a shoot: choose the one best image within an hour after coming home, don’t crop any of your images, make a print of your favourite image once a week and hang it someplace where others can see it (or give it away, people love getting a printed image). Involving others is a very good way to keep things going and stay sharp anyway!

    Change it up

    I believe setting up rules is a very effective way to boost your creative qualities, but it only works when you change it up. Don’t stick with the same rules and restrictions forever, in the end the most important things is to enjoy it and shed a new light on your photography.

    Conclusion

    By restricting you have less to worry about and more energy to focus on what you really want and love to do: make better pictures. It makes you look for other ways to achieve the result you have in mind. It also forces you to get better at working with the smaller amount of tools and possibilities you have left. You will learn to exploit what you have at hand and become better at what you do.

    Go for it, I’m sure you will get something out of it!

    About Maarten

    Maarten Rots is an artist working with photography based out of Amsterdam. In his photographs you can see a sense of abstraction and surrealism found in everyday situations, captured by the camera. He loves printed photography and one of the ways he shares his work is through his self-published quarterly photography magazine March & Rock.

    The exhibition with the results of his one-week project Siting: Qlick Editions will still be on show during the coming week atQlick Editions in Amsterdam.

    Follow Maarten on Instagram: @maartenrots

  • 7 Benefits of Shooting Street Photography With a Smartphone

    7 Benefits of Shooting Street Photography With a Smartphone

    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6
    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6

    I’ve been shooting a lot of photos on my smartphone lately (Samsung Galaxy s6). It has been so much fun and I’ve enjoyed it so much, that I wanted to write an article about my personal experiences and thoughts about the benefits of shooting street photography (and any photos) on a smartphone.

    I often get a lot of questions from aspiring street photographers or photographers in general what kind of advice I would give in terms of what camera to buy. Honestly, my frank answer? Just start off by shooting on your smartphone. There are so many benefits. Some ideas below:

    1. You increase your rate of learning

    Seattle, 2015. Galaxy S6 processed with VSCO b5 preset
    Seattle, 2015. Galaxy S6 processed with VSCO b5 preset

    Some of the best street photographers I know shoot with only smartphones. Not only that, but their rate of learning is incredible. Many talented street photographers on Instagram have only been shooting for a year or two, and have made incredible growth and progress in their photography.

    How? They have constant feedback and quickly learn through shooting all the time, and by sharing images on social media.

    The #1 excuse (and problem) that all of us photographers face is that we don’t shoot enough, and we don’t have our cameras with us.

    But if you think about it, the smartphone is the ultimate camera. It is small, unobtrusive, always with you, and convenient.

    A lot of people say that smartphones aren’t apt cameras because it isn’t “full frame” or whatever. But to be honest, the cameras in the modern smartphones (iPhone 6, Galaxy S6, LG G4, and many others) are pretty incredible. They’re just as good as high end point and shoots from just a few years back.

    Of course a smartphone isn’t going to have the same quality as a full frame, DSLR, or any other “real camera.” But at the end of the day, it isn’t image resolution that makes a good photograph. It is the “quality” of your images, in terms of the emotion, composition, and feeling you give your viewers.

    I shoot with several cameras at the moment; a film Leica MP, a digital Ricoh GR, and a Galaxy S6. Funny enough I’ve been uploading a lot of photos shot on my smartphone on Instagram (after processing in VSCO with the a6 preset), and people have thought they were film Portra 400 shots. Morale of the story? Photos shot on a smartphone can look good.

    Another example: Michael Christopher Brown shot much of his work on his iPhone in Africa, and have made compelling images (that got him into Magnum as a nominee). He didn’t need a fancy or experience Leica to get him in.

    2. You focus on the light

    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6
    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6

    Another thing about smartphones that can help you become a better photographer: you need to focus on capturing good light.

    The sensor of smartphones (while pretty good) still don’t compare to the dynamic range of most high end digital cameras. Therefore getting good light and exposure is even more important.

    One of the biggest fundamentals in photography I wish I learned earlier on is how important light is. I remember when I got my first DSLR (Canon Rebel XT 350D) and was frustrated that my photos didn’t look as epic as the photos I saw online. My mistake? I only shot in shitty and harsh light, and didn’t know anything about good light (shooting at Golden hour or through windows).

    No matter how expensive your camera is, you can’t fake capturing good light. Even if you have mad photoshop skills, you can’t fake good exposure.

    Light can truly transform an ordinary image into an extraordinary one. Epic light evokes emotion, awe, suspense, and drama.

    Therefore if you shoot street photography on your smartphone, really try to focus shooting in good light. Try to focus shooting sunrise or sunset, or just photographing people next to windows or open doorways (Steve McCurry style).

    3. Keep your processing consistent

    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6
    Paris, 2015. Galaxy S6

    I think VSCO is the best smartphone app ever made for photography. The minimalist interface runs like butter, but even better: the presets look damn good. Their analog presets (the “a” series) looks the closest to Kodak Portra 400. Their black and white presets also look amazing.

    I try to shoot with my smartphone like I’m shooting film; I try to stay consistent with one “look.” I am in love with the A6 preset, and always apply it to my images, and therefore all my smartphone images look consistent.

    My advice? Play around with the presets and find one “look” that you dig and stick with it for a while.

    A common mistake I see photographers make is that they have too much variety in their photos by using too many different presets or post processing techniques. Would we love Henri Cartier-Bresson’s work as much if he shot with 20 different types of film in his lifetime? Probably not, we love the consistency of his low contrast black and white images (focused on good composition). We also still remember and love the consistency (and beauty) of Kodachrome color film with Alex Webb and Steve McCurry.

    It’s still fine to experiment with different “looks” in your photography. Just try to do it in different projects (like how a film director uses different equipment and film for different movies).

    3. You can’t make excuses

    Oakland, 2015. Galaxy Note 4
    Oakland, 2015. Galaxy Note 4

    If you are like most modern people, you are probably connected more to your smartphone than your mother or first born child. I know I’m attached to this thing like a leash. I check it first thing when I wake up, and the last thing when I sleep at night. It is so bad that sometimes I get anxiety if my phone isn’t in my pocket (or a foot away).

    In the past I have missed so many shots because I didn’t have a camera on me. But now that I have a smartphone I have no excuses. Sure I would prefer to shoot all of my shots on film. But if I’m at the grocery store or having dinner with Cindy, my smartphone is generally much quicker to take out and shoot with.

    So really we have no more excuses for not having “time” to shoot. The only limitation we have is our own imagination, our curiosity of life, and ability to see the beauty in the mundane.

    If you’re a photographer who owns a big ass camera (or doesn’t carry your camera with you wherever you go) try this experiment: only shoot with a smartphone for a month. Lock all of your expensive cameras in a drawer for that period of time, and you’re only allowed to shoot on your phone. Not only that but shoot everyday.

    After a month, see if this liberates or frustrates you. It might liberate you (and you never end up shooting on a “normal” camera ever again) or you are frustrated enough that you build the diligence to carry your “better” camera with you everywhere you go.

    4. Who cares what you shot it on?

    Orange County, 2015. LG G4
    Orange County, 2015. LG G4

    The most annoying thing a photographer can ask (I’m guilty of this too) is: “What camera did you shoot that photo on?” Personally whenever I ask another photographer that question what I’m really saying is: “Wow I really love your photos, and I aspire to make photos as good as yours. But currently my photos isn’t good enough and I think it is because my camera isn’t good enough or suitable for the job. If I bought your camera, could I become as good a photographer as you?”

    I had a friend (Misho Baranovic) who had a street photography show with my other mate Olly Lang. Both talented street photographers, and had their photos printed for the exhibition. Some random people came by and asked: “Wow, these photos look great. What did you shoot it on?” To pull their let they said: “On a Leica.” One photographer then said: “Oh yeah you can totally tell by the quality of the Leica glass! You really get that “Leica look”, depth, and three dimensional character.” When we told him he was joking and it was shot an iPhone, and we all laughed together.

    If you make a memorable photograph, who gives a damn what camera you shot it on? Do you honestly care? Or are you worried that other people care? Do you feel insecure that if people “found out” you shot a photo on a smartphone, it would somehow devalue your photo?

    For me, I actually respect photographers more when I see that they shot a certain photo on a smartphone. Why? They were able to make a beautiful image with such basic equipment.

    When it comes to photography, sometimes it can be a big dick measuring contest (at least for men). Photography can sometimes be just about showing off your gear and how rich you are, or your status. It’s kind of how the most insecure people buy the most brand name clothes, watches, purses, cars, etc. Funny enough, as a general rule, the more expensive the gear a photographer has, the more insecure they are about their photography.

    Personally one of the main reasons I wanted to get a Leica was because I was lured by the prestige, status, and the legend of Leica. I truly did think that buying a Leica would make me more inspired, creative, cultured, whatever.

    But in reality, it hasn’t changed my photography much. The only real things that have helped my photography: reading photo books, learning from the masters, and shooting more. Sure at the end of the day, I still prefer shooting on a film Leica for the simplicity and ease of use, but at the end of the day, a camera is just a camera.

    5. But what if my smartphone camera sucks?

    Pacific Northwest, 2015. Galaxy Note 4
    Pacific Northwest, 2015. Galaxy Note 4

    Unfortunately there are a lot of smartphone cameras out there with really low resolution.

    In these cases, use that as a benefit. Dando Moriyama shot with a cheap film Ricoh GR and made super grainy black and white shots, while others were using fancy Leica cameras or sharp slr lenses.

    So my suggestion: try shooting black and white and intentionally make your shots high contrast and gritty. Use the downside (low image resolution camera) to your benefit.

    If you use an iPhone (older generations), I’m a big fan of Hipstamatic and the filters. If you use android, get the new snapseed app (which is epic and has great monochrome filters).

    6. Practical tips shooting street photography on a smartphone

    Some practical tips I’ve learned shooting on a smartphone;

    a) Shoot a lot

    The benefit of shooting digital is that it doesn’t matter if you shoot a lot. It doesn’t cost extra money. I also think it is generally better to overshoot a scene than undershoot a scene. Sometimes subtle differences can make the difference between a so so photo, and a great photo. For further reading on the importance of “working the scene”, watch my YouTube lecture or pick up a copy of “Magnum Contact Sheets.”

    So if you see a good scene, keep shooting it until either your subject gets pissed off, walks away, or the moment is over. The problem is that street photographers move on too quickly and don’t shoot a scene enough.

    When I see a good scene and shoot it on my smartphone, I’ll take 20+ photos whenever possible. Some of my favorite smartphone photos were shot with 50+ images.

    b) Look like a dumb tourist

    Shooting on a smartphone makes you look like a dumb tourist. Keep shooting and pretend like you’re not shooting your subject and you’re shooting something in the background.

    For extra dramatic effect, flare our your elbows and knees. Fanny packs are a bonus, and make you almost invisible. I’m only half kidding.

    c) Use the right apps

    Every smartphone is different in terms of performance. I recommend trying out different smartphone camera apps to find what works for you the best.

    For iPhone I recommend the “pro camera” app (you can prefocus and tap the screen to shoot). You can always use the default camera app too. Hipstamatic is also good for cool looking effects.

    For Android, either use your default camera app, or download the Google camera app. Use whatever is faster and more responsive.

    For editing and post processing, I recommend VSCO, Snapseed, or a combination of both.

    If you don’t like sharing your photos as squares, use “Squaready” on the iPhone, or “Square InstaPic” on Android (to share your photos as a rectangle by adding a white or black border).

    You can also try using mobile Lightroom on an iPad, but I find it still a bit clunky.

    7. Instagram tips

    Garden Grove, 2015. LG G4
    Garden Grove, 2015. LG G4

    To be honest, Instagram is by far the most dominant social media platform at the moment. For this reason, I think it’s the best platform to share your images on.

    Don’t focus on getting a lot of likes. Seek to learn. Try to find a few photographers you admire, and seek to get critique or feedback from them by critiquing and giving honest constructive and helpful critique to them.

    Focus more on engagement, communication, and interaction on social media. I would rather have 10 followers who is really active and helpful to me on Instagram, than 10,000 passive followers.

    As a general rule on social media the quality of feedback you get on your photos is equivalent to the feedback you give others. The more you give the more you will receive in return.

    As with hashtags? My personal philosophy: less is more. I try to limit my hashtags to 2 or less. Just try to follow a few hashtags to find good photographers to follow and engage.

    Can’t find any hashtags you like? Start your own, like I did with #streettogs and #buybooksnotgear.

    Conclusion

    Berkeley, 2015. Note 4
    Berkeley, 2015. Note 4

    Chase Jarvis once wrote: “The best camera is the one you have on you.” To expand on that, I think the best camera is the one you just shot a photo on. Meaning, a camera is only important insofar much as it is a tool to capture a certain image, feeling, or emotion you witnessed. The camera is just an intermediary tool for your eyes and heart.

    Nobody gives a shit what camera you use to make images, and neither should you. Shoot with whatever comes is most convenient for you, and “image resolution” doesn’t really matter that much at the end of the day in street photography. Embrace grain, grit, and rawness.

    Lastly, just remember to shoot and enjoy yourself. As large format shooters in the past looked down on medium format shooters, and as they looked down on 35mm shooters, and as film shooters looked down on digital photographers, and full frame digital photographers looked down on crop sensor photographers, looked down on compact cameras, looked down on smartphones. Everyone can be a snob with cameras, there is no end.

    Let’s preach death to the camera. Long live photography!

  • Street Photography Quick Links: May – June 2015

    Street Photography Quick Links: May – June 2015

    SPQL MAY JUNE 2015

    Sorry for missing an entire. It has been a fiery and explosive month for me here. (I even lagged behind my Streettogs Academy duties) but all is well right now. Here’s another round of links, reads, and finds for all of you to digest.  Here you go:

    (more…)

  • Street Photography Shootout: iPhone vs Samsung Galaxy S6

    Street Photography Shootout: iPhone vs Samsung Galaxy S6

    Probably the most fun video I’ve done in a long time: a street photography “Shootout” with bigheadtaco in Vancouver. He used his iPhone 5s while I used my Galaxy S6. The point of the video was to show that smartphones are more than capable cameras for street photography, and often more fun, accessible, and easy.

    What are your thoughts on shooting street photography on your smartphone? Share your thoughts in the comments below!

  • Fun Chat and Interview with bigheadtaco in Vancouver

    Fun Chat and Interview with bigheadtaco in Vancouver

    Had a fun little interview and chat with bigheadtaco while I was in Vancouver. Hope you enjoy the video above, and make sure to also follow his YouTube channel!

  • Paris GoPro Street Photography POV #4

    Paris GoPro Street Photography POV #4

    Hey Streettogs, here is the last gopro video I got from Paris! I hope this gives you some ideas and insights on how I shoot street photography.

    My ultimate lesson in Paris (as well in every country), as long as you shoot with confidence, a smile, and without hesitating, you generally have no problems. I shot there for about 2 weeks solid, and only had one negative incident of a confrontation.

    I have found most Parisians to be very friendly and open (despite what foreigners have told me). I’ve picked up some French phrases, make an effort to try to speak French, and people are generally very happy to see me try.

    Paris is certainly one of the most beautiful places to shoot street photography in the world. If you ever have the chance, come visit, and don’t forget to tell people: “Merci beaucoup” (thank you very much).

  • Try it Out For Yourself

    Try it Out For Yourself

    Aix-en-Provence, 2015
    Aix-en-Provence, 2015

    Recently I got my laptop stolen in Paris from my backpack. It kinda sucked, but the “blessing in disguise” was that I was able to replace my (slightly) aging 11’’ Macbook air (2012 model).

    I started to consider a few options: the 13’’ Macbook Air, the 13’’ Macbook Pro, and the new Retina 12’’ Macbook.

    I then did the typical thing: Google reviews of the laptops which are written by “experts.”

    I trudged through reviews on Engadget, The Verge, Cnet, etc— and became frustrated. All of their opinions contradicted another, and there seemed to always be pros/cons with each laptop.

    Finally fed up, I disregarded all the reviews online and just decided to buy what I was interested in, and to try it out for myself.

    I went to the Apple store in Aix-en-Provence, and picked up the new 12’’ Macbook Retina to try it out. I was happy to know that they had a 14-day return policy, so I could see if I liked the machine or not.

    So the last two days I have been using the new 12’’ Macbook, and I like it a lot. Sure it isn’t the perfect device (it is a little bit slower than my 11’’ Macbook Air) and the lack of ports is a bit of a drawback. But for me, it works well. The majority of my work on a laptop is typing and writing (like I am doing now), and my priority is having the lightest and most compact weight (the 12’’ Macbook is surprisingly even lighter than my 11’’ Macbook air).

    Everyone has their own preferences. No matter how many reviews of anything you resarch online (for a laptop, camera, lens, etc)— your experiences and preferences will always be different from that of a reviewer.

    So for example, let’s say you’re interested in shooting with a film rangefinder. Sure you can read all this stuff online (even on this blog), but you will never truly know the experience until you try it out for yourself.

    We are fortunate enough to live in a society that all of the decisions we make are (mostly) reversible. If you’re interested in a new camera for street photography, my suggestion is this: just buy it and try it out for yourself. If you don’t like it, simply return it. I know that BhPhotoVideo.com offers very generous return policies (30 days).

    As a general philosophy whenever it comes to anything in life, it is good to ask for the opinion and experiences of others. Sometimes it is good to have a starting point to base our own ideas upon.

    However at the end of the day, experience is highly personal. If you have never been to Paris, you can’t simply ask your friends how their experience was. You have to go there and experience it directly for yourself.

    If you’ve never shot film, you will never truly understand how the experience is for you, until you actually try it for yourself.

    Do you have an idea for a photography project? Don’t ask what others think about your idea. Just try shooting the project. Perhaps after you’ve tried shooting that project, you can show others the photos and ask for their opinion.

    Long story short: disregard camera reviews from others (including mine), opinions and experiences of others, and just try things for yourself.

    Live a life of self-experimentation, and have fun.

  • The Street Photography Composition Manual

    The Street Photography Composition Manual

    Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 11.06.12 AM

    Dear streettogs, you might have read it in my last update post from Paris, but I am excited to release my newest free (and “open source“) e-book: “The Street Photography Composition Manual.” The book is a distillation of all the lessons I have learned about composition and street photography, and I put it into a handy PDF which you can print out, carry around on your iPad, or read it from the convenience of your laptop.

    Download

    Book Description

    Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 11.14.25 AM

    “Geometry is the language of man… he has discovered rhythms, rhythms apparent to the eye and clear in the relations with one an- other. And these rhythms are at the very root of human activities. They resound in man by an organic inevitability, the same fine inevi- tability which causes the tracing out of the Golden Section by chil- dren, old men, savages, and the learned.”

    – Le Corbusier (1931, Towards A New Architecture)

    Are you a street photographer and want to learn how to use your intuition to capture better “decisive moments” on the street? Do you feel frustrated that your photos tend to be cluttered, uninteresting, and lack emotion and magic?

    This book will teach you the fundamentals of composition in street photography: the importance of diagonals for dynamic images, strong contrast to separate your subjects from the background via “figure-to-ground,” how to juxtapose your subjects, color theory, and how to create compelling stories.

    “Composition must be one of our constant preoccupations, but at the moment of shooting it can stem only from our intuition, for we are out to capture the fugitive moment, and all the interrelationships involved are on the move.”

    – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    This book will also provide you with contact sheets and a behind-the-scenes look to some of my most iconic images, and how you can create similar images.

    Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 11.14.51 AM

    Furthermore, you will learn how changing your perspective will totally transform your images. A subtle change to your approach will make all the difference in your images:

    “The photographer’s eye is perpetually evaluating. A photographer can bring coincidence of line simply by moving his head a fraction of a millimeter. He can modify perspectives by a slight bending of the knees. By placing the camera closer to or farther from the subject, he draws a detail– and it can be subordinated, or he can be tyrannized by it.”

    – Henri Cartier-Bresson

    This book is a distillation of all the lessons I have learned about street photography and composition over the years. I dispel some of the myths of “the decisive moment,” how you can often see composition after-the-fact, and the secret for making memorable street photographs.

    This is a unique book and no other resource exists quite like it. Consider it your practical one-stop guide and manual for improving your composition in street photography. Furthermore, it is open and free for you to download, print, share, distribute, translate, remix, to help support the community of street photography.

    I have written this out of pure love, and I hope you enjoy reading it as much as I enjoyed putting it together.

    Love,

    Eric Kim

    @ Aix-en-Provence, France / July 1, 2015

    Table of Contents

    Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 11.14.33 AM

    Below is the overview of all the chapters and sections in the book:

    • Introduction to Composition in Street Photography
      • The “Fishing Technique”
      • Leading Lines
      • Perspective & Leading Lines
      • Seeing Leading Lines After-the-Fact
    • Chapter 1: Dynamic Street Photography
      • Hand Gestures
      • Repeating Hand Gestures
      • Not Showing Faces
    • Chapter 2: Horizontal vs Vertical Framing
      • When to Shoot Horizontals vs Verticals?
        • Horizontal Shots
        • Vertical Shots
      • Shooting Both Horizontals and Verticals
    • Chapter 3: Triangles
      • The Golden Triangle: Introduction
        • Applying the Golden Triangle
        • Applying Composition After?
        • The Golden Triangle Overlay in Lightroom
      • Working the Scene
      • To Crop or Not to Crop?
      • Triangles in 3 Subjects
      • Contact Sheets
        • Contact Sheet: Mumbai, 2013
        • Contact Sheet: SF, 2015
      • Composition & Intuition
    • Chapter 4: Figure-to-Ground
      • Look at the Background First
      • The “Figure-to-Ground Test”
        • How to Create Your Own “Figure-to-Ground Test”
        • Example of “Poor” Figure-to-Ground
      • Dramatic Light & Figure-to-Ground
      • Flash & Figure-to-Ground
    • Chapter 5: Juxtaposition
      • Juxtaposing Emotions
      • Juxtaposing Directions
      • Surrealist Juxtaposition
    • Chapter 6: Color Theory
      • Red-Green Complementary Colors
      • Orange-Blue Complementary Colors
        • Contact Sheet: SF, 2015
      • Violet-Yellow Complementary Colors
      • Warm vs Cool Colors
        • Warm Colors
          • Contact Sheet: Tucson, 2013
          • Contact Sheet: Downtown LA, 2013
        • Cool Colors
        • Cool Colors with a Splash of Warm
          • “Is it Street Photography?”
    • Chapter 7: Storytelling
      • Open vs Closed Photos
      • Open-Ended Emotion
      • Eye Contact?
      • Closed Photos
      • Storytelling Without People?
      • Can You Create a Truly “Objective” Photograph?
    • Chapter 8: Conclusion
      • Emotions are King
      • Break the Rules
      • Give Back

    Sample pages from the book

    Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.57.45 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.58.01 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.58.05 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.58.20 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.58.36 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.58.47 AMScreen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.59.20 AM Screen Shot 2015-07-01 at 9.59.40 AM

  • Travel Update: My Experience Shooting Street Photography in Paris, Getting My Backpack Stolen, and Free Composition Ebook

    Travel Update: My Experience Shooting Street Photography in Paris, Getting My Backpack Stolen, and Free Composition Ebook

    I’m on a train to Aix en Provence, to the south of France and wanted to share my experiences shooting street photography in Paris.

    If you read on the internet, apparently there are more strict regulations about image copyright and street photography in France. To my understanding, you can take a photograph of anybody in public, but there are restrictions on publishing a photo of a stranger.

    I have a mantra in life: “It is better to beg for forgiveness than ask for permission.” So generally speaking, I don’t worry much about image copyrights and street photography.

    Shooting street photography has been an absolute pleasure in Paris. Despite the fact that a lot of people say that Parisians are mean and rude, I have found the opposite to be true. I know a tiny bit of French (Cindy is fluent), and whenever we went to restaurants and spoke French, they didn’t default to English (only at a few touristy food stalls near landmarks). People were friendly helping us find where to go, with food recommendations, and great service in general.

    When taking photos of strangers, it was totally fine too. After shooting when I smiled and said “merci beaucoup”, most people smiled back and said no problem. I also asked a lot of people to take their portrait while here, and 90%+ of people said yes.

    I had one experience when I was in a more “ghetto” part of Chatlet and took a photo of some rough looking kids after they asked me not to (my fault). The kid (around 16 years old) approached me and tried to take my camera for me and got a bit aggressive (he had his posse with him). He kept asking me in French to delete the shot, and I tried to explain I shot film. He didn’t understand and was quite angry and refused to let me leave.

    Fortunately there was an onlooker who told the kids to back off in French (once again the friendly French). The kids finally relented, and one of the kids gave me a light backhand to the face and walked off.

    Getting my backpack stolen

    R0132912

    Another fun story: the other day I got my backpack stolen in Republique during the gay pride parade. I finished a super fun day of the workshop and was with my students at a cafe having a beer. We were all laughing, having a good time, and I had my backpack literally right next to my seat. But suddenly I turned away and it was gone. I guess somehow a thief took it while all of us were distracted. None of us saw the thief. We only saw that one of the pins I had on my backpack (a silver airplane pin my friend Jonathan gave me) was on the ground (with a wing bent).

    What did I get stolen in my backpack? Fortunately I had my passport, film, and other valuable belongings back in my airbnb apartment. I lost my laptop (2012 macbook air 11 inch), 3 rolls of film I shot that day, my Leica sf20 flash, some batteries, and not much else.

    Thank God my students jumped to my rescue. Emmanuel, one of the workshop students (who speaks French), took care of me and Cindy by taking us to 3 police stations to file a report, and paid for our uber taxi rides. Unfortunately that day (because of the terrorist bombing in Lyon) we couldn’t file a report. But the next day we did successfully.

    Other good news? I have travel insurance (covered up to $10,000 with GEICO and only pay around $20 a month), and my stuff is covered.

    Honestly I am surprised it took me this long to get my stuff stolen considering how careless I am about my stuff, and how much I travel. I’m just happy I didn’t lose my passport, wallet, and smartphone (I’m typing this out on my phone in Evernote).

    What about my data in my laptop? 95% of my photos and video is backed up in dropbox (premium membership FTW), and 99% of my other data is backed up in the cloud (Gmail, Evernote). I lost some gopro pov films I shot in Paris, but the next day I was inspired to shot more footage (will upload soon). I also changed all my passwords and reset my laptop remotely via the apple “find my phone” application.

    I hope the guy who stole my laptop uses my laptop, maybe learns how to code, and is able to stop his life of crime.

    For a new laptop, I might buy the new MacBook 12” retina (90% of my laptop work is writing and blogging), and I don’t need much speed (I shoot mostly film). Also I think the gold color is pretty sexy haha. Plus the retina screen should be nice for photos. And the weight is super light (.5 pounds lighter than my 11 inch). So perhaps getting my laptop stolen was a blessing in disguise.

    Morale of the story? If you’re traveling, keep your bag or backpack wrapped around your leg or under the table. Always have your important documents back at your hotel or apartment, always backup your files (both to an external hard drive and to the cloud). Also have an extra photo or photo copy of your passport (if it gets stolen, this makes it easier to get a new copy). Also be careful of scammers, and when your intuition says someone seems or looks fishy, follow your gut.

    If you’re traveling, just assume sooner or later you’re going to have your importance stuff stolen. So be prepared in advance what to do if it happens.

    If you shoot digital, buy lots of SD cards, an extra external hard drive, and keep your photos secure (you can always buy a new backpack, laptop, camera, but you can’t recover your photos).

    Thank God I didn’t get my Leica stolen.

    Places to shoot in Paris

    If you’ve never been to Paris, the best places to shoot aren’t in the city center, but around the edges.

    For my airbnb I stayed in both Place d’Italie and Bercy, both great places to shoot street photography (fewer tourists). In Bercy there is a cool Park (bercy Park with a skatepark inside), and the “bercy village.”)

    Near the Gare de lyon train station is good and also inside the station (lots of interesting characters).

    Favorite neighborhoods : the marrais (Jewish neighborhood with the best fallafel and trendy stores, go to las du fallafel), the canal saint martin (cute boutique and bookstores with a beautiful view of the canal, go to “chez prune” for food).

    A bit outside of Paris, highly recommend going to “la defense”, where there are mostly businesspeople and an epic cube arch. Great for architecture street photography.

    Also for architecture and composition, go to the French National Library (BNF).

    For a lot of people, go near the Lafayette gallery, Chatelet, or near Opera.

    My favorite photo gallery? The polka photo gallery (they have a Bruce Gilden exhibition going on, and a great bookstore).

    Favorite meals in Paris (not expensive): Auberge Saint Roch, “cafe constant”, chez Lili et Marcel.

    My shooting

    For this trip in Paris, I shot some for my “Suits” project near la defense, but most of my shooting was on my film Leica on tri x pushed to 1600 with a yellow filter (from my friend Karl Edwards from StreetShootr.com).

    I don’t know why, but suddenly this trip I was inspired to shoot more gopro pov videos, hope you enjoyed them. I plan on doing more of them.

    Most of the shots in black and white are just random photos of interesting things I saw for fun.

    I’ve also been shooting a lot on my smartphone (Galaxy s6), and processing them in color (Vsco a6 preset). Actually really love the colors that come out, they look like portra!

    Honestly, traveling with all this film is kind of a pain in the ass. When doing the gopro video with the Ricoh GR, I fell in love with that camera again. I thought how nice it would be if I did all my traveling with the Ricoh GR (and just leaving the Leica and film at home). Maybe next trip.

    Books I’ve been reading

    I’ve recently become a huge fan of Matthieu Ricard, French scientist turned into Buddhist monk. On my kindle, I’ve read his book “Happiness” (great book that taught me true happiness is serving others), and a new book “Altruism” (inspiring me to devote my life to help others as well).

    Krishnamurti’s “The first and last freedom” was recommended to me by a friend, and his philosophy on creativity and the mind is fascinating.

    Reading “the magic of thinking big” (for inspiration), and for health I read “brain maker” (learned the importance of a healthy stomach).

    My life purpose

    The biggest thing I’ve been meditating on this trip is how to live a meaningful life. My new favorite quote:

    “To live is to be useful to others.” –  Seneca.

    I am fortunate that now through my workshops I’m doing comfortably well financially. Of course I still stress out about money, my future family, security, etc, but I have faith that as long as I keep working hard, helping others, everything will be taken care of.

    I don’t want to die the richest man in the grave. I want to continue to contribute to society, and devote my life to “be useful to others.”

    “The Street Photography Compositional Manual”

    I’ve finished a new ebook on street photography and composition that I was tempted to charge money for. My problem is that 95% of my income is dependent on traveling and teaching workshops, and I wanted to create a new income stream that could allow me to spend more time at home with Cindy, my loved ones, and my future children.

    But then this goes against my philosophy of “open source”, and I need to practice what I preach.

    So upon much deliberation, the book is going to be open source. A suggestion that someone gave me: “Why not make it a ‘pay what you want’ model or accept donations?” I think this is much better.

    I personally feel information should be open, free, and used to empower people.

    You can download the pdf for free below on Dropbox (you don’t need a Dropbox account to download it, just click the download icon from the top bar):

    The Street Photography Composition Manual” (pdf direct download)

    So read it, take a look, and you can pay what you think it is worth here via PayPal:

    Donate via PayPal

    Or you can use this fun form below to help support me and the blog!


    Donations




    I wrote the book all from scratch, and distilled all of the lessons from composition I learned. I had a ton of fun writing it on the Apple iBooks author platform, and I hope to write more books with it.

    When you download the book, feel free to share it with anybody you think it will help. Also feel free to change it, remix it, translate it, or whatever you think will benefit others.

    Upcoming travels and workshops

    The week long workshop in Paris was awesome. I loved getting to know all the students personally, showing them to areas “off the beaten path”, all the good food, beer, wine and coffee, fun laughs, daily critique sessions, and their improvement! I like the more relaxed pace of a week long workshop, plan on doing more of them in the future.

    So I’m heading down to aix en Provence with Cindy (she’s going to study at the archives there), then off to Lisbon with my mom and Cindy’s mom. In aix I hope to do more writing (doing a new book on the masters of street photography). Lisbon is to have fun with fa